AT commands reference guide
GPRS AT Commands
AT Commands
Reference Guide
Copyright and Technical Support
GPRS AT Commands
Reference Guide
This Command Set Applies to the Following Products:
MultiModem® GPRS (MTCBA-G)
MultiModem® GPRS-USB (MTCBA-G-U)
MultiModem® GPRS with Ethernet Interface (MTCBA-G-EN)
MMCModem™ GPRS (MTMMC-G)
SocketModem® GPRS (MTSMC-G)
MultiModem® iCell (MTCMR-G)
MultiConnect™ AW (MT100A2W)
PN S000293K, Revision K
Copyright
This publication may not be reproduced, in whole or in part, without prior expressed written permission from Multi-Tech
Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Copyright © 2003-2009, by Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically
disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. Furthermore, Multi-Tech
Systems, Inc. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the content hereof
without obligation of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. to notify any person or organization of such revisions or changes.
Revisions
Revision Level Date
A
07/15/03
B
03/08/04
C
09/28/04
D
08/04/05
E
F
01/23/06
05/10/07
G
H
I
08/24/07
01/16/08
09/25/08
J
01/16/09
K
07/10/09
Description
Initial release.
Added Values to each command. Added new commands.
Changed data/fax call to ATD<nb>; and voice call to ATD<nb>
Changed Autobauding is supported (operating from 2400 to 115200)
Added “Length of Phone Numbers” section to Chapter 3. Changed maximum length of
phone numbers to 60 digits. Added <mode> to +CMGF values. Added new command,
+CMMS. Removed values 2 and 4 from \N. Increased I/O ports to ten in the index value
of +WIOR and +WIOW. Added more text to +WRIM. Removed one note from +CGCONT.
Changed the font size from 10 point to 9 point; this brought the manual under 200 pages.
Added ®and ™ to products listed on the cover.
Added the +WMBS, a command that supports quad band builds. Updated the Technical
Support contact list.
Updated the +WIND command.
Updated the cover and MMCModem product name.
Updated the +ECHO commands and removed Fax commands. Removed all references to
HR (Half Rate). Added four new Phonebook commands: WCOS, WPGW, WPGR, WPGS.
Added SMS Command: WMCP. Updated to version 6.57d.
Added the MultiModem iCell to the list of products that use this command set. Removed
references to fax commands.
Added the MultiConnect AW to the list of products that use this command set.
Incorporated editorial changes.
Trademarks
MultiModem, SocketModem, and the Multi-Tech logo are registered trademarks of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.
MMCModem and MultiConnect are trademarks of Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.
Technical Support
Country
Europe, Middle East, Africa:
U.S., Canada, all others:
By Email
[email protected]
[email protected]
By Phone
+(44) 118 959 7774
800-972-2439 or 763-717-5863
World Headquarters
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc.
2205 Woodale Drive
Mounds View, Minnesota 55112
Phone: 763-785-3500 or 800-328-9717
Fax: 763-785-9874
Internet Address: http://www.multitech.com
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
2
Table of Contents
Contents
Chapter 1 – Introduction................................................................................................................................................ 9
Scope of This Document ............................................................................................................................................ 9
Related Documents .................................................................................................................................................... 9
Definitions .................................................................................................................................................................. 9
Chapter 2 – AT Command Features ........................................................................................................................... 10
Line Settings ............................................................................................................................................................ 10
Command Line ......................................................................................................................................................... 10
Information Responses and Result Codes ............................................................................................................... 10
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors ................................................................................................................................... 11
SIM Card Insertion and Removal Procedures .......................................................................................................... 11
Background Initialization .......................................................................................................................................... 11
About the Length of Phone Numbers ....................................................................................................................... 11
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands ........................................................................................................................... 13
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI ......................................................................................................................... 13
Request Model Identification +CGMM .................................................................................................................... 13
Request Revision Identification +CGMR ................................................................................................................ 13
Product Serial Number +CGSN..............................................................................................................................14
Select TE Character Set +CSCS ............................................................................................................................ 14
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS ........................................................................................................................ 14
Request IMSI +CIMI ............................................................................................................................................... 15
Card Identification +CCID....................................................................................................................................... 15
Capabilities List +GCAP ......................................................................................................................................... 15
Repeat Last Command A/ ....................................................................................................................................... 15
Power Off +CPOF ................................................................................................................................................... 16
Set Phone Functionality +CFUN ............................................................................................................................ 16
Phone Activity Status +CPAS................................................................................................................................. 17
Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE ............................................................................................................... 17
Keypad Control +CKPD ......................................................................................................................................... 17
Clock Management +CCLK .................................................................................................................................... 18
Alarm Management +CALA.................................................................................................................................... 18
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands .......................................................................................................................... 19
Dial Command D .................................................................................................................................................... 19
Hang-Up Command H ............................................................................................................................................ 20
Answer a Call A ...................................................................................................................................................... 21
Remote Disconnection ............................................................................................................................................. 21
Extended Error Report +CEER .............................................................................................................................. 21
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS ................................................................................................................................... 21
Redial Last Telephone Number DL ........................................................................................................................ 22
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D ............................................................................................................................. 23
Automatic Answer S0 ............................................................................................................................................. 23
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB .................................................................................................................................. 24
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS ........................................................................................................................ 24
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT ..................................................................................................................................... 24
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT .......................................................................................................................... 26
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER ....................................................................................................... 26
Echo Cancellation +ECHO ..................................................................................................................................... 27
SideTone Modification +SIDET .............................................................................................................................. 30
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP ............................................................................................................................ 30
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
3
Table of Contents
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands .................................................................................................................. 31
Signal Quality +CSQ ............................................................................................................................................... 31
Operator Selection +COPS .................................................................................................................................... 31
Network Registration +CREG................................................................................................................................. 33
Operator List Management +WOLM ...................................................................................................................... 33
Read Operator Name +WOPN ................................................................................................................................ 34
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS ............................................................................................................... 36
Preferred Operator List +CPOL .............................................................................................................................. 37
Read Operator Name +COPN................................................................................................................................ 39
Chapter 7 – Security Commands ................................................................................................................................ 40
Enter PIN +CPIN .................................................................................................................................................... 40
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 ................................................................................................................................................ 42
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC .............................................................................................................. 42
Facility Lock +CLCK ............................................................................................................................................... 43
Change Password +CPWD .................................................................................................................................... 44
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands .......................................................................................................................... 45
Introduction to Phonebook Commands .................................................................................................................... 45
About the Parameters .............................................................................................................................................. 45
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS ........................................................................................................... 46
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR .......................................................................................................................... 47
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW.............................................................................................................................49
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF ............................................................................................................................ 52
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP ......................................................................................................................... 53
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN ........................................................................................................................ 54
Subscriber Number +CNUM................................................................................................................................... 55
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP ................................................................................................................... 56
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP ........................................................................................................................... 56
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM .............................................................................................................................. 56
Contact Selector +WCOS........................................................................................................................................ 57
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW ................................................................................................... 57
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR ........................................................................................................................ 58
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS ................................................................................................................ 59
Chapter 9 – Short Messages ....................................................................................................................................... 60
Parameters Definition ............................................................................................................................................... 60
Select Message Service +CSMS ............................................................................................................................ 61
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA ............................................................................................................. 61
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS ...................................................................................................................... 63
Preferred Message Format +CMGF ....................................................................................................................... 64
Save Settings +CSAS ............................................................................................................................................ 65
Restore Settings +CRES ........................................................................................................................................ 65
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH ..................................................................................................................... 65
New Message Indication +CNMI ............................................................................................................................ 66
Read Message +CMGR ......................................................................................................................................... 68
List Message +CMGL ............................................................................................................................................. 69
Send Message +CMGS ......................................................................................................................................... 70
Write Message to Memory +CMGW ....................................................................................................................... 71
Send Message from Storage +CMSS .................................................................................................................... 72
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP ........................................................................................................................ 72
Delete Message +CMGD ....................................................................................................................................... 73
Service Center Address +CSCA ............................................................................................................................ 74
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB ...................................................................................................... 74
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
4
Table of Contents
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM..........................................................................................................75
Message Status Modification +WMSC ................................................................................................................... 75
Message Overwriting +WMGO...............................................................................................................................76
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS ................................................................................................... 77
Copy Messages +WMCP ....................................................................................................................................... 78
More Messages to Send +CMMS .......................................................................................................................... 79
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands .................................................................................................. 80
Call Forwarding +CCFC .......................................................................................................................................... 80
Call Barring +CLCK ................................................................................................................................................ 81
Modify SS Password +CPWD ................................................................................................................................ 81
Call Waiting +CCWA .............................................................................................................................................. 82
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR .......................................................................................................... 83
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP ....................................................................................................... 83
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP ............................................................................................... 84
Advice of Charge +CAOC ...................................................................................................................................... 85
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM ............................................................................................................................ 85
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM ........................................................................................................... 86
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC............................................................................................................86
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD ....................................................................................................... 87
List Current Calls +CLCC ....................................................................................................................................... 88
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN ......................................................................................................... 89
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD ............................................................................................... 90
Closed User Group +CCUG .................................................................................................................................... 91
Chapter 11 – Data Commands .................................................................................................................................... 92
Using AT Commands During a Data Connection ..................................................................................................... 92
Bearer Type Selection +CBST ............................................................................................................................... 93
Select Mode +FCLASS .......................................................................................................................................... 94
Service Reporting Control +CR ............................................................................................................................... 94
Cellular Result Codes +CRC .................................................................................................................................. 95
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR.................................................................................................................. 95
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP ................................................................................................................ 96
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT ..................................................................................................................... 96
Select Data Compression %C ................................................................................................................................. 97
V42bis Data Compression +DS..............................................................................................................................97
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR .................................................................................................................. 98
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N .................................................................................................................... 98
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands ..................................................................................................................... 99
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR ............................................................................................................................................. 99
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF ...................................................................................................................... 100
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC ...................................................................................................................... 101
Set DCD Signal &C .............................................................................................................................................. 101
Set DTR Signal &D............................................................................................................................................... 102
Set DSR Signal &S............................................................................................................................................... 102
Back to Online Mode O ......................................................................................................................................... 102
Result Code Suppression Q ................................................................................................................................. 102
DCE Response Format V ..................................................................................................................................... 103
Default Configuration Z ........................................................................................................................................ 103
Save Configuration &W ......................................................................................................................................... 103
Auto-Tests &T ...................................................................................................................................................... 104
Echo E.................................................................................................................................................................. 104
Restore Factory Settings &F ................................................................................................................................ 104
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
5
Table of Contents
Display Configuration &V ..................................................................................................................................... 105
Request Identification Information I ...................................................................................................................... 105
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX ................................................................................................................................... 106
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands ...................................................................................................................... 107
Cell Environment Description +CCED .................................................................................................................. 107
General Indications +WIND .................................................................................................................................. 109
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC .................................................................................................... 111
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER ........................................................................................................ 112
Read Language Preference +WLPR .................................................................................................................... 113
Write Language Preference +WLPW ................................................................................................................... 113
Read GPIO Value +WIOR ..................................................................................................................................... 114
Write GPIO Value +WIOW ................................................................................................................................... 114
Input/Output Management +WIOM ...................................................................................................................... 115
Abort Command +WAC ........................................................................................................................................ 116
Play Tone +WTONE ............................................................................................................................................. 117
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF .................................................................................................................................. 118
Downloading +WDWL .......................................................................................................................................... 118
Voice Rate +WVR ................................................................................................................................................. 119
Data Rate +WDR ................................................................................................................................................. 120
Select Voice Gain +WSVG ................................................................................................................................... 121
Status Request +WSTR ....................................................................................................................................... 121
Scan +WSCAN ..................................................................................................................................................... 122
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM ................................................................................................................................ 122
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K ....................................................................................................................... 123
Change Default Melody +WCDM ......................................................................................................................... 123
Custom Character Set +WCCS ............................................................................................................................ 124
Lock +WLCK ........................................................................................................................................................ 125
CPHS Command +CPHS ..................................................................................................................................... 126
Unsolicited Result: Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI................................................................................................... 128
Unsolicited Result: Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI ............................................................................................... 128
Network Operator Name +WNON ........................................................................................................................ 129
CPHS Information +WCPI .................................................................................................................................... 129
Customer Service Profile +WCSP ......................................................................................................................... 130
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR ......................................................................................................................... 130
Change Default Player +WCDP ............................................................................................................................ 130
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN ........................................................................................................................ 131
Alternate Line Service +WALS ............................................................................................................................. 132
Wavecom Open AT Control Command +WOPEN ............................................................................................... 133
Reset +WRST ...................................................................................................................................................... 135
Set Standard Tone +WSST .................................................................................................................................. 135
Hang-up +WATH .................................................................................................................................................. 136
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS .............................................................................................................................. 137
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit ........................................................................................................................................... 138
Overview of SIM Application Toolkit ....................................................................................................................... 138
Messages Exchanged During a SIM Toolkit Operation .......................................................................................... 139
SIM Toolkit Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 140
SIM Toolkit Set Facilities +STSF .......................................................................................................................... 140
SIM Toolkit Indication +STIN or +STRIL .............................................................................................................. 142
SIM Toolkit Get Information +STGI ...................................................................................................................... 143
Unsolicited Result: SIM Toolkit Control Response +STCR .................................................................................. 146
SIM Toolkit Give Response +STGR ..................................................................................................................... 146
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
6
Table of Contents
Chapter 15 – GPRS commands ................................................................................................................................ 149
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT ........................................................................................................................ 149
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ .................................................................................................. 151
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable +CGQMIN .................................................................................. 154
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT ........................................................................................................................ 155
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT ..................................................................................................... 156
Enter Data State +CGDATA ................................................................................................................................. 157
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS ............................................................................................................. 158
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS ................................................................................................ 159
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP ...................................................................................................................... 160
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG...................................................................................................... 161
Request GPRS IP Service D ................................................................................................................................ 162
Network Requested PDP Context Activation .......................................................................................................... 163
Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation +CGAUTO ........................................... 164
Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation +CGANS .................................................. 165
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR ......................................................................................................................... 166
Cellular Result Codes +CRC ................................................................................................................................ 166
Service Reporting Control +CR ............................................................................................................................ 167
Extended Error Report +CEER ............................................................................................................................ 167
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS ....................................................................................................... 168
Examples of Full GPRS AT Commands ................................................................................................................. 170
Chapter 16 – Other AT Commands ........................................................................................................................... 171
V.25ter Recommendation ....................................................................................................................................... 171
GSM 07.05 Recommendation ................................................................................................................................ 171
GSM 07.07 Recommendation ............................................................................................................................... 171
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables ................................................................................... 172
Chapter Summary .................................................................................................................................................. 172
ME Error Result Code: +CME ERROR: <error>................................................................................................... 173
Message Service Failure Result Code +CMS ERROR ......................................................................................... 174
Specific Error Result Codes ................................................................................................................................... 174
Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation +CEER ................................................................................... 176
Specific Failure Cause for +CEER ......................................................................................................................... 177
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating SM-Transfer ....................................................................................... 178
Unsolicited Result Codes ....................................................................................................................................... 179
Final Result Codes ................................................................................................................................................. 179
Intermediate Result Codes ..................................................................................................................................... 179
Parameter Storage Mode ....................................................................................................................................... 180
GSM Sequences List.............................................................................................................................................. 182
CPHS Information Field.......................................................................................................................................... 184
CSP Constants ....................................................................................................................................................... 185
Appendix B - ME SIM Toolkit Support ...................................................................................................................... 187
Appendix C – Structure of the Terminal Profile ...................................................................................................... 188
Appendix D – Command Type and Next Action Indicator ..................................................................................... 190
Appendix G – Coding of Alpha fields in the SIM for UCS2 ..................................................................................... 191
Appendix F – Command Execution and Dependence on SIM................................................................................ 193
General Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 193
Call Control Commands ......................................................................................................................................... 193
Network Service Commands .................................................................................................................................. 194
Security Commands ............................................................................................................................................... 194
Phonebook Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 194
Short Messages Commands .................................................................................................................................. 194
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
7
Table of Contents
Supplementary Services Commands ..................................................................................................................... 195
Data Commands .................................................................................................................................................... 195
V24-V25 Commands .............................................................................................................................................. 195
Specific AT Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 196
SIM Toolkit Commands .......................................................................................................................................... 196
GPRS Commands .................................................................................................................................................. 197
Index ........................................................................................................................................................................... 198
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
8
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Chapter 1 – Introduction
Scope of This Document
This document describes the AT-command based messages exchanged between an application and the Multi-Tech Systems,
Inc. products in order to manage GSM-related events or services.
Related Documents
This interface specification is based on the following recommendations:
[1] ETSI GSM 07.05: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
Use of DTE-DCE interface for Short Message Service (SMS) and Cell Broadcast Service (CBS)
[2] ETSI GSM 07.07: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
AT command set for GSM Mobile Equipment (ME)
[3] ITU-T Recommendation V.25 ter: Serial asynchronous automatic dialing and control
[4] ETSI GSM 03.40: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
Technical implementation of the Short Message Service (SMS) Point-to-Point (PP)
[5] ETSI GSM 03.38: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2);
Alphabets and language-specific information
[6] ETSI GSM 04.80: Digital cellular telecommunications system (Phase 2):
Mobile radio interface layer 3, Supplementary service specification, Formats and coding
Definitions
The words, “Mobile Station” (MS) or “Mobile Equipment” (ME) are used for mobile terminals supporting GSM services.
Terminal Equipment (TE) is the Man-Machine Interface of a GSM device (modem or handset). A TE can be a handset
MMI or the AT Command interface.
A call from a GSM mobile station to the PSTN is called a “mobile originated call” (MOC) or “outgoing call”, and a call
from a fixed network to a GSM mobile station is called a “mobile terminated call” (MTC) or “incoming call”.
In this document, the word “product” refers to any Multi-Tech product supporting the AT commands interface.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
9
Chapter 2 – AT Command Features
Chapter 2 – AT Command
Features
Line Settings
A serial link handler is set with the following default values (factory settings):
•
Autobaud
•
8 bits data
•
1 stop bit
•
no parity
•
RTS/CTS flow control
Please use the +IPR, +IFC and +ICF commands to change these settings.
Command Line
Commands always start with AT (which means ATtention) and finish with a <CR> character.
Information Responses and Result Codes
Responses start and end with <CR><LF>, except for the ATV0 DCE response format and the ATQ1 (result code
suppression) commands.
•
If the command syntax is incorrect, an ERROR string is returned.
•
If the command syntax is correct but transmitted with the wrong parameters, the +CME ERROR: <Err> or +CMS
ERROR: <SmsErr> strings are returned with adequate error codes if the CMEE was previously set to 1. By
default, CMEE us set to 0, and the error message is only “ERROR”.
•
If the command line has been performed successfully, an OK string is returned.
In some cases, such as “AT+CPIN?” or (unsolicited) incoming events, the product does not return the OK string as a
response.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
10
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors
SIM Card Insertion and Removal Procedures
SIM card Insertion and Removal procedures are supported. Software functions rely on positive reading of the hardware
SIM detect pin. This pin state (open/closed) is permanently monitored.
When the SIM detect pin indicates that a card is present in the SIM connector, the product tries to set up a logical SIM
session. The logical SIM session will be set up or not depending on whether the detected card is a SIM Card or not. The
AT+CPIN? command delivers the following responses:
•
If the SIM detect pin indicates “absent”, the response to AT+CPIN? is “+CME ERROR 10” (SIM not inserted).
•
If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted Card is a SIM Card, the response to AT+CPIN? is
“+CPIN: xxx” depending on SIM PIN state.
•
If the SIM detect pin indicates “present”, and the inserted Card is not a SIM Card, the response to AT+CPIN? is
CME ERROR 10.
•
These last two states are not given immediately due to background initialization. Between the hardware SIM
detect pin indicating “present” and the previous results the AT+CPIN? sends “+CME ERROR: 515” (Please wait,
init in progress).
When the SIM-detect pin indicates card absence, and if a SIM Card was previously inserted, an IMSI detach procedure is
performed, all user data is removed from the product (Phonebooks, SMS etc.). The product then switches to emergency
mode.
When the hardware SIM detect pin is not managed, the software cannot know the state of the SIM (SIM inserted or SIM
removed) except for the initialization of the modem. In this case, the SIM must be present in the rack before the
initialization of the modem can be taken into account.
If the SIM is removed and it had been detected at the time of initialization of the modem, the following message is
displayed: +CME ERROR: 13. If the SIM is inserted in the rack and it was not present at the time of the initialization of the
modem, the state of the SIM remains unchanged (SIM removed). It will have to initialize the modem again so that it is
detected.
Background Initialization
After entering the PIN (Personal Identification Number), some SIM user data files are loaded into the product
(Phonebooks, SMS status, etc.). Please be aware that it might take some time to read a large phonebook.
The AT+CPIN? command response comes just after the PIN is checked. After this response user data is loaded (in
background). This means that some data may not be available just after PIN entry is confirmed by ’OK’. The reading of
phonebooks will then be refused by “+CME ERROR: 515” or “+CMS ERROR: 515” meaning, “Please wait, service is not
available, init in progress”.
This type of answer may be sent by the product at several points:
•
When trying to execute another AT command before the previous one is completed (before response),
•
When switching from ADN to FDN (or FDN to ADN) and trying to read the relevant phonebook immediately,
•
When asking for +CPIN? status immediately after SIM insertion and before the product has determined if the
inserted card is a valid SIM Card.
About the Length of Phone Numbers
Phone numbers can consist of up to 60 digits. The first 20 digits are stored in the SIM in the phonebook file (EFADN, EFFDN
or EFLND) corresponding to the selected phonebook. The next digits are stored in other extension SIM files (EFEXT1 or
EFEXT2).
Example:
Number of Digits
1 to 20
21 to 40
41 to 60
Nb of Records in EFADN
1
1
1
Nb of Records in EFEXT1
0
1
2
If there are no more free records in the EFEXT1, the behavior is:
•
if the user tries to store an entry that exceeds 20 digits: +CME: 20
•
if the user tries to dial an number that exceeds 20 digits: +CME: 20
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
11
Chapter 3 – General Behaviors
Since the maximum length for the numbers in the ADN, FDN, and LND phonebooks is 60 digits:
•
if the user tries to dial a number that exceeds 60 digits: +CME: 3
Before the user can perform a call, the number of free records in the EFEXT1 is checked for availability of free space to
store this number.
•
If there are free records left, the call is setup.
•
Otherwise, +CME: 20 error is returned (Memory Full).
See Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
12
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands
Chapter 4 – General AT
Commands
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Displays the manufacturer identification.
No parameters
AT+CGMI
Command
AT+CGMI
Note: Get manufacturer identification
Possible Responses
WAVECOM MODEM
OK
Note: Command valid, Wavecom modem
Request Model Identification +CGMM
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Displays the supported frequency bands. With multi-band products the response may be a combination
of different bands.
No parameters
AT+CGMM
Command
AT+CGMM
Note: Get hardware version
AT+CGMM
Note: Get hardware version
AT+CGMM
Note: Get hardware version
AT+CGMM
Note: Get hardware version
AT+CGMM
Note: Get hardware version
AT+CGMM
Note: Get hardware version
Possible responses
MULTIBAND 900E 1800
OK
Note: Multiband: GSM 900 MHz extended band and DCS
1800 (default configuration)
900E
OK
Note: 900 Extended
1800
OK
Note: DCS
1900
OK
Note: PCS
G850
OK
Note: GSM 850
MULTIBAND G850 1900
OK
Note: Multiband: GSM 850 and PCS
Request Revision Identification +CGMR
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Displays the revised software version.
No parameters
AT+CGMR
Command
AT+CGMR
Note: Get software version
Possible responses
657_09gg.Q2406B 2015268 100506 17:01
OK
Note: Software release 6.57, generated on the 5th of October
2006
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
13
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands
Product Serial Number +CGSN
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Allows the user application to get the IMEI (International Mobile Equipment Identity, 15-digit number) of
the product.
No parameters
AT+CGSN
Command
AT+CGSN
Note: Get the IMEI
AT+CGSN
Note: Get the IMEI
Possible responses
012345678901234
OK
Note: IMEI read from EEPROM
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: IMEI not found in EEPROM
Select TE Character Set +CSCS
Description:
Values:
Default:
Syntax:
Informs the modem which character set is used by the DTE. The modem can convert each character of
entered or displayed strings. This is used to send, read or write short messages. See also +WPCS for
the phonebooks’ character sets.
<Character Set>
GSM
GSM default alphabet.
PCCP437
PC character set code page 437.
CUSTOM
User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).
HEX
Hexadecimal mode. No character set used; the user can read or write hexadecimal
values.
GSM alphabet
AT+CSCS=<Character Set>
Command
AT+CSCS=”GSM”
Note: GSM default alphabet
AT+CSCS=”PCCP437”
Note: PC character set code
AT+CSCS=?
Note: Get possible values
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+CSCS: ("GSM","PCCP437","CUSTOM","HEX")
OK
Note: Possible values
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Informs the modem which character set is used by the DTE for the phonebooks. The modem can
convert each character of entered or displayed strings. This is used to read or write phonebook entries.
See also +CSCS for the short messages character sets.
<Character Set>
TRANSPARENT Transparent mode. The strings are displayed and entered as they are stored in
SIM or in ME.
CUSTOM
User defined character set (cf. +WCCS command).
HEX
Hexadecimal mode. No character set used; the user can read or write
hexadecimal values.
AT+WPCS=<Character Set>
Command
AT+WPCS=”TRANSPARENT”
Note: Transparent mode
AT+WPCS=”CUSTOM”
Note: Custom character set
AT+WPCS=?
Note: Get possible values
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+WPCS: ("TRANSPARENT","HEX","CUSTOM")
OK
Note: Possible values
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
14
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands
Request IMSI +CIMI
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Reads and identifies the IMSI (International Mobile Subscriber Identity) of the SIM card. The PIN may
need to be entered before reading the IMSI.
No parameters
AT+CIMI
Command
AT+CIMI
Note: Read the IMSI
Possible responses
208200120320598
OK
Note: IMSI value (15 digits), starting with MCC (3 digits) / MNC (2 digits,
3 for PCS 1900)
Card Identification +CCID
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Orders the product to read the EF-CCID file on the SIM card.
No parameters
AT+CCID
Command
AT+CCID
Note: Get card ID
AT+CCID?
Note: Get current value
AT+CCID= ?
Note: Get possible value
Possible responses
+CCID: “123456789AB111213141”
Note: EF-CCID is present, hexadecimal format
+ CCID: “123456789AB111213141”
Note: Same result as +CCID
OK
Note: No parameter but this command is valid
Note: If there is no EF-CCID file present on the SIM, the +CCID answer will not be sent, but the OK message will
be returned.
Capabilities List +GCAP
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Displays the complete list of capabilities.
No parameters
AT+GCAP
Command
AT+GCAP
Note: Get capabilities list
Possible responses
+GCAP: +CGSM +FCLASS
OK
Note: Supports GSM commands
Repeat Last Command A/
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Repeats the previous command. Only the A/ command itself cannot be repeated.
No parameters
A/
Command
A/
Note: Repeat last command
Possible responses
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
15
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands
Power Off +CPOF
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Stops the GSM software stack as well as the hardware layer or modem activity. The AT+CFUN=0
command is equivalent to +CPOF.
No parameters
AT+CPOF[=1]
Command
AT+CPOF
Note: Stop GSM stack
AT+CPOF=1
Note: Stop the modem
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
Note:
After AT+CPOF[=1], the modem will not respond to AT commands. To reset it, use the hard
reset.
Note: I
n autobaud mode, after an AT+CPOF, unsolicited information that wakes up the modem is
sent at 9600 bps until an AT command is sent. When an AT command is sent, the modem
will synchronize to the sender’s speed.
Caution: When starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been received, the
product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600 baud.
Set Phone Functionality +CFUN
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Selects the mobile station’s level of functionality. When the application wants to stop the product with a
power off, or if the application wants to force the product to execute an IMSI DETACH procedure, then it
must send: AT+CFUN=0 (equivalent to AT+CPOF).
This command executes an IMSI DETACH and makes a backup copy of some internal parameters in
SIM and in EEPROM. The SIM card cannot then be accessed.
If the mobile equipment is not powered off by the application after this command has been sent, a restart command (AT+CFUN=1) will have to issued to restart the whole GSM registration process.
If the mobile equipment is turned off after this command, then a power on will automatically restart the
whole GSM process.
The AT+CFUN=1 command restarts the entire GSM stack and GSM functionality: a complete software
reset is performed. All parameters are reset to their previous values if AT&W was not used.
If you write entries in the phonebook (+CPBW) and then reset the product directly (AT+CFUN=1, with
no previous AT+CFUN=0 command), some entries may not be written (the SIM task does not have
enough time to write entries in the SIM card).
In addition, the OK response will be sent at the last baud rate defined by the +IPR command. With the
autobauding mode the response can be at a different baud rate, it is therefore preferable to save the
defined baud rate with AT&W before directly sending the AT+CFUN=1 command.
<functionality level>
0 Set minimum funtionality; IMSI detach procedure
1 Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset
AT+CFUN=<functionality level>
Command
AT+CFUN?
Note: Ask for current functionality level
Possible responses
+CFUN: 1
OK
Note: Full functionality
AT+CFUN=0
OK
Note: Set minimum functionality, IMSI detach procedure
Note: Command valid
AT+CFUN=1
OK
Note: Set the full functionality mode with a complete software reset Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
16
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands
Phone Activity Status +CPAS
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Returns the activity status of the mobile equipment.
<pas>
0 ready (allow commands from TA/TE)
1 unavailable (does not allow commands)
2 unknown
3 ringing (ringer is active)
4 call in progress
5 asleep (low functionality)
AT+CPAS
Command
AT+CPAS
Note: Current activity status
Possible responses
+CPAS: <pas>
OK
Report Mobile Equipment Errors +CMEE
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Disables or enables the use of the “+CME ERROR: <xxx>” or “+CMS ERROR:<xxx>” result code
instead of simply “ERROR”. See the Appendix for +CME ERROR Result Codes description and +CMS
ERROR result codes.
<error reporting flag>
0 Disable ME error reports; use only << ERROR >>
1 Enable <<+CME ERROR: <xxx> >> or
<< +CMS ERROR: <xxx> >>
AT+CMEE=<error reporting flag>
Command
AT+CMEE=?
AT+CMEE=0
Note: Disable ME error reports, use only << ERROR >>
AT+CMEE=1
Note: Enable << +CME ERROR: <xxx> << or
<< +CMS ERROR: <xxx> >>
Possible responses
+CMEE: (0,1)
OK
OK
OK
Keypad Control +CKPD
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Emulates the modem keypad by sending each keystroke as a character in a <keys> string.
The supported GSM sequences are listed in the Appendix A.
If emulation fails, a +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
If emulation succeeds, the result depends on the GSM sequence activated.
Note: In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning “call forwarding”
are allowed only if the entire sequence is written in the FDN.
<keys>
Keyboard sequence; string of the following characters (0-9, *, #)
AT+CKPD=<keys>
Command
AT+CKPD=”*#21#”
Note: Check every call forwarding status
AT+CKPD=”1234”
Note: Sequence not allowed
Possible responses
+CCFC: 0,7
+CME ERROR 3
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
17
Chapter 4 – General AT Commands
Clock Management +CCLK
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Sets or gets the current date and time of the ME real-time clock.
<date and time string>
String format for date/time is “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss”
Note: Valid years are 98 (for 1998) to 97 (for 2097). The second field is not mandatory. Default
st
date/time is “98/01/01,00:00:00” (January 1 , 1998 / midnight).
AT+CCLK=<date and time string>
Command
AT+CCLK=”00/06/09,17:33:00”
Note: set date to June 9th, 2000, and
time to 5:33pm
AT+CCLK=”00/13/13,12:00:00”
Note: Incorrect month entered
AT+CCLK?
Note: Get current date and time
Possible responses
OK
Note: Date/Time stored
+CME ERROR 3
+CCLK: “00/06/09,17:34:23”
OK
Note: current date is June 9th, 2000
current time is 5:34:23 pm
Alarm Management +CALA
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Sets the alarm date/time in the modem. The maximum number of alarms is 16.
Note: The date/time should be set with the AT+CCLK command prior to using AT+CALA.
<date and time string> String format for alarms: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss” (see +CCLK)
Note: Seconds are taken into account.
<index> Offset in the alarm list, range 1 to 16
AT+CALA=<date and time string> (set alarm)
AT+CALA=””,<index> (delete alarm)
Command
AT+CALA=”00/06/09,07:30”
th
Note: set an alarm for June 9 , 2000 at 7:30 am
AT+CALA=”99/03/05,13:00:00”
Note: set an alarm for March 5th, 1999 at 1:00 pm
AT+CALA?
Note: list all alarms
AT+CALA=””,3
Note: delete alarm index 3
AT+CALA?
Note: list all alarms
Possible responses
OK
Note: Alarm stored
+CME ERROR 3
Note: Invalid alarm (date/time expired)
+CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1
+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2
+CALA: “00/06/10,23:59:00”,3
Note: three alarms are set (index 1, 2, 3)
+CALA: “00/06/08,15:25:00”,1
Note: an alarm occurs (index 1)
OK
Note: Alarm index 3 deleted
+CALA: “00/06/09,07:30:00”,2
Note: Only one alarm (index 2)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
18
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Chapter 5 – Call Control
Commands
Dial Command D
Description:
The ATD command sets a voice or data call. As per GSM 02.30, the dial command also controls
supplementary services.
Data Calls
For a data call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product (the bearer must be
previously selected with the +CBST command):
ATD<nb> where <nb> is the destination phone number. Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already
running, the setting of CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.
Voice Calls
For a voice call, the application sends the following ASCII string to the product: (the bearer may be
selected previously, if not a default bearer is used).
ATD<nb>; where <nb> is the destination phone number.
Emergency Calls
For emergency calls:
These Emergency Numbers are available without a SIM card:
000, 08, 110, 112, 118, 119, 911 and 999.
These Emergency Numbers are available with a SIM card:
When EF_ECC file is missing from SIM: 112 and 911.
When SIM includes an EF_ECC file: 112, 911 and any emergency numbers available in the
EF_ECC file.
International Numbers
For an international number, the local international prefix does not need to be set (usually 00) but does
need to be replaced by the ‘+’ character.
Example: to set up a voice call to Multi-Tech offices from another country, the AT command is:
“ATD+17637853600;”
Some countries/regions may have specific numbering rules for their GSM handset numbering.
Values:
<nb>
<I>
<mem>
<index>
<name>
Destination phone number
Optional parameter.
<I> means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation)
<i> means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation)
Phonebook (one of SM, LD, MC, ON, ME, RC, MT or SN). A default value can be selected
by using the +CPBS command.
Call number at indicated offset from the phonebook selected by the +CPBS command.
Call number corresponding to given name from the phonebook selected by the +CPBS
command.
The response to the ATD command is one of the following:
Verbose result code Numeric code
Description
(with ATV0 set)
OK
0
if the call succeeds, for voice call only
CONNECT <speed> 10,11,12,13,14,15 if the call succeeds, for data calls only, <speed> takes
the value negotiated by the product.
BUSY
7
If the called party is already in communication
NO ANSWER
8
If no hang up is detected after a fixed network time-out
NO CARRIER
3
Call setup failed or remote user release. Use the
AT+CEER command to know the failure cause
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
19
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Direct Dialing from a Phonebook (stored in the SIM card) can be performed with the following commands:
ATD> <index>;
to call <index> from the selected phonebook (by the +CPBS command)
ATD> “BILL”;
to call “BILL” from the selected phonebook
ATD> mem <index> allows direct dialing from a phonebook number
<mem> is SM, LD, MC, ME, RC, MT or SN.
See +CPBS command
Syntax:
ATD<nb>[<I>][;]
ATD>[<mem>]<index>[<I>][;]
ATD>[<mem>]<name>[<I>][;]
Command
AT+CPBS?
Note: Which phonebook is selected ?
ATD>SM6;
Note: Call index 6 from AND phonebook
Possible responses
+CPBS:”SM”,8,10
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 8
locations are used and 10 locations are
available
OK
Note: Call succeeds
When the FDN phonebook has been locked, only numbers beginning with the digits of FDN
phonebook entries can be called.
For example, if “014629” is entered in the FDN phonebook all the phone numbers beginning with these
6 digits can be called.
The CLIR supplementary service subscription can be overridden for this call only.
“I” means “invocation” (restrict CLI presentation).
“i” means “suppression” (allow CLI presentation).
Control of CUG supplementary service information by “G” or “g” is allowed for this call only. The
index and info values set with the +CCUG command are used.
An outgoing call attempt could be refused if the AOC service is active and credit has expired (NO
CARRIER).
When trying to set up an outgoing call while there is an active call, the active call is first put on hold,
then the call set up is carried out.
As per GSM 02.30, GSM sequences may be controlled using dial commands. These sequences can
contain “*”, “#”, but “;” is forbidden.
If the sequence is not supported or fails, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned. In the case, where the FDN
phonebook is activated, the sequences concerning call forwarding are allowed only if they are written in
the FDN. See Codes and Values Appendix for the list of supported sequences.
Command
ATD*#21#
Note: Check any call forwarding status
ATD**61*+33146290800**25#
Note: Register call forwarding on no reply, with no reply
timer fixed at 25 s.
ATD*2#
Note: Bad sequence
Possible responses
+CCFC: 0,7
Note: No call forwarding
OK
Note: done
+CME ERROR 3
Hang-Up Command H
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
The ATH (or ATH0) command disconnects the remote user. In the case of multiple calls, all calls are
released (active, on-hold and waiting calls). The specific ATH1 command has been appended to
disconnect the current outgoing call, only in dialing or alerting state (i.e., ATH1 can be used only after
the ATD command, and before its terminal response (OK, NO CARRIER, ...)
It can be useful in the case of multiple calls.
<n>
0 Ask for disconnection (default value)
1 Ask for outgoing call disconnection
ATH<n>
Command
Possible responses
ATH
OK
Note: Ask for disconnection
Note: Every call, if any, is released
ATH1
OK
Note: Ask for outgoing call disconnection Note: Outgoing call, if any, is released
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
20
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Answer a Call A
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
When the product receives a call, it sets the RingInd signal and sends the ASCII “RING” or “+CRING:
<type>” string to the application (+CRING if the cellular result code +CRC is enabled). Then it waits for
the application to accept the call with the ATA command.
No parameters.
ATA
Command
ATA
Note: Answer to this incoming call
ATH
Note: Disconnect call
Possible responses
RING
Note: Incoming call
OK
Note: Call accepted
OK
Note: Call disconnected
Remote Disconnection
This message is used by the product to inform the application that an active call has been released by the remote user.
The product sends “NO CARRIER” to the application and sets the DCD signal.
In addition, for AOC, the product can release the call if credit has expired (release cause 68 with +CEER command).
Extended Error Report +CEER
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command gives the cause of call release when the last call set up (originating or answering) failed.
No parameters
AT+CEER
Command
ATD123456789;
Note: Outgoing voice call
AT+CEER
Note: Ask for reason of release
Possible responses
NO CARRIER
Note: Call setup failure
+CEER: Error <xxx>
OK
Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values
from GSM recommendation 04.08 or specific Call
accepted
Note: “NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for failure diagnosis.
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS
+VTD
Description:
The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command is
used to define tone duration (the default value is 70 ms ± 5 ms according to 3GPP 23.014).
Values:
<n> tone duration.
This refers to an integer <n> that defines the length of tones emitted as a result of the +VTS
command. This does not affect the D command.
A value different than zero causes a tone of duration <n> *100 milliseconds.
A value of zero (default value) causes a tone duration of 70 ms ± 5 ms.
Note: The value is used modulo 256.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
21
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Syntax:
AT+VTD=<n>
Command
AT+VTD=6
Note: To define 600 ms tone duration
AT+VTD=0
Note: To set the default value (70 ms ± 5 ms)
AT+VTD?
Note: Query current tone duration
AT+VTD=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
AT+VTD: <n>
OK
AT+VTD: <0-255>
OK
+VTDS
Description:
The product enables the user application to send DTMF tones over the GSM network. This command
enables tones to be transmitted only when there is an active call.
Values:
<Tone> DTMF tone to transmit.
Tone is in {0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D}
Command Syntax: AT+VTS=<Tone>
Command
Possible responses
AT+VTS=A
OK
Note: Command valid
AT+VTS=11
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: To set the default value
Note: If the <Tone> is wrong
AT+VTS=4
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: If there is no communication
AT+VTS=”1”;+VTS=”3”;+VTS=”#”
OK
Note: Set tone sequence 13#
Syntax:
Redial Last Telephone Number DL
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command redials the last number used in the ATD command. The last number dialed is displayed
followed by “;” for voice calls only.
No parameters
ATDL
Command
ATDL
Note: Redial last number
Possible responses
0146290800;
OK
Note: Last call was a voice call. Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
22
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D
Description:
This command enables and disables:
•
Automatic dialing of the phone number stored in the first location of the ADN phonebook, (or
FDN phonebook, if it is activated using the +CLCK command).
•
Automatic sending of the short message (SMS) stored in the first location of the SIM.
The number is dialed when the DTR OFF switches ON.
The short message is sent when DTR OFF switches ON.
Values:
<n> (0-2)
Syntax:
Enables or disables automatic message transmission or number dialing. Informs the
product that the number is a voice number rather than a data number.
%D0
Disables automatic DTR number dialing / message transmission.
%D1;
Enables automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Dials the phone number
in the first location of the ADN phonebook (or FDN phonebook, if it is activated using the
+CLCK command). Voice call with semicolon.
%D1
Activates automatic DTR dialing if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Dials the phone
number in the first location of the ADN phonebook (or FDN phonebook, if it is activated
using the +CLCK command). Data call without semicolon.
%D2
Activates automatic DTR message transmission if DTR switches from OFF to ON. Sends
the short message in the first location of the SIM.
Note: If the first location is empty:
• AT%D1 and AT%D2 commands will receive an OK response.
• The DTR ON event will trigger a CME ERROR: 21 or a CMS ERROR: 321
Command Syntax: AT%D<n>[;]
Command
Possible responses
AT%D1;
OK
Note: Activates DTR number dialing
Note: Command has been executed
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON
OK
Note: Number in the ADN’s first location is dialed automatically
DTR switches OFF
Note: The product goes on-hook
AT%D2
OK
Note: Activates DTR short message sending
Note: Command has been executed
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON
+CMSS: x
Note: The first short message is being sent
AT%D1;
OK
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON
+CME ERROR: 21
Note: No phone number in the ADN phonebook’s first location
(or FDN phonebook if it’s activated using the +CLCK command)
AT%D2;
OK
DTR is OFF
DTR switches ON
+CME ERROR: 321
Note: No short message in the first location of the SIM
Automatic Answer S0
Description:
This S0 parameter determines and controls the product automatic answering mode.
Values:
<value>
Syntax:
Command Syntax: ATS0=<value>
Command
ATS0=2
Note: Automatic answer after 2 rings
ATS0?
The number of rings before an automatic answer (3 characters padded with zeros)
Range of values is 0 to 255.
Note: Current value
ATS0=0
Note: No automatic answer
Possible responses
OK
002
OK
Note: always 3 characters padded with zeros
OK
Note: Command valid
All others S-parameters (S6,S7,S8 …) are not implemented.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
23
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command sets the type of incoming calls when no incoming bearer is given (see +CSNS).
Note: Setting the +CICB command affects the current value of +CSNS.
<mode>
0 Data
2 Speech
AT+CICB=<mode>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CICB=2
OK
Note: If no incoming bearer, force a voice call Note: Command accepted
AT+CICB?
+CICB: 2
Note: Interrogate value
OK
Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call
AT+CICB=?
+CICB: (0-2)
Note: Test command
OK
Note: Speech or data default incoming bearer
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
Selects the bearer to be used when an modem single numbering scheme call is set up (see +CICB).
Note: Setting the +CSNS command affects the current value of +CICB.
<mode>
0 Voice
4 Data
AT+CSNS
Command
Possible responses
AT+CSNS=0 Note: force a voice call OK
Note: Command accepted
AT+CSNS?
Note: Interrogate value +CSNS: 0
Note: Default incoming bearer: voice call
AT+CSNS=? Note: Test command
+CSNS: (0,2,4) Note: Voice or data default incoming
bearer
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command is used by the application to tune the receive gain of the speaker and the transmit gain
of the microphone.
<Rgain> is the reception gain
<Tgain> is the transmission gain
AT+VGR=<Rgain> and AT+VGT=<Tgain>
Command
Possible responses
AT+VGR=25
OK
Note: Command valid
AT+VGT=45
AT+VGR?
Note: Interrogate value
AT+VGR=?
Note: Test command
AT+VGT?
Note: Interrogate value
AT+VGT=?
Note: Test command
OK
+VGR: 128
OK
+VGR: (0-255)
OK
+VGT: 32
OK
+VGT: (0-255)
OK
Note: Command valid
Note: Default receive gain
Note: Possible values
Note: Default transmit gain
Note: Possible values
Note: For the AT+VGT? command with controller 1, the value is the lower value of range; whereas,
with controller 2, the value corresponds to the entered value using AT+VGT=xx.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
24
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
The application sends the following:
AT+VGR=<val> for receive gain
0 to 15
16 to 31
32 to 47
48 to 63
64 to 79
80 to 95
96 to 111
112 to 127
128 to 143
144 to 159
160 to 175
176 to 191
192 to 207
208 to 223
224 to 255
+6 db
+4 db
+2 db
+0 db
-2 db
-4 db
-6 db
-8 db
-10 db
-12 db
-14 db
-16 db
-18 db
-20 db
-22 db
AT+VGT=<val>
Controller 1
0 to 31
32 to 63
64 to 95
96 to 127
128 to 159
160 to 191
192 to 223
224 to 255
for transmit gain
Controller 1
+30 db
+33 db
+36 db
+39 db
+42 db
+45 db
+48 db
+51 db
AT+VGT=<val>
Controller 2
0
1
2
3
…
19
20
21
22
23
…
58
59
60
61
62
…
101
102 to 127
128 to 243
244
245
246
…
255
for transmit gain
Controller 2
+0 db
+0,5 db
+1 db
+1,5 db
…
+9,5 db
+10 db
+10.5 db
+11 db
+11.5 db
+29 db
+29.5 db
+30 db
+30,5 db
+31 db
…
+50,5 db
+51 db
-6,5 db
-6 db
-5,5 db
-5 db
…
-0,5 db
The gain values listed here are relative, for absolute (electrical) values please refer to the specific hardware
documentation of the module used in the application.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
25
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT
Description:
This command mutes the microphone input on the product (for the active microphone set with the
+SPEAKER command). This command is only allowed during a call.
Values:
<mode>
0 microphone mute off (default value).
1 microphone mute on.
Syntax:
AT+CMUT=<mode>
Command
AT+CMUT=?
Note: Test command
AT+CMUT?
Note: Ask for current value
AT+CMUT=1
Note: Mute ON (call active)
AT+CMUT?
Note: Ask for current value
AT+CMUT=0
Note: Mute OFF (call not active)
Possible responses
+CMUT: (0,1)
OK
Note: Enable / disable mute
+CMUT: 0
OK
Note: Current value is OFF
OK
Note: Command valid
+CMUT: 1
OK
Note: Mute is active (call active)
+CME ERROR:3
Note: Command not valid
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER
Description:
This specific command selects the speaker and the microphone set.
Values:
<ActiveSpkMic>
0 Speaker One, Micro One
1 Speaker Two, Micro Two
Syntax:
AT+SPEAKER=<ActiveSpkMic>
Command
AT+SPEAKER=0
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE
AT+SPEAKER?
AT+SPEAKER=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
+SPEAKER: 0
OK
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active
+SPEAKER: (0,1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
26
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Echo Cancellation +ECHO
Description:
This command enables, disables or configures the Echo Cancellation functions for voice calls (in rooms,
in cars, etc.).
It is necessary to tune the Microphone gain (AT+VGT) and the Speaker gain (AT+VGR) before
activating the Echo Cancellation.
Notes:
•
You can activate/deactivate the echo cancellation during a call without resetting the product if
the <Algold> parameter is not changed, but have to used the syntax with all parameters:
AT+ECHO=1,6,30,8000,256 for instance.
•
To use Echo Cancellation 6, the ECHO feature must be activated.
•
Note that Echo Cancellation algorithms may not be available on some modems:
Modem
Q24 Plus (AMR)
Values:
Algorithm 6 Support
Yes
Algorithm 3 Support
No
<mode>
0 Deactivate Echo
1 Activate Echo
When mode = 1 is choosen, AlgoId is mandatory.
<status>
0 Echo Deactivated
1 Echo Activated for Mic/Spk One
2 Echo Activated for Mic/Spk Two
3 Reset the product
Note: <Status> does not indicate the currently selected speaker. If Echo is activated, it indicates
the speaker for which Echo parameters are set. Echo can be activated on a non-selected speaker.
<AlgoId>
1 Echo cancellation 1
6 Echo cancellation 6: AEC algorithm
Note that Echo Cancellation algorithms may not be available on some modems. Refer to the
description above.
•
Echo Cancellation 1 (4 parameters):
♦ <Volout> Specifies the maximum attenuation of the switch
0
31 db (default)
1
29 db
2
27 db
3
25 db
…
14
3 db
15
1 db
♦ <Step> Specifies the attenuation step between attenuation and no attenuation.
0
1 db
1
2 db
2
3 db
3
4 db (default)
♦ <PcmThRel> Specifies the relative threshold between max and min energy information.
The allowed range is [0 - 31]. Default = 10.
♦ <PcmThMax> Specifies threshold of max energy information.
The allowed range is [0 - 31]. Default = 7.
•
Echo Cancellation 6 (12 parameters):
♦ <AlgoParam> High value leads to high echo attenuation but the full-duplex quality will be
less efficient.
The allowed range is [ 0 - 63 ]. (30 by default)
♦
♦
<NoiseThres> indicates the noise threshold. Low value leads to high noise attenuation.
The threshold 32767 indicates no noise attenuation. The allowed range is [0 - 32767].
The default is 50. The values above 512 have no effect (noise reduction will be disabled)
<NmbTaps> indicates the Number of Taps of the Adaptive Filter. The allowed range is [2 256].
The default is 256.
64 taps = short Echo
256 taps = long Echo
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
27
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
♦
<ConvergenceTime1> Convergence time in quiet condition:
This parameter expresses duration as the number of GSM speech frames (20 ms each)
containing far end speech, upon which the switch only mechanism must run in quiet
conditions. The allowed range is [162 - 32767].
The default is 200.
♦
<ConvergenceTime2> Convergence time in noise condition:
This parameter is the same as ConvergenceTime1 but for the noise condition. The
allowed range is [162 - 32767].
The default is 550.
Important Note: <ConvergenceTime2> must be greater than or equal to
<ConvergenceTime1>
♦
<NoiseLevelMAX> Upper bound of the noise floor estimate:
This parameter is expressed as an integer of 16 bits and corresponds to the rounded
value of the noise floor estimate expressed in dB (log2). The allowed range is
[NOISE_LEVEL_MIN+1 - 31] with NOISE_LEVEL_MIN being a constant
(NOISE_LEVEL_MIN=4 in the current implementation).
The default is 15.
♦
<DetectionThreshold> Far-end speech detection threshold:
In order to detect far end speech on the loudspeaker's signal, the SNR is computed
regarding the far end signal power and the far end signal noise floor level. This parameter
specifies a threshold on the SNR above which the switch mechanism will be activated.
This parameter is expressed as an integer of 16 bits and must be in the range [0 - 32767].
The default is 32767.
♦
<CNGAdjust> Comfort noise volume gain:
Although the comfort noise volume will self adjust to the estimated ambient noise level, it
is possible to artificially reduce its level. This parameter is expressed in fixed point as a
signed Q15, meaning that 32767 stands for 1.0, and 0 for 0.0. It ranges fro 0 to 32767.
Setting this value to 0 means no comfort noise.
The default is 32767.
♦
<CNGParam1>, <CNGParam2>: 16 bits comfort noise AR2 coefficients:
The user will set the AR2 coefficients for a specific car. Their value will be estimated on a
recorded noise sequence by means of a tool provided by Wavecom (C or Matlab source
code) The recorded sequence shall be made in the noisy conditions and contain noise
only.
The allowed range is [0 - 65535].
The default for CNGParam1 is 27484.
The default for CNGParam2 is 38697.
♦
<CNGGain>: 16 bits comfort noise AR2 gain coefficients:
This specifies the gain of the AR2 filter used for comfort noise generation. It will be
estimated by the same tools use to estimate <CNGParam1> and <CNGParam2>.
It is represented as a Q15 of 16 bits. The allowed range is [0 - 32767].
The default is 7311.
♦
<SOMValue>: Switch attenuation value at the beginning of the call:
This parameter will range from 1 to 16 and set the depth of the attenuation of the transmit
audio signal when speech is detected on the distant side.
The default is 4.
♦
<NoiseEstimate>: Value of the noise floor estimate written by the DSP (only in case
of active communication):
The allowed range is [0 - 32] when a communication is active. Otherwise, the returned
value is 65535.
Notes:
•
The field <NoiseEstimate> is present only for Algold 6 and only in the response to
AT+ECHO?
•
When a new algoid is selected, AT+ECHO? returns 3 for the mode. The changes will
be taken into account after a reset.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
28
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
For Algold=1:
AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,<PcmThMax>]]
For Algold=6:
AT+ECHO=<mode>[,<Algold>[,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>,<ConvergenceTime
1>,<ConvergenceTime2>,<NoiseLevelMAX>,<DetectionThreshold>,<CNGAdjust>,<CNGPara
m1>,<CNGParam2>,<CNGGain>,<NmbDelay>]]
Response Syntax:
For Algold=1:
ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<VolOut>,<Step>,<PcmThRel>,<PcmThMax>
For Algold=6:
ECHO: <status>,<Algold>,<AlgoParam>,<NoiseThres>,<NmbTaps>,<ConvergenceTime1>,
<ConvergenceTime2>,<NoiseLevelMAX>,<DetectionThreshold>,<CNGAdjust>,<CNGParam1
>,<CNGParam2>,<CNGGain>,<NmbDelay>,<NoiseEstimate>
Command
AT+CMEE=1
Note: Enables the use of result code
AT+SPEAKER?
AT+SIDET=0
Note: Deactivate the Sidetone
AT+SIDET?
AT+ECHO?
Note: Read current settings
AT+ECHO=1,1,0,6,10,7
Note: Active Echo cancellation 1 for Mic/Spk one.
AT+ECHO?
Note: Read current settings
AT+ECHO=1,6,30,8000,256
Note: Activate the Echo cancellation 6
AT+ECHO?
Note: Read the Echo cancellation settings
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the product
AT+ECHO?
Note: Read current settings
AT+ECHO=0
Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation
AT+ECHO=0
Note: Deactivate the Echo Cancellation
AT+ECHO=1,6,30,50,256,200,
550,15,32767,27484,38697,7311,2
Note: Activate the Echo Cancellation 6
AT+ECHO?
Note: Read the Echo Cancellation settings
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the product
AT+ECHO?
Note: Read the Echo Cancellation settings
Possible responses
OK
+ SPEAKER: 0
OK
Note: Speaker ONE and Micro ONE are active
OK
+SIDET: 0,0
+ECHO: 0,1,0,6,10,7
OK
OK
+ECHO: 1,1,0,3,10,7
OK
+CME ERROR: 519
Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a
reset of the product
+ECHO: 6,30,8000,256
OK
OK
+ECHO: 1,6,30,8000,256
OK
OK
OK
+CME ERROR:519
Note: The new algorithm will be activated after a
reset of the product
+ECHO: 6,30,50,256,200,550,15,32767,32767,
27484,38697,7311,2,65535
OK
OK
+ECHO: 1,6,30,50,256,200,550,15,32767,32767,
27484,38697,7311,2,65535
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
29
Chapter 5 – Call Control Commands
SideTone Modification +SIDET
Description:
This command sets the level of audio feedback in the speaker (microphone feedback in the speaker).
Values:
<val1>
0
1
<val2>
0
1
2
3
Syntax:
SideTone is disabled
SideTone is enabled
(default value 0 will be used if this parameter is not given)
0 db
- 6 db
- 12 db
- 18 db
AT+SIDET=<val1>,<val2>
Command
AT+SIDET=1,0
AT+SIDET?
Note: Current value
AT+SIDET=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
+SIDET: 1,0
OK
Note: Command valid
+SIDET: (0-1),(0-3)
OK
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP
Description:
This command allows factory settings for voice parameters to be restored from EEPROM.
These voice parameters include:
•
Gain control (+VGR & +VGT commands)
•
Gain controller (+WSVG command)
•
Microphone mute control (+CMUT command)
•
Speaker & Microphone selection (+SPEAKER command)
•
Echo cancellation (+ECHO command)
•
Side tone modification (+SIDET command)
Values:
<n>
1 Restore all voice parameters.
Other values are not supported.
Syntax:
AT+VIP=<n>
Command
AT+VIP?
AT+VIP=2
Note: Syntax error
AT+VIP=1
Note: Restore the factory settings from EEPROM
AT+VIP=1
Note: Restore the factory settings from EEPROM
with the current Echo cancellation algorithm
(different of the default algorithm).
AT+VIP=?
Note: List of supported <n>s
Possible responses
+VIP: 1
OK
+CME ERROR: 3
OK
Note: The command has been executed
CME ERROR: 519
Note: Reset the product to accept the new
algorithm.
+VIP: (1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
30
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Chapter 6 – Network Service
Commands
Signal Quality +CSQ
Description:
This command determines the received signal strength indication (<rssi>) and the channel bit error rate
(<ber>) with or without a SIM card inserted.
Values:
<rssi>:
0
1
2 to 30
31
99
-113 dBm or less
-111 dBm
-109 to –53 dBm
-51dBm or greater
not known or not detectable
<ber>:
0…7:
99
as RXQUAL values in the table GSM 05.08
not known or not detectable
Syntax:
AT+CSQ
Command
AT+CSQ
Possible responses
+CSQ: <rssi>,<ber>
OK
(Note: <rssi> and <ber> as defined below)
Operator Selection +COPS
Description:
There are three possible ways of selecting a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) operator:
•
The product is in manual mode. It then tries to find the operator specified by the application
and if found, tries to register.
•
The product is in automatic mode. It then tries to find the home operator and if found, tries to
register. If not found, the product automatically searches for another network.
•
The product enters into manual/automatic mode, and then tries to find an operator as
specified by the application (as in manual mode). If this attempt fails, it enters automatic
mode. If this is successful, the operator specified by the application is selected. The mobile
equipment then enters into automatic mode.
Note: The read command returns the current mode and the currently selected operator. In manual
mode, this PLMN may not be the one set by the application (as it is in the search phase).
These commands are not allowed during communication.
Values:
<mode>
0 automatic (default value)
1 manual
2 deregistration; ME will be unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected.
3 set only <format> (for read command AT+COPS?)
4 manual / automatic (<oper> shall be present), if manual selection fails, automatic mode is
entered.
<format> <format>: format of <oper> field
0 long alphanumeric format <oper>
1 short alphanumeric format <oper>
2 numeric <oper> (default value)
<stat> Status of operator
0 unknown
1 available
2 current
3 forbidden
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
31
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
<oper> Operator identifier (MCC/MNC in numeric format only for operator selection)
The long alphanumeric format can be up to 16 characters long (see Codes and Values Appendix
for operator names description, field is “Name”). The short alphanumeric format can be up to 8
characters long.
Syntax:
To force an attempt to select and register on a network, the application must send this command:
Command Syntax: AT+COPS=<mode>, [<format> [ , <oper> ] ]
Possible Responses for AT+COPS=<mode>
Possible Responses
OK
+CME ERROR: 30
+CME ERROR: 32
+CME ERROR: 3
+CME ERROR: 4
+CME ERROR: 527
+CME ERROR: 528
+CME ERROR: 529
+CME ERROR: 546
+CME ERROR: 547
Meaning
Network is selected with full service
No network service
Network not allowed – emergency calls only
Not allowed during communication
Incorrect parameters
Please wait, and retry your selection later
Location update failure – emergency calls only
Selection failure – emergency calls only
Emergency call is not allowed without SIM
Emergency call is allowed without SIM
Note: The error codes +CME ERROR: 546 and +CME ERROR: 547 are only returned if the SIM is not
present. The fact that network support emergency call (+CME ERROR: 547) does not imply that
emergency call without the SIM is working. To find out if it is working is to use the ATD112 command.
Response Syntax for AT+COPS?:
+COPS: <mode> [, <format>, <oper> ]
Response Syntax for AT+COPS=?: +COPS: [list of supported (<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>,
short alphanumeric <oper>s, numeric <oper>) s]
Notes:
•
If an incoming call occurs during a PLMN list request, the operation is aborted
(+CME ERROR: 520) and the unsolicited RING appears.
•
If SPN (Service Provider Name) is present in the SIM, it will be returned in both long and short
alphanumeric <oper> fields. The string in the “short” field will be the SPN truncated to the
appropriate character number.
The following operations are allowed with the SIM inserted or the PIN activated:
AT+COPS?
Get Current PLMN
AT+COPS=?
List allowed PLMN
AT+COPS=1,2,<plmn> Manually set current PLMN
Command
AT+COPS?
Note: Ask for current PLMN
AT+COPS=?
Note: Ask for PLMN list
AT+COPS=1,2,20810
Note: Ask for registration on SFR network
AT+COPS=1,2,23433
Note: Ask for registration on UK Orange
network
AT+COPS=0
Note: Ask for registration in automatic mode
AT+COPS=3,0
Note: Set <format> to long alphanumeric
AT+COPS?
Note: Ask for current PLMN
AT+COPS=2
Note: Ask for deregistration from network
AT+COPS?
Note: Ask for current PLMN
Possible responses
+COPS: 0,2,20801
OK
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom Orange
+COPS: (2,”F SFR”,”SFR”,”20801”), (3,”F-BOUYGUES
TELECOM”,”BYTEL”,”20820”),(3,”Orange
F”,”Orange”,”20801”
OK
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom SFR, BYTEL and
Orange networks have been detected
+CME ERROR: 32
Note: Network not allowed – emergency calls only
+CME ERROR: 529
Note: Selection failed – emergency calls only
OK
Note: Succeeded
OK
+COPS: 0,0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Home PLMN is France Telecom Orange
OK
Note: Succeeded
+COPS: 2
Note: ME is unregistered until <mode>=0 or 1 is selected
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
32
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Network Registration +CREG
Description:
This command is used by the application to ascertain the registration status of the product.
Values:
<mode>
0 Disable network registration unsolicited result code (default)
1 Enable network registration code result code +CREG: <stat>
2 Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CREG:
<stat>,<lac>,<ci> if there is a change of network cell.
<stat>
0 Not registered, ME is not currently searching for a new operator.
1 Registered, home network.
2 Not registered, ME currently searching for a new operator to register to.
3 Registration denied.
4 Unknown.
5 Registered, roaming.
<lac>: String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format (e.g., “00C3” equals 195 in
decimal).
<ci>: String type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CREG= <mode>
Response syntax: +CREG: <mode>, <stat> [ ,<lac>,<ci> ] for AT+CREG? Command only
Command
AT+CREG?
Possible responses
+CREG: <mode>,<stat>
OK
Note: As defined here-above
AT+CREG=0
OK
Note: Disable network registration unsolicited result code Note: Command valid
AT+CREG=1
OK
Note: Enable network registration unsolicited result code Note: Command valid
AT+CREG=2
OK
Note: Enable network registration and location
Note: Command valid
information unsolicited result code
AT+CREG=?
+CREG: (0-2)
Note: 0,1,2 <mode> values are supported
Operator List Management +WOLM
Description:
This command allows a new or modified operator to be added to the PLMN list. Up to 10 PLMNs can be
created and stored in the flash memory.
Please note that if two entries with the same network (MCC+MNC), but have different names, are
entered, the first entry will be used.
Values:
<mode>
0 Delete
1 Write
2 Read
<loc>
Location. If this parameter is not filled with <mode>=1, the location will be the first empty one.
<NumOper>
Operator in numeric format.
<short name>
The short name of the PLMN.
<long name>
The long name of the PLMN.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
33
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WOLM=<mode>,<loc>,[,<NumOper>,<short name>,<long name>
Response Syntax for AT+WOLM=? OK
Response Syntax for AT+WOLM?
(lists all the available PLMN)
Command
AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,”WM”,”WM PLMN”
Note: Add a new PLMN at location 1
AT+WOLM=2,1
Note: Read the PLMN at location 1
AT+WOLM=2,11
Note: Read the PLMN at location 11
AT+WOLM=1,1,20812,”WM1”,”WM1 PLMN”
Note: Modify and existing PLMN
AT+WOLM=?
Note: Test command
AT+WOLM?
Note: Display current list
AT+WOLM=1,,20813,”PLMN2”,PLMN2 LONG”
Note: Add a new PLMN at available location
AT+WOLM=0,1
Note: Delete an entry at location 1
AT+WOLM=0,11
Note: Delete an entry at location 11
Possible responses
OK
+WOLM: 1,20812,”WM”,”WM PLMN”
OK
+CME ERROR: 21
Note: Invalid index
OK
Done
OK
+WOLM: 1,20812,”WM1”,”WM1 PLMN”
OK
Note: List the created PLMN in flash
OK
Or
+CME ERROR: 20
Note: Error returns if no more PLMN can be created
OK
+CME ERROR: 21
Note: Invalid index
Read Operator Name +WOPN
Description:
This command returns the operator name in alphanumeric format when given the numeric format being
given.
With the E-ONS (Enhanced Operator Name Service) feature, <lac> is an optional parameter to read
names from OPL/PNN sim files. If it is not entered, name will be given with current <lac>. Note that in
limited service, current <lac> is set to 0.
It also allows the erasing of NITZ PLMN names stored in the flash memory by using AT+WOPN=3,0”.
When the modem receives a NITZ (Network Information and Time Zone) message with Long Name or
Short Name information, an entry with registered PLMN and names in the message is created in the
flash memory. These names will then be used with +COPS, +COPN, +WOPN and +CPOL with the
priority order defined in 3GPP TS 22.101. The modem supports only network names with the GSM
default alphabet coding schemes.
The user can choose which of the following methods will be used for getting PLMN names using the
command: AT+WOPN=4,<PlmnOns>.
The priority order is:
1 E-ONS
First entry if on Home PLMN or matching entry if existing in OPL/PNN SIM files.
2 CPHS
If on Home PLMN, use SIM file CPHS ONS (0x6F14) for Long Name if present and SIM
file CPHS SONS (0x6F18) for Short Name if present; if not present, reuse SIM file
CPHS ONS.
3 SPN
If on Home PLMN, use SIM file SPN (0x6F46) if present.
4 NITZ
If there is a matching entry in the list of names received so far, use it. Note that in
France, for example, all the operators use the NITZ message for the Date and Time
feature, but not for PLMN names, so the list is always empty. In France, the NITZ
message is sent on a GPRS attachment.
FLASH
If there is a matching entry in the flash PLMN list (created by +WOLM), use it.
5 ROM
PLMN names in the ROM defined according to MoU SE.13 and NAPRD Operator
Names documents.
Note:
Once a long name is found following this priority order, it is given as a response to the
AT command.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
34
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Values:
<mode>
0 Use long alphanumeric format
1 Use short alphanumeric format
2 Reserved for future use
3 Erase NITZ PLMN list if <NumOper> = 0
4 Access to EEPROM to read or write the method to use for getting PLMN names
Read access if <NumOper> omitted
Write access if <NumOper>(=<PlmnOns>) provided.
<NumOper> is the operator in numeric format.
<AlphaOper> is the operator in long or short alphanumeric format (see Codes and Values for Operator
Names in the Appendix).
<lac> is the two byte Location Area Code to be used to get the PLMN name. If it is not entered, the
current lac will be used (0 if limited service). It is provided as an integer value.
<PlmnOns> is a bit-field with the following coding:
Bit 0
E-ONS
Bit 1
CPHS
Bit 2
SPN
Bit 3
NITZ
Bit 4
FLASH
Bit 4 (FLASH)
Bit 3 (NITZ)
Bit 2 (SPN)
Bit 1 (CPHS)
Bit 0 (E-ONS)
Bit value is 1 for Activate and 0 for Deactivate the method. <PlmnOns> value should be provided
as a decimal value.
1
1
1
1
1
Example: <PlmnOns>=31 means that the four methods will be used for PLMN names (bit-field
value is 1111 or 0x1F).
Operation Flow for Field PlmnOns
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
35
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WOPN=<format>,<NumOper>[,<lac>]
Response syntax: +WOPN: <format>,<AlphaOper>
Command
AT+WOPN=?
Note: Test command
AT+WOPN=0,20801
Note: Give an operator in numeric format
Possible responses
OK
+WOPN: 0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Alphanumeric answer
AT+WOPN=0,99999
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: Give a wrong operator
Note: Not found
AT+WOPN=0,2081,36
+WOPN: 0, “OrangeF”
Note: Give an operator in numeric format for lac 36 OK
Note: Alphanumeric answer
AT+WOPN=3,0
OK
Note: Erase NITZ PLMN names stored in flash
memory.
AT+WOPN=4
+WOPN:31
Note: Read from EEPROM which method will be
OK
used for PLMN names.
AT+WOPN=4,<PlmnOns>
OK
Note: Write to EEPROM which method will be used
for PLMN names.
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command selects one PLMN selector with access technology list in the SIM card that is used by
AT+CPOL command.
<List>:
0 User controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_PLMNwAct
Note: if this file is not found EF_PLMNSel will be selected
1 Operator controlled PLMN selector with access technology EF_OPLMNwAct
2 Home PLMN selector with access technology EF_HPLMNwAct
AT+CPLS= <List>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CPLS?
+CPLS: 1
OK
Note: Ask for selection of the SIM file Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is selected
AT+CPLS=0
Note: if EF_PLMNwAct is not present, EF_PLMNsel will be
Note: selection of EF_PLMNwAct
selected
AT+CPLS=1
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: selection of EF_OPLMNwAct
Note: EF_OPLMNwAct is not present
AT+CPLS=?
+CPLS: (0,1,2)
Note: Get possible values
OK
Note: The 3 files with Access technology are present and can
be selected
AT+CPLS=?
+CPLS: (0)
OK
Note: Get possible values
Note: Only EF_PLMNwAct or EF_PLMNsel can be selected
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
36
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Preferred Operator List +CPOL
Description:
This command edits (or updates) the SIM preferred list of networks.
This list is read in the SIM file selected by the command AT+CPLS.
Values:
<index>: position of the operator record in the Sim preferred operator list. Use AT+CPOL=? to view the
maximum index of the selected EF.
<format>
0 long alphanumeric format for <oper>
1 short alphanumeric format for <oper>
2 numeric format for <oper>
<oper>: character string or integer (see <format>) indicating operator identifier.
<GSM_AcT>: GSM access technology
<GSMcomp_Act>: GSM compact access technology
<Utran_Act>: UTRA access technology
0 access technology not selected
1 access technology selected
Syntax:
AT+CPOL= [<index>] [,<format>[,<oper>[,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcomp_Act>,<Utran_Act>]]]
The different possibilities are:
AT+CPOL = <index> to delete an entry.
AT+CPOL = , <format> to set the format used by the read command (AT+CPOL?).
AT+CPOL = , <format>, <oper> to put <oper> in the next free location.
AT+CPOL = <index> , <format> , <oper> to write <oper> in the <format> at the <index>.
AT+CPOL = <index>,<format>,<oper>,<GSM_AcT>,<GSMcp_Act>,<Utran_Act>
To write <oper> in the <format> at the <index> using access technology (in the case of EF_PLMNwact,
EF_HPLMNwact or EF_OPLMNwact is present).
Note: Per default if Access technology parameters are not given, the GSM access technology will be
chosen.
The supported format are those of the +COPS command.
The length of this list is limited to 85 entries for EF_PLMNsel, and 51 for EF_PLMNwAct,
EF_OPLMNwAct, EF_HPLMNwAct.
(See table on next page)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
37
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Command
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With EF_PLMNwAct selected and present
AT+CPOL=,0
Note: Select long alphanumeric format
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL=7,2,20801
Note: Add a network to the list
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL=7
Note: Delete 7th location
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777
Note: Add a new network to the list
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777,0,0,1
Note: Add a new network to the list
With EF_PLMNwact present
AT+CPOL=8,2,77777
Note: Add a new network to the list
With EF_PLMNwact present
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL=9,0,”Orange F”
Note: Add a new network to the list (text format)
AT+CPOL?
Note: Ask for preferred list of networks
With only EF_PLMNsel present
AT+CPOL=?
Possible responses
+CPOL:1,2,26201
+CPOL: 6,2,20810
OK
Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in
EF_PLMNsel)
+CPOL:1,2,26201,1,0,0
+CPOL: 6,2,20810,1,0,0
OK
Note: Preferred list of networks in numeric format (read in
EF_PLMNwAct)
GSM access technology selected
GSM compact access technology not selected
Utran access technology not selected
OK
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
OK
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
OK
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
+CPOL: 7,0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
OK
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
OK
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
OK
OK
Note: Access technology UTRAN is selected
OK
Note: Per default Access technology GSM is selected
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
+CPOL: 8,2,77777”
OK
th
Note: Preferred networks list in long alphanumeric format; 8
entry is unknown so the product edits it in the numeric format
+CPOL: 1,0,”D1-TELEKOM”
+CPOL: 6,0,”F SFR”
+CPOL: 8,2,77777”
+CPOL: 9,0,”Orange F”
OK
Note: Preferred list of networks in long alphanumeric format
+CPOL: (1-16),(0-2)
OK
Note: The EF can accept 16 records. Supported formats are
0, 1, or 2.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
38
Chapter 6 – Network Service Commands
Read Operator Name +COPN
Description:
This command returns the list of all operator names (in numeric and alphanumeric format) stored in the
module.
Values:
<NumOper>: is the operator in numeric format
<AlphaOper>: is the operator in long alphanumeric format
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+COPN
Response Syntax: +COPN: <NumOper>,<AlphaOper>
Command
AT+COPN
Note: Ask for list of operators
AT+COPN=?
Possible responses
+COPN: 23201,”A1”
+COPN: 23203,”Amax.”
+COPN: 23207,”A tele.ring”
+COPN: 23205,”one”
…
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
39
Chapter 7 – Security Commands
Chapter 7 – Security
Commands
Enter PIN +CPIN
Description:
This command enters the ME passwords (CHV1 / CHV2 / PUK1 / PUK2, etc.), that are required before
any ME functionality can be used. CHV1/CHV2 is between 4 and 8 digits long, PUK1/PUK2 is only 8
digits long.
If the user application tries to make an outgoing call before the SIM PIN code (CHV1) has been
confirmed, then the product will refuse the “ATD” command with a “+CME ERROR: 11” (SIM PIN
required).
The application is responsible for checking the PIN after each reset or power on - if the PIN was
enabled.
Values:
<pin> is the Personal Identification Number. A four-digit number.
<puk> is the Personal Unblocking Key needed to change the PIN. An eight-digit number.
Syntax:
AT+CPIN=<pin>
Command
AT+CPIN=1234
Note: Enter PIN
AT+CPIN=5678
Note: Enter PIN
Possible responses
OK
Note: PIN code is correct
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Operation not allowed, PIN previously entered
After 3 unsuccessful attempts to enter the PIN (Personal Identification Number), the PUK (Personal
Unblocking Key) will be required.
PUK validation forces the user to enter a new PIN code as a second parameter and this will be the new
PIN code if PUK validation succeeds. CHV1 is then enabled if PUK1 is correct. The application
therefore uses this command:
AT+CPIN=<Puk>,<NewPin>
Command
AT+CPIN=00000000,1234
Note: Enter PUK and new PIN
AT+CPIN=12345678,1234
Note: Enter PUK and new PIN, 2nd attempt
Possible responses
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect PUK
OK
Note: PUK correct, new PIN stored
To determine which code must be entered (or not), the following query command can be used:
AT+CPIN? The possible responses are:
+CPIN: READY
+CPIN: SIM PIN
+CPIN: SIM PUK
+CPIN: SIM PIN2
+CPIN: SIM PUK2
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN
+CPIN: PH-NET PIN
+CME ERROR: <err>
ME is not pending for any password
CHV1 is required
PUK1 is required
CHV2 is required
PUK2 is required
SIM lock (phone-to-SIM) is required
Network personalization is required
SIM failure (13) absent (10) etc.
Please note that in this case the mobile equipment does not end its response with the OK string.
The response +CME ERROR: 13 (SIM failure) is returned after 10 unsuccessful PUK attempts. The SIM
card is then out of order and must be replaced by a new one.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
40
Chapter 7 – Security Commands
Example:
Three failed PIN validations + one successful PUK validation
AT+CPIN?
Read the PIN status
+CPIN: SIM PIN
The product requires SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=1235
First attempt to enter a SIM PIN
+CME ERROR: 16
Wrong PIN
AT+CPIN=1236
Second attempt
+CME ERROR: 16
Wrong PIN
AT+CPIN=1237
Third attempt
+CME ERROR: 16
Wrong PIN
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PUK
Read PIN state
The product requires PUK
AT+CPIN=99999999,5678
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: READY
The PUK is entered, the new PIN shall be 5678 PUK validation is OK. New Pin
is 5678
Read PIN state
The product is ready
If the user tries to do something which requires PIN2 (CHV2), the product will refuse the action with a “+CME
ERROR: 17” (SIM PIN2 required). The product then waits for SIM PIN2 to be given.
Of course, if SIM PIN2 is blocked, SIM PUK2 is required instead of SIM PIN2.
For example, the product needs PIN2 to write in the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) , so if SIM PIN2 authentication
has not been performed during the current session, SIM PIN2 is required
Command
AT+CPBS=”FD”
Note: Choose FDN
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”
Note: Write in FDN at location 5
AT+CPIN?
AT+CPIN=5678
Note: Enter SIM PIN2
AT+CPBW=2,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”
Note: Write in FDN at location 5
Possible responses
OK
+CME ERROR: 17
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
SIM PIN2
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
OK
OK
Note: Now writing in FDN is allowed
Please note that the product only requests PIN2 or PUK2 once. Therefore, if they are not entered properly, the next
+CPIN? command will return “+CPIN: READY”.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
41
Chapter 7 – Security Commands
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command validates the PIN2 code (CHV2) or the PUK2 code (UNBLOCK CHV2) and defines a
new PIN2 code.
Of course, the +CPIN command allows PIN2 or PUK2 codes to be validated, but only when the last
command executed resulted in PIN2 authentication failure.
PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits; PUK2 length is 8 digits only.
<pin2> is the personal identification number 2
<puk2> is the personal unblocking key 2 needed to change the PIN 2
<newpin2>
Note: PIN2 length is between 4 and 8 digits; PUK2 length is 8 digits only.
AT+CPIN2=<pin2>
Command
AT+CPIN2=1234
Note: Enter PIN2
AT+CPIN2=5678
Note: Enter PIN2
Possible responses
OK
Note: PIN2 code is correct
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Operation not allowed, PIN2 previously entered
After 3 unsuccessful attempts, PUK2 will be required. PUK2 validation forces the user to enter a new PIN2
code as a second parameter and this will be the new PIN2 code if PUK1 validation succeeds. The
application uses this command:
AT+CPIN2=<puk2>,<NewPin2>
Command
AT+CPIN2=00000000,1234
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2
AT+CPIN2=12345678,1234
Note: Enter PUK2 and new PIN2, 2nd attempt
Possible responses
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect Password (PUK2)
OK
Note: PUK2 correct, new PIN2 stored
To determine which code must be entered (or not), the following query command can be used:
AT+CPIN2?
The possible responses are:
+CPIN2: READY
+CPIN2: SIM PIN2
+CPIN2: SIM PUK2
+CME ERROR: <err>
No PIN2 is needed
PIN2 is required
PUK2 is required
Absent (10) etc…
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC
Description:
This command gets the number of valid attempts for PIN1 (CHV1), PIN2 (CHV2), PUK1 (UNBLOCK
CHV1) and PUK2 (UNBLOCK CHV2) identifiers.
Values
<n1>, <n2> are the attempts left for PIN1, PIN2 (0 = blocked, 3 max)
<k1>, <k2> are the attempts left for PUK1, PUK2 (0 = blocked, 10 max)
For this to work, the card should be present at the time of initialization; otherwise, an error will be sent
(+CME ERROR: 10).
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
AT+CPINC
Response syntax: +CPINC: <n1>,<n2>,<k1>,<k2>
Command
AT+CPINC
Note: Get the number of attempts left
AT+CPINC?
Note: Get current values
AT+CPINC=?
Note: Get possible values
Possible responses
+CPINC: 2,3,10,10
OK
Note: First CHV1 attempt was a failure
+CPINC: 2,3,10,10
OK
Note: First attempt was a failure
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
42
Chapter 7 – Security Commands
Facility Lock +CLCK
Description:
This command locks, unlocks or interrogates an ME or network facility <fac>.
Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) do not check “PS”, “PN”, “PU”, “PP” and “PC” locks.
Values:
<fac> supported facilities:
“PS”: SIM lock facility with an 8-digit password.
“SC“: PIN enabled (<mode> = 1) / disabled (<mode> = 0)
“AO”: BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)
“OI”: BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)
“OX”: BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing. International Calls except to Home Country)
“AI”: BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)
“IR”: BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)
“AB”: All Barring services
“AG”: All outGoing barring services
“AC”: All inComing barring services
“PN”: Network lock with an 8-digit password (NCK).
“PU”: Network Subset lock with an 8-digit password (NSCK).
“PP”: Service Provider lock with an 8-digit password (SPCK).
“PC”: Corporate lock with an 8-digit password (CCK).
“FD”: SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is required as <password>)
<mode>
0 unlock the facility
1 lock the facility
2 query status
<class> A facility status can be changed for only one class, or for all classes (7 or omitted).
1 Voice (telephony)
2
Data (apply to all bearer services)
8 Short Message service
7 Equal to all classes (Default value)
Any attempt to combine different classes will result in activation / deactivation / interrogation of Voice
and Data.
If <class> is omitted, the default value 7 will be used.
Password maximum length is given with the AT+CPWD=? Command.
Note:
It will not possible to lock the FDN phonebook if this one is not loaded.
Command syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>,<mode>[,<passwd>[,<class>] ]
Response syntax: +CLCK: <status> [ ,<class1> ]<CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>,<class2> [ … ] ]
Syntax:
Command
AT+CLCK=”SC”,1,1234
Note: Enable PIN
AT+CLCK?
Note: Read PIN status
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,5555
Note: Disable PIN
AT+CPIN=1234
Note: Enter PIN
AT+CLCK=?
Note: Request supported
facilities
AT+CLCK=”PN”,1,12345678
Note: Activate network lock
AR+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234,2
Note: Activate all outgoing calls
except data calls
AT+CLCK=”AO”,2
Note: Query BAOC status
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,0000
Note: Disable PIN
Possible responses
OK
Note: PIN was correct
+CLCK:(“PS”,0),(“SC”,0),(“FD”,0),(“PN“,0),(“PU“,0),(“PP“,0),(“PC“,0)
OK
Note: PIN is enabled, no SIM lock, no network lock, no information
on Call barring (no longer supported in GSM Technical
Specification 07.07)
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: PIN was wrong
OK
Note: PIN was good
+CLCK: (“PS”,”SC”,”AO”,”OI”,”OX”,”AI”,”IR”,”AB”,”AC”,
”FD”,"PN","PU","PP",”PN”)
OK
Note: Supported facilities
OK
Network lock activated
OK
Note: Call barring is activate
+CLCK: 1,2
OK
Note: BAOC activate for data calls only
+CME ERROR: 521
Note: PIN deactivation is forbidden with this SIM card
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
43
Chapter 7 – Security Commands
Change Password +CPWD
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command changes a password (PIN, call barring, NCK, etc.). The facility values (<fac>) are the
same as for the +CLCK command with a “P2” facility to manage SIM PIN2.
For the network lock (“PN”), unlocking is forbidden after 10 failed attempts to disable (unlock) the
network lock with an incorrect password.
<fac> supported facilities:
“PS”: SIM lock facility with an 8-digit password.
“SC“: PIN enabled (<mode> = 1) / disabled (<mode> = 0)
“AO”: BAOC (Barr All Outgoing Calls)
“OI” : BOIC (Barr Outgoing International Calls)
“OX”: BOIC-exHC (Barr Outgoing. International Calls except to Home Country)
“AI” : BAIC (Barr All Incoming Calls)
“IR” : BIC-Roam (Barr Inc. When Roaming outside Home Country)
“AB”: All Barring services
“AG”: All outGoing barring services
“AC”: All inComing barring services
“P2”:
“FD”: SIM Fixed Dialing Numbers (FDN) memory feature (PIN2 is required as <password>)
“N”
“U”
“P”
“C”
<oldpwd>,<newpwd> 4 or up to 8 or 16 digits according to the facility.
AT+CPWD= <fac>, <oldpwd>, <newpwd>
Command
AT+CPWD=?
Note: Possible values
AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555
Note: Change PIN
AT+CPWD=”SC”,1234,5555
Note: Change PIN
AT+CPIN=5555
Note: Enter PIN
AT+CPWD=”PN”,12345678,00000000
Note: Change NCK
Possible responses
+CPWD: (“PS”,8),(“SC”,8),(“AO”,4),(“OI”,4),(“OX”,4),
(“AI”,4),(“IR,4),(“AB”,4),(“AG”,4),(“AC”,4),
(“P2”,8),(“FD”,8),("PN",8),("PU",8),("PP",8), ("PC",8)
OK
Note: CHV1/CHV2 must be on 8 digits maximum
(4minimum)
For call barring, on 4 digits maximum
OK
Note: PIN was correct
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: PIN was wrong
OK
Note: PIN was correct
OK
Note: NCK changed for net lock
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
44
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Chapter 8 – Phonebook
Commands
Introduction to Phonebook Commands
A phonebook group can hold up to 100 entries. These entries can come from different phonebooks (SIM and/or Flash
phonebook).
When a SIM is inserted, the phonebook selected by default is set by the command +CPBS.
About the Parameters
SIM Contact Structure
<num_Home>
<Name>
Home phone number
Name
Extended SIM Contact Structure
<num_Home>
Home phone number
<Name>
Name
<Phb_Group>
Phonebook group
This structure can be used to write and read contacts in mode extended (+WCOS=1) and with ADN phonebook
selected (+CPBS=”SM”).
Extended Contact Structure
<num_Home>
Home phone number
<Name>
Name
<num_Mobile>
Mobile phone number
<num_Work>
Work phone number
<num_Data>
Data phone number
<Email>
E-Mail address
<Address>
Postal address
<Phb_Group>
Phonebook group
The structure including <num_Mobile>,
<num_Work>, <num_Data>, <Email>, and <Address> will be
represented by <Contact> in the rest of the document.
Phonebook Groups Parameter Definition
<index>
<name>
<phb_entry_index>
<restrict call>
Group index
Group name
Phonebook entry index
Restrict call mode for incoming calls
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
45
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS
Description:
This command selects phonebook memory storage.
Note on ADN and FDN activation: When FDN has been activated with the +CLCK command, the
selection of ADN phonebook is possible only if ADN status bit3 is set to 1 (EF file “is readable and can
be updated when invalidated”). Please refer to Recommendation 3GPP 11.11 for more details.
Note: The previously selected phonebook remains the same when the modem is switched on or reset,
even if the new SIM card is inserted. However, in the case when the replacement SIM card does not
contain any selected phonebook, the ADN phonebook is selected.
Values:
<pb> Phonebook
“SM”
“FD”
“ON”
“EN”
“LD”
“MC”
“ME”
“MT”
“RC”
“SN”
ADN Abbreviated Dialing Numbers (SIM phonebook)
FDN Fixed Dialing Numbers (SIM restricted phonebook)
MSISDN (SIM own numbers)
ECC Emergency Call Codes (SIM or Mobile Equipment)
LND Last Number Dial
Mobile Equipment missed (unanswered received) calls list
Mobile Equipment phonebook
Combined Mobile Equipment and SIM phonebook (ME + SM)
Mobile Equipment received calls list
SDN Services Dialing Numbers (SIM special service numbers)
Notes: “EN” will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.
When the SIM is not present, the following emergency numbers are available:
000, 08, 112, 110, 118, 119, 911, 999
When the SIM is present, the following emergency numbers are available:
112, 911, emergency number from ECC SIM files (if existing)
<pin2> Personal Identification Number 2
Notes: The following emergency numbers are stored in E2P:
112, 911, 999, 08
<EN> will be available even if ECC SIM file is not present.
Maximum Entries: The maximum number of entries for the Mobile Equipment phonebook is 500.
Syntax:
AT+CPBS=<pb>[,<pin2>]
Command
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: Select ADN phonebook
AT+CPBS=?
Note: Possible values
AT+CPBS?
Note: Status
Possible responses
OK
Note: ADN phonebook is selected
+CPBS: ("SM","LD","MC","ON","ME","RC","MT","SN","EN”)
OK
Note: only “EN” phonebook is not supported with this SIM card.
+CPBS:”SM”,10,20
OK
Note: ADN phonebook selected, 10 locations used, 20 locations
available
Selection of the ADN phonebook when FDN is active is SIM dependent.
Selection of the “FD” phonebook with <pin2>, when <pin2> is already verified, will give the error:
CME ERROR:3
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
46
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR
Description:
This command returns phonebook entries for a range of locations from the current phonebook memory
storage selected with +CPBS.
Note:
For all phonebook read commands (+CPBR, +CPBF, +CPBN, +CPBP, +CNUM), the
TON/NPI MSB of each number is set to 1 (ex: a TON/NPI stored as 17 is displayed as 145).
If the AT+WCOS =1 command has been used, the response will include <Contact> structure.
Values:
<first_entry>,<last_entry> Location or range of locations of the phonebook entry or entries.
<type (TON/NP)> Type of address byte in integer format. Value is 145 if the dialing string (<number>
response value) includes the international access code character + ; otherwise, the
value is 129.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CPBR
Response Syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[...]]
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>[...]]
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>[...]]
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook and AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>
[<CR><LF>+CPBR: <loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>, <Phb_group>[...]]
Command
AT+CPBR=?
Note: Test command
Possible responses
+CPBR: (1-50),20,10
OK
Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), max length for phone number is 20
digits, 10 characters max for the text
AT+WCOS?
+WCOS: 0
Note: Test command
OK
Note: Contact not selected
AT+CPBR=12,14
+CPBR: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”
Note: Read entries from 12 +CPBR: 13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”
to 14
+CPBR: 14,”0146290808”,129,”Zazi”
OK
Note: Display locations 12,13,14 with location, number, type
(TON/NPI), Text
AT+CPBR=10
+CPBR:10,”0146290921”,129,”Rob”
Note: Read entry 10
OK
Note: Display location 10
AT+CPBR=11
+CPBR:11,”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFFF”
Note: Read entry 11 (UCS2 OK
format)
Note: Display location 11
AT+CPBR=52
+CME ERROR: 21
Note: Read entry 52 (wrong) Note: Invalid index
AT+CPBS=”ME”
OK
Note: Flash memory
AT+WCOS=1
OK
Note: Contact selected
AT+CPBR=13
+CPBR:13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
Note: Read entry
”0141284549”, 129, “0600003210”, 129, ”0141280000”, 129,
“019876543210”, 129,
[email protected]_address.com, “Becker Street London”,1
OK
Note: Display locations 13 with location, number, type (TON/NPI), Text
and Contact and Phonebook Group n1
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
47
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
CPBR Command Table Continued
Command
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+CPBR=1
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456”,,
”test”,1
Note: Add an external entry
in the SIM with group
number (1)
AT+CPBR=1
Possible responses
OK
+CPBR=1,”0123456”,129,”test”
OK
OK
+CPBR=1”0123456”,129,”test”,1
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
48
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW
Description:
This command writes a phonebook entry in location number <index> in the current phonebook memory
storage.
Notes:
• “RC” and “MC” phonebooks could be erased only by +CPBW. Adding a field and/or modifying a
field is not allowed for these phonebooks.
• This command is not allowed for “EN”, “LD”, “MC”, “RC”, “MT”, and “SN” phonebooks (they
cannot be written).
• If the AT+WCOS=1 command was used, the request would include the “Contact” structure.
Values:
<index>
<number>
<type>
<text>
<contact>
<Phb_Group>
Syntax:
Integer type value depending on the capacity of the phonebook memory.
Phone number in ASCII format.
TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format).
Note: The value is 145 if the dialing string (<number> response value) includes the
international access code character +; otherwise, the value is 129 (Example: a <type>
value of 17 will be written as 145).
String type. Maximum length of <text> field is:
• For the Mobile Equipment phonebook, 30 ASCII characters.
• For the ADN phonebook, SIM dependent (use AT+CPBW=?)
Notes:
• For the <text> parameter all strings starting with “80”, “81” or “81” are
considered in UCS2 format.
• The +CSCS (Select Character Set) command does not affect the format for
phonebook entries.
Contact structure.
Phonebook group number in which the entry should be saved.
The range is 1 to 10. If the entry must not be saved in a group, <Phb_Group> = 0 or
can be omitted.
Command Syntax:
• For ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=0
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]
• For ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text> [,Phb_group>]]]]
• For the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text>]]]
• For the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
AT+CPBW=<index>[,<number>[,<type>[,<text> [<contact> [,Phb_group>]]]]]
Command
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+CPBS?
Note: Which phonebook is selected
AT+WCOS=0
Note: phonebook not extended
AT+CPBW=?
Note: Test command
AT+CPBW=5,”112”,129,”SOS”
Note: Write at location 5
AT+CPBR=5
Note: Read the entry at location 5
AT+CPBS?
Note: Which phonebook is selected
Possible responses
OK
+CPBS:”SM”,1,10
OK
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 1 location is
used and 10 locations are available.
OK
+CPBW: (1-50),20,(129,145),10
OK
Note: 50 locations, phone number = 20 digits max,
TON/NPI of 129 or 145, text length = 10
OK
Note: Location 5 written
+CPBR=5,”112”,129,”SOS”
Note: Location 5 written
+CPBS:”SM”,2,10
OK
Note: ADN phonebook is selected, 2 locations are
used and 10 locations are available.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
49
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
+CPBW Command Table Continued
Command
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”
Note: Overwrite location 5
AT+CPBW=6,”01292349”,129,”8000410042”
Note: write location 6 (UCS2 format for the <text> field)
AT+CPBW=8,”01292349”,129,”80xyz”
Note: write location
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”
Note: write an extended entry
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky”1
Note: Write an extended entry
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBS=”ME”
Note: ME Phonebook
AT+CPBS?
Note: How many entries are used
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”
Note: Write a not extended entry
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first
entry”,”9876543210”,129
Note: Write an extended entry
AT+CPBR=1
Note: Read the first entry
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”
Note: Write an entry not extended
AT+CPBW=2,”9876543210”,129,”second
entry”,”6543210987”,129
Note: Write an extended entry
AT+CPBR=1,2
Note: Read entry 1 and 2
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,
129,“019876543210”,129,
[email protected]_address.com, “Becker Street London”,1
Note: Write location with Contact and Phonebook
Group n1
AT+CPBW=,”+33145221100”,145,”SOS”
Note: Write at the first location available
AT+CPBW=,”+0345221100”,145,”SOS”
Note: Write at the first location available
AT+CPBW=57,”112”,129,”WM”
Note: Write at location 57 (wrong)
AT+CPBW=7,”012345678901234567890”,129,”WAVE”
Note: Write at location 7 a phone number exceeding
the limit (21 digits)
AT+CPBW=7,”0122334455”,129,”WAVECOMTEL”
Note: Write at location 7 along text (11 characters)
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS?
AT+CPBR=1
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456,,”test”,1
Note: Add an extended entry in SIM with group
number 1
Possible responses
OK
Note: Location 5 overwritten
OK
Note: Location 6 is written
OK
Note: Location 8 is written. The string has a
wrong UCS2 format. It is, therefore,
considered as an ASCII string.
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Error because +WCOS: 0
OK
OK
OK
OK
+CPBS: “ME”,2,500
Note: in ME phonebook, 2 locations are used
and 500 locations are available.
OK
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Error because +WCOS: 0
+CPBR: 1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”
OK
OK
OK
+CPBR: 1,”0123456798”,129,”first entry”
OK
Note: Location 13 is written
OK
Note: First location available is written
+CME ERROR: 20
Note: Phonebook full
+CME ERROR: 21
Note: Invalid index
+CME ERROR: 26
Note: Phone number too long
+CME ERROR: 24
Note: Text too long
OK
+WCOS: 1
OK
Note: Extended phonebook
+CPBR:1,”0123456”,129,”test”
OK
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
50
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
+CPBW Command Table Continued
Command
AT+CPBR=1
AT+CPBW=1,”0123456,,”test”,1
Note: Add an extended entry in SIM with group
number 1
AT+CPBR=1
Possible responses
+CPBR:1,”0123456,”129,”test”
OK
OK
+CPBR:1,”0123456,”129,”test”,1
OK
OK
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,
129, “019876543210”,129,
[email protected]_address.com, “Becker Street London”,1
Note: Save the entry in the phonebook group #1
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
OK
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,
129, “019876543210”,129,
[email protected]_address.com, “Becker Street London”
Note: Save the entry in the phonebook without a
group
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,
OK
”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”,
129, “019876543210”,129,
[email protected]_address.com, “Becker Street London”,0
Note: Save the entry in the phonebook without a
group
This command is not allowed when the fixed dialing phonebook (FDN) is locked. Moreover, when the
FDN is unlocked, PIN2 is required to write in the FDN phonebook.
But if PIN2 authentication has been performed during the current session, the +CPBW command with
FDN is allowed.
Command
AT+CPBS=”FD”
Note: Choose FDN
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky
”
Note: Write in FDN at location 5
AT+CPIN?
Possible responses
OK
+CME ERROR: 17
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
+CPIN: SIM PIN2
Note: SIM PIN2 is required
OK
AT+CPIN=5678
Note: Enter SIM PIN2
AT+CPBW=5,”01290917”,129,”Jacky OK
”
Note: Writing in FDN is now allowed
Note: Write in FDN at location 5
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
51
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF
Description:
This command returns phonebook entries with alphanumeric fields starting with a given string. The
AT+CPBF= “” command can be used to display all phonebook entries sorted in alphabetical order.
This command is not allowed for "LD", "RC", "MC" phonebooks and for the “EN” phonebook, which
does not contain alphanumeric fields.
It is possible to use this command with UCS2 strings. If a wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string is
considered as an ASCII string.
Values:
<string> Searched pattern string (depends on the format of the data stored in the phonebooks)
<loc>
Location number (20 digits maximum)
<num>
Phone number (20 digits maximum)
<type>
TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format)
<contact> Extended contact structure
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CPBF=<string>
Response Syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF> +CPBF=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>
Command
AT+CPBF=?
Note: Test command
AT+CPBF=“E”
Note: Read entries with “E”
AT+CPBF=”H”
Note: Read entries with “H”
AT+CPBF=”800001”
Note: Read entries starting with
0001 UCS2 character
AT+CPBF=”8045C”
Note: Read entries with “8045C”
(ASCII format)
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBF=”Test”
Note: Read entries with “Test”
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBF=”Test”
Note: Read entries with “Test”
AT+CPBS=”ME”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBF=”Test”
Note: Read entries “Test”
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBF=”Test”
Note: Read entries with “Test”
Possible responses
+CPBF: 20,10
OK
Note: Maximum length for a phone number is 20 digits; 14 characters for
the text
+CPBF: 12,”112”,129,”Emergency”
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
OK
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “E”
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: Entry not found
+CPBF: 11, ”0146290921”,129,”8000010002FFFF”
OK
Note: Display locations with text field starting with 0001 UCS2 character
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: Entry not found. The string has a wrong UCS2 format; it is therefore
considered as an ASCII string
OK
OK
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”
OK
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”,0
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.
OK
OK
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”
OK
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test
ME”,”9876543210”,129,””,””,””,[email protected]_address.com,
”post address’,0
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
52
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP
Description:
This command orders the product to search the phonebook for an item with the same phone number as
that defined in the parameter.
The searched phone number is the FIRST one that the user can enter with AT+CPBW. For example,
with this command string, we can search only the phone number (+331290909):
AT+CPBW=13,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,”0141284549”,129,“0600003210”,129,”0141280000”, 129,
“019876543210”,129,[email protected]_address.com, “Becker Street London”,0
Values:
<PhoneNumber>
<loc>
<num>
<type>
<contact>
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CPBP=<PhoneNumber>
Response Syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
Phone number (coded according to any GSM 07.07 or GSM 07.05 phone number)
Location number
Phone number
TON/NPI (type of address octet in integer format)
Contact structure
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF> +CPBP=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>
Command
AT+CPBP=?
Note: Test command
AT+CPBP=”+331290101”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+CPBP=”+331290101”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+CPBP=”01290202”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+CPBP=”+331288575”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+CPBP=”0129”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBP=”0123456789”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBP=”0123456789”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
AT+CPBS=”ME”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBP=”0123456789”
Note: Search entries corresponding
to this phone number
Continued on next page
Possible responses
+CPBP: (1-50),20,10
OK
Note: 50 locations (from 1 to 50), maximum length for phone
number is 20 digits, 10 characters maximum for the text.
+CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
OK
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number
+CPBP: 15,”01290101”,129,”Eric”
OK
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number
+CPBP: 15,”+331290202”,145,”David”
OK
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number
+CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”8045682344FFFF”
OK
Note: Display entry corresponding to the specified phone number (UCS2 format)
+CME ERROR: 22
Note: Entry not found
OK
OK
+CPBP: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”
Note: Display the entry corresponding to the specified phone number
OK
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ADN”,0
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.
OK
OK
+CPBP: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test ME”
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
53
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
AT+CPBP=<PhoneNumber> continued
Command
Possible responses
AT+WCOS=1
OK
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBP=”Test”
+CPBF: 1,”0123456789”,129,”Test
Note: Read entries with “Test”
ME”,”9876543210”,129,””,””,””,[email protected]_address.com,”post address’,0
Note: Display locations with text field starting with “Test”, extended entry.
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN
Description:
This specific command performs a forward or backward move in the phonebook (in alphabetical order).
It is not allowed in the “EN” phonebook since it does not contain alphanumeric fields.
Values:
<mode>
0
1
2
3
4
5
<loc>
<num>
<type>
<contact>
Syntax:
First item
Last item
Next valid item in alphabetical order
Previous valid item in alphabetical order
Last item read (usable only if a read operation has been performed on the current
phonebook since the end of initialization
Last item written (usable only if a write operation has been performed on the current
phonebook since the end of initialization
Location number
Phone number
TON/NPI (Type of address octet in integer format)
Contact structure
Command Syntax: AT+CPBN=<mode>
Response Syntax:
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook and AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the ADN phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Phb_group>
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=0
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>
• The entry is stored in the Mobile Equipment phonebook with AT+WCOS=1
<CR><LF> +CPBN=<loc>,<num>,<type>,<name>,<Contact>,<Phb_group>
Command
AT+CPBN=?
Note: Test command
AT+CPBS=”SM”
Note: ADN phonebook
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBN=0
Note: Read the first location
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+CPBN=2
Note: Read the next location
AT+CPBN=2
Note: Read the next location
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+CPBN=3
Note: Read the previous location
AT+CPBN=1
Note: Read the last location
AT+CPBN=2
Note: Read the next location
Possible responses
+CPBN: (0-5)
OK
Note: Possible modes
OK
OK
+CPBN: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
OK
Note: Display the first location
OK
+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”,0
OK
Note: Display the second location, extended entry
+CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”,0
OK
Note: Display the third location, extended entry
OK
+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”
OK
Note: Display the second location
+CPBN: 6,”+331290302”,145,”Marc”
OK
Note: Display the last location
+CPBP: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
OK
Note: Display the first location
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
54
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Using mode 4 and 5 with +CPBF command and CPBW:
Command
Possible responses
AT+CPBF=”Er”
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook
OK
Note: Display the location
AT+CPBN=2
+CPBN: 5,”+33147658987”,145,”Frank”
Note: Read the next location
OK
Note: Display the following location
AT+CPBF=”Er”
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Find ”Er” in phonebook
OK
Note: Display the location
AT+CPBN=4
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Get the last location read
OK
Note: Display the last location read
AT+CPBW=,”0146290800”,129,”WM”
OK
Note: Write an item at the first location
Note: No information about this location
available
AT+CPBN=4
+CPBF: 15,”+331290101”,145,”Eric”
Note: Get the last location read
OK
Note: Display the last location read
AT+CPBN=5
AT+CPBN=38,”0146290800,129,”WM”
Note: Display the last item written with
Note: Display the last item written with its location
its location
AT+CPBN=4
AT+CPBN=38,”0146290800,129,”WM”
Note: Get the last item read
Note: Now the last item read is the last written item too
AT+CPBF=”800041FFFF”
+CPBF: 15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”
Note: Find”800041” in phonebook
OK
Note: Display this location
AT+CPBN=4
+CPBF: 15,”+3312345”,145,”8000414339FFFF”
Note: Get the last location read
OK
Note: Display the last location read
Note: The AT+CPBN=5 command is useful after an AT+CPBW command is used without a location.
Subscriber Number +CNUM
Description:
This command returns the subscriber MSISDN(s). If the subscriber has different MSISDNs for different
services, each MSISDN is returned in a separate line.
Values:
<alphax>
optional alphanumeric string associated with <numberx>
<numberx> string type phone number with format as specified by <typex>
<typex>
type of address byte in integer format
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CNUM
Response syntax: +CNUM: <alpha1>, <number1>, <type1> <CR><LF> +CNUM: <alpha2>,
<number2>, <type2> ….
Command
Possible responses
AT+CNUM
+CNUM:”Phone”, “0612345678”,129
+CNUM: “80001002FFFF”, “+0183773”, 145 (UCS2 format)
Note: Get MSISDN(s)
OK
Note: MSISDNs
AT+CNUM=?
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
55
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This specific command allows the initialization of all phonebooks to be inhibited during subsequent
boots.
<mode>
0 Normal initialization (with phonebooks)
1 No phonebook initialization
Command Syntax: AT+WAIP=<mode>
Command
AT+WAIP?
Possible responses
+WAIP:0
OK
Note: Current values ?
Note: Default value (init phonebooks)
AT+WAIP=?
+WAIP: (0,1)
Note: Possible values ?
OK
Note: Disable / enable
AT+WAIP =1
OK
Note: Inhibit initialization of phonebooks (next boot) Note: no answer
AT&W
Note: Save modifications in EEPROM
Caution: The given value should be stored in EEPROM. Therefore, the AT&W command must be used to save the
new <mode> value.
Note: No phonebook commands are allowed if +WAIP=1 (after boot). If a phonebook command is entered, a “+CME
ERROR: 3” is returned.
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP
Description:
This specific command deletes the calls listed in some phonebooks.
Values:
<calls phonebook>
“LD” SIM (ME extended) Last dialing phonebook
“MC” ME missed calls list phonebook
“RC” ME received calls list phonebook
Syntax:
Command Syntax: +WDCP=<calls phonebook>
Command
AT+WDCP?
AT+WDCP=?
Possible responses
OK
+WDCP: ("LD","MC","RC")
OK
Note: Possible values ?
Note: Identifiers of the phonebooks supporting a list of calls
AT+WDCP=”LD”
OK
Note: Delete all the content of Last Dialing phonebook. Note: Last Dialing phonebook is now empty.
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This commands sets/gets and enables/disables the voice mail number in memory.
<mode>
0 Disable the voice mail number
1 Enable the voice mail number
<number> Phone number in ASCII format.
<type>
TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format).
Note: The value is 145 if the dialing string includes the international access code character
‘+’. Otherwise, the value is 129. Example: A <type> value of 17 will be written as 145.
Command Syntax: AT+CSVM=<mode>[,<number>[,<type>]]
Command
AT+CSVM?
Note: Get mail number
AT+CSVM=?
Note: Possible values ?
AT+CSVM=0,”888”,129
Note: Disable Voice Mail number and
change value to “888”.
Possible responses
+CSVM: 1,”660”,129
OK
Note: Voice mail number “660” is activated
+CSVM: (0-1),(129,145)
OK
Note: activation/deactivation and format 129 & 145 are supported
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
56
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Contact Selector +WCOS
Description:
This commands enables/disables the displaying of extended contact.
Values:
<mode>
0
Select the SIM contacts
1 Select the extended contacts for phonebook entries
2 Internal use only.
3
Command Syntax: AT+WCOS=<mode>
Syntax:
Command
AT+WCOS?
Note: Test command
Possible responses
+WCOS: 1
OK
Note: Extended contact selected
AT+WCOS=?
+WCOS: (0-2)
Note: List all possible values OK
Note: Displays all possible responses
AT+WCOS=0
OK
Note: Contact not selected
AT+WCOS=3
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Mode not allowed
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW
Description:
This commands creates or deletes a phonebook group.
Values:
<index>
<name>
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WPGW=<index>[,<name>]
Index a new group
Name of the group. It can be up to 30 ASCII characters or 13 UCS2 characters long
Command
AT+WPGW=?
Note: Test command
AT+WPGW=1,”group 1”
Note: Create group #1
AT+WPGW=1,”phb group 1”
Note: Rename group #1
AT+WPGW=1
Note: Delete group #1
Possible responses
+WPGW: (1-10),30
OK
Note: 10 possible groups, group name can be 30 characters
maximum
OK
Note: Group 1 created
OK
Note: Group 1 created
OK
Note: Group 1 deleted
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
57
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGR
Description:
This commands reads the phonebook group entries, the phonebook group name or the number or used
records in a group.
Values:
<mode>
1
Read the name of one phonebook group
2
Read the names of all phonebook groups
3
List all entries of one phonebook group
4
Read the number of used records in a phonebook group
<index>
Index of the group (for use with mode = 3 or mode = 4)
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WPGR=<mode>,<index>
Command
AT+WPGR=?
Note: Test command
AT+WPGR=1,1
Note: Read the name of phonebook group 1
AT+WPGR=2
Note: Read the name of all phonebook groups
AT+WCOS=0
Note: Phonebook not extended
AT+WPGR=3,1
Note: List all entries of phonebook group 1
AT+WCOS=1
Note: Phonebook extended
AT+WPGR=3,1
Note: List all extended entries of phonebook
group 1
Possible responses
+WPGR: (1-4),(1-10)
OK
Note: 10 possible groups
+WPGR: 1,”group 1”
OK
+WPGR: 1,”group 1”
+WPGR: 2,”group 2”
OK
OK
+WPGR: 1,”+33123456789”,145,”John”
+WPGR: 2,”+33567891234”,145,”Elvis”
+WPGR: 31,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”
+WPGR: 32,”+0123456789”,129,”Test”
OK
Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries; index 31
and 32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in this example)
OK
+WPGR: 1,”+33123456789”,145,”John”, 1
+WPGR: 2,”+33567891234”,145,”Elvis”,1
+WPGR: 31,”+331290909”,145,”Fred”,”0141284549”,
129,”060003210”,129,”0141280000”,129,
”019876543210”,129,[email protected]_address.com,
”Becker Street London”,1
+WPGR: 32,”+0123456789”,129,”Test”,0141284549”,
129,”0600003210”,129,0141280000”,129,
”6549873210”,129,[email protected]_address.com,””,1
OK
Note: SIM entries: index 1 and 2; Flash entries; index 31
and 32 (The SIM supports 30 entries in this example)
Note: The entries list displayed with AT+WPGR=3,1 contains records from both the Mobile Equipment and
the SIM phonebooks (MT phonebook).
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
58
Chapter 8 – Phonebook Commands
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS
Description:
This commands sets the parameters of a phonebook group.
Values:
<mode>
0
Read group settings
1 Write group settings
<index>
Index of the group
<restrict call>
Parameter is optional if <mode.=0. It is mandatory if <mode>=1.
0 All refused. Incoming call is forwarded to the voice mailbox
1 All accepted. Incoming call is received (RING message is displayed)
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WPGS=<mode>,<index>[,<restrict call>]
Command
AT+WPGS=1,1,1
Note: Set restrict call to “All Accepted”
AT+WPGS=0,1
Note: Read group 1 settings
AT+WPGS=?
Note: Test command
Possible responses
OK
+WPGS: 1,
OK
Note: Group1: all accepted
+WPGS: (0-1),(1-10),(0-1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
59
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Chapter 9 – Short Messages
Parameters Definition
<da>
<dcs>
<dt>
<fo>
<index>
<length>
<mem1>
<mem2>
<mem3>
<mid>
<mr>
<oa>
<pid>
<pdu>
<ra>
<sca>
<scts>
<sn>
<st>
<stat>
<tooa>
<tora>
<tosca>
<total1>
<total2>
<total3>
<used1>
<used2>
<used3>
<vp>
Destination Address, coded according to the GSM Technical Specification 03.40 TP-DA
Data Coding Scheme, coded according to document [5]
Discharge Time in string format:
“yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”(Year [00-99], Month [01-12],
Day [01-31], Hour, Minute, Second and Time Zone [quarters of an hour] )
First Byte, coded according to SMS-SUBMIT first byte in document [4], default value is 17 for SMSSUBMIT
Place of storage in memory
Text mode (+CMGF=1): number of characters PDU mode (+CMGF=0): length of the TP data unit in
bytes
Memory used to list, read and delete messages (+CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD)
Memory used to write and send messages (+CMGW, +CMSS)
Preferred memory to which received SMS are to be stored
CBM Message Identifier
Message Reference
Originator Address
Protocol Identifier
For SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM Technical Specification 03.40 TPDU in
hexadecimal format, coded as specified in doc [4] For CBS: GSM Technical Specification 03.41 TPDU
in hexadecimal format
Recipient Address
Service Center Address
Service Center Time Stamp in string format: “yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”
(Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds±TimeZone)
CBM Serial Number
Status of a SMS-STATUS-REPORT
Status of message in memory
Type-of-Address of <oa>
Type-of-Address of <ra>
Type-of-Address of <sca>
Number of locations for messages in <mem1>
Number of locations for messages in <mem2>
Number of locations for messages in <mem3>
Total number of messages in <mem1>
Total number of messages in <mem2>
Total number of messages in <mem3>
Validity Period of the short message, default value is 167
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
60
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Select Message Service +CSMS
Description:
The Supported Services include originated (SMS-MO) and terminated short messages (SMS-MT) as
well as Cell Broadcast Message (SMS-CB) services.
Values:
<service>
0 SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0.
1 SMS AT commands are compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version .
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CSMS=<service>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CSMS=0
+CSMS: 1,1,1
Note: SMS AT command Phase 2
OK
version 4.7.0
Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported
AT+CSMS=1
+CSMS: 1,1,1
Note: SMS AT command Phase 2 +
Note: SMS-MO, SMS-MT and SMS-CB supported
AT+CSMS?
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1
Note: Current values ?
OK
Note: GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (SMS AT command Phase 2
version 4.7.0
AT+CSMS=?
+CSMS: (0,1)
Note: Possible services
OK
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA
Description:
This command allows reception of a new message routed directly to the DTE to be acknowledged.
•In TEXT mode, only positive acknowledgement to the network (RP-ACK) is possible.
•In PDU mode, either positive (RP-ACK) or negative (RP-ERROR) acknowledgement to the
network is possible.
Acknowledgement with +CNMA is possible only if the +CSMS parameter is set to 1 (+CSMS=1) when a
+CMT or +CDS indication is shown (see +CNMI command).
If no acknowledgement occurs within the network timeout, an RP-ERROR is sent to the network. The
<mt> and <ds> parameters of the +CNMI command are then reset to zero (do not show new message
indication).
Values:
<n>: Type of acknowledgement in PDU mode
0 send RP-ACK without PDU (same as TEXT mode)
1 send RP-ACK with optional PDU message
2 send RP-ERROR with optional PDU message
<length>: Length of the PDU message
Syntax:
Command syntax in text mode: AT+CNMA
Command syntax in PDU mode: AT+CNMA [ = <n> [ , <length> [ <CR>
Note: PDU is entered using <ackpdu> format instead of <pdu> format (e.g., SMSC address field is not
present). PDU is entered <ctrl-Z / ESC> ] ] ]
Example of New Message Acknowledgement in TEXT Mode
Command
AT+CSMS=1
Note: SMS AT Commands compatible with
GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version
AT+CMGF=1
Note: Set TEXT mode
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
Note: <mt>=2
AT+CNMA
Note: acknowledge the message received
AT+CNMA
Note: try to acknowledge again
Possible responses
OK
OK
Note: TEXT mode valid
OK
+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30 00+00”,129,4
,32,240, “15379”,129,5<CR><LF>
Received message
Note: message received
OK
Note: send positive acknowledgement to the network
+CMS ERROR: 340
Note: no +CNMA acknowledgment expected
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
61
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Example of New Message Acknowledgement in PDU Mode:
Command
AT+CSMS=1
Note: SMS AT Commands compatible with
GSM 07.05 Phase 2 + version
AT+CMGF=0
Note: Set PDU mode
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
Note: <mt>=2
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Reason is: memory capacity exceeded
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Reason is: SIM memory storage is full
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>
>00D3 <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Reason is: Error in modem
AT+CNMA=2,2 <CR>
>00FF <Ctrl-Z>
Note: Negative ACK to the SMS.
Unspecified error
Possible responses
OK
OK
Note: PDU mode valid
OK
+CMT: ,29
07913366003000F1240B913366920547F30000003003419404800
B506215D42ECFE7E17319
Note: message received
OK
OK
OK
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
62
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS
Description:
This command allows the message storage area to be selected (for reading, writing, etc).
Values:
<mem1>:
SM
ME
BM
SR
Memory used to list, read and delete messages. It can be:
SMS message storage in SIM (default)
SMS message storage in Flash
CBM message storage (in volatile memory).
Status Report message storage (in SIM if the EF-SMR file exists, otherwise in the ME non
volatile memory)
Note: SR ME non-volatile memory is cleared when another SIM card is inserted. It is kept,
even after a reset, while the same SIM card is used.
<mem2>:
SM
ME
Memory used to write and send messages
SMS message storage in SIM (default)
SMS message storage in Flash
<mem3>:
SM
ME
Memory to which received SMS are preferred to be stored
SMS message storage in SIM (default)
SMS message storage in Flash
If the command is correct, the following message indication is sent:
+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3>
When <mem1> is selected, all following +CMGL, +CMGR and +CMGD commands are related to the
type of SMS stored in this memory.
The maximum number of SMS is Flash is 99.
When the modem is switched on, <mem1>,<mem2>, and <mem3> are initialized to SM.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>],[<mem3>]
Command
AT+CPMS=?
Note: Possible message storages
AT+CPMS?
Note: Read
Possible responses
+CPMS: ((“SM”,”ME”,”BM”,”SR”),(“SM”,”ME”),(“SM”,”ME”))
OK
Note: Read, list, delete: SMS or SMS Status Report
Write, send: SMS
+CPMS: “SM”,3, 10,”SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read, write…SMS from/to SIM
3 SMS are stored in SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM
+CPMS: 3,10,3,99,3,10
OK
AT+CPMS= “SM”,”ME”,“SM”
Note: Select SM for reading, ME
for writing and SM for storing
AT+CPMS=”AM”
+CMS ERROR: 302
Note: Select false message storage
AT+CPMS=”BM”
+CPMS: 2,20,3,10
OK
Note: Select CBM message storage Note: Read, list, delete CBM from RAM 2 CBM are stored in RAM
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,3,99,“SM”,3,10,
OK
Note: Read
Note: Read, store...SMS from/to flash, write SMS to flash. 3SMS
are stored in flash. 99 is the total memory available in flash
CMTI: “SM”,4
AT+CPMS= “ME”,”ME”,“ME”
+CPMS: 3,99,3,99,3,99
Note: Select ME for reading, ME
OK
for writing and ME for storing
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS: “ME”,3,99,”ME”,3,99,”ME”,3,99
OK
Note: Read
Note: Read, write, store SMS from/to flash. 3 SMS are stored in
flash. 99 is the total memory available in flash
CMTI: “ME”,4
Note: Receive an SMS stored in flash at location 4
AT+CPMS= “AM”
Note: Select wrong message
storage
+CMS ERROR: 302
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
63
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Command Syntax: AT+CPMS=<mem1>,[<mem2>],[<mem3>] continued
Command
AT+CPMS= “SM”
Note: Selecting SM for reading,
writing and storing has not
changed
AT+CPMS?
Possible responses
+CPMS: “4,10,4,99,4,99
OK
+CPMS: “SM”,4,10,”ME”,4,99,”ME”,4,99
OK
Note: Read SMS from SIM. Write and store SMS from/to flash
Preferred Message Format +CMGF
Description:
The message formats supported are text mode and PDU mode.
In PDU mode, a complete SMS Message including all header information is given as a binary string (in
hexadecimal format). Therefore, only the following set of characters is allowed:
{‘0’,’1’,’2’,’3’,’4’,’5’,’6’,’7’,’8’,’9’, ‘A’, ‘B’,’C’,’D’,’E’,’F’}. Each pair of characters is
converted to a byte (e.g., ‘41’ is converted to the ASCII character ‘A’, whose ASCII
code is 0x41 or 65).
In Text mode, all commands and responses are in ASCII characters.
The format selected is stored in EEPROM by the +CSAS command.
Values:
<mode> PDU or Text Mode
0 PDU mode
1 Text mode
The <pdu> message is composed of the SC address (00 means no SC address given, use default
SC address, read with +CSCA command) and the TPDU message.
In this example, the length of bytes of the TPDU buffer is 14, coded according to GSM Technical
Specification 03.40.
In this case, the TPDU is: 0x01 0x03 0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 0x00 0x00 0x04 0xC9 0xE9 0x34
0x0B, which is GSM 03.40:
<fo>
0x01 (SMS-SUBMIT, no validity period)
<mr> (TP-MR)
0x03 (Message Reference)
<da> (TP-DA)
0x06 0x91 0x21 0x43 0x65 (destination address +123456)
<pid> (TP-PID)
0x00 (Protocol Identifier)
<dcs> (TP-DCS)
0x00 (Data Coding Scheme: 7 bits alphabet)
<length> (TP-UDL) 0x04 (User Data Length, 4 characters of text)
TP-UD
0xC9 0xE9 0x34 0x0B (User Data: ISSY)
TPDU in hexadecimal format must be converted into two ASCII characters; e.g., an byte with
hexadecimal value 0x2A is presented to the ME as two characters ‘2’ (ASCII 50) and ‘A’ (ASCII 65).
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CMGF<mode>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CMGF ?
+CMGF: 1
OK
Note: Current message format
Note: Text mode
AT+CMGF=?
+CMGF: (0,1)
OK
Note: Possible message format
Note: Text or PDU modes are available
Example: Sending an SMS Message in PDU mode:
Command
AT+CMGF=0
Note: Set PDU mode
AT+CMGS=14<CR>
0001030691214365000004C9E9340B
Note: Send complete MSG in PDU mode, no
SC address
Possible responses
OK
Note: PDU mode valid
+CMGS: 4
OK
Note: MSG correctly sent, <mr> is returned
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
64
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Save Settings +CSAS
Description:
All settings specified by the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are stored in EEPROM if the SIM card is a
Phase 1 card or in the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 SIM card.
Values:
No parameters
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CSAS
Command
AT+CSAS
Note: Store +CSCA and +CSMP parameters
Possible responses
OK
Note: Parameters saved
Restore Settings +CRES
Description:
All settings specified in the +CSCA and +CSMP commands are restored from EEPROM if the SIM card
is Phase 1 or from the SIM card if it is a Phase 2 SIM card.
Values:
No parameters
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CRES
Command
AT+CRES
Note: Restore +CSCA and +CSMP parameters
Possible responses
OK
Note: Parameters restored
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH
Description:
This command gives additional information about text mode result codes. This information can be found
in the description of the +CMT, +CMGR, +CMGL commands.
Values:
<n>: show indicator
0 do not show header values
1 show the values in result codes
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CSDH
Command
AT+CSDH=0
Note: Set value to “do not how”
AT+CSDH?
Note: Current value
Possible responses
OK
+CSDH: 0
OK
Note: Do not show header values
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
65
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
New Message Indication +CNMI
Description:
This command selects the procedure for message reception from the network.
Values:
<mode> Controls the processing of unsolicited result codes
Important Note: Only <mode>=2 is supported.
Any other value for <mode> (0,1 or 3) is accepted (return code will be OK), but
the processing of unsolicited result codes will be the same as with <mode>=2.
0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code buffer is full, indications can be
buffered in some other place, or the oldest indications may be discarded and replaced with the
new received indications
1 Discard indication and reject new received message unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link
is reserved. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE
2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved and flush them to the TE
after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE
3 Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link specific in-band used to embed
result codes and data when TA is in on-line data mode
<mt>
0
1
2
3
<bm>
0
1
2
3
<ds>
0
1
2
Sets the result code indication routing for SMS-DELIVERs. Default is 1.
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed.
SMS-DELIVERs are routed using unsolicited code: +CMTI: “SM”,<index>
SMS-DELIVERs (except class 2 messages) are routed using unsolicited code:
If PDU mode:
+CMT: [<alpha>,] <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu>
If text mode:
+CMT: <oa>,[<alpha>,] <scts> [,<tooa>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>, <sca>, <tosca>, <length>]
<CR><LF><data>
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly using code in <mt>=2 ; Message of other classes
result in indication <mt>=1
Sets the rules for storing the received CBMs (Cell Broadcast Message) types. They depend on
the coding scheme (text or PDU) and the setting of Select CBM Types (+CSCB command).
Default is 0.
No CBM indications are routed to the TE. The CBMs are stored. Default.
The CBM is stored and an indication of the memory location is routed to the customer
application using unsolicited result code: +CBMI: “BM”, <index>
New CBMs are routed directly to the DTE using an unsolicited result code.
If PDU mode:
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode)
If text mode:
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages>(Text mode) <CR><LF> <data>
Class 3 CBMs: as <bm>=2. Other classes CBMs: as <bm>=1.
Used for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs. Default is 0.
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed.
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed using unsolicited code:
If PDU mode:
+CDS: <length> <CR> <LF> <pdu>
If text mode:
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>, [<ra>] , [<tora>], <scts>,<dt>,<st>
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are stored and routed using the unsolicited result code: +CDSI:
“SR”,<index>
<bfr> Default is 0.
0 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the TE when
<mode> 1…3 is entered (OK response shall be given before flushing the codes)
1 TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode>
1…3 is entered.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
66
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CNMI=<mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CNMI=2,1,0,0,0
Note: <mt>=1
OK
AT+CNMI=2,2,0,0,0
Note: <mt>=2
AT+CNMI=2,0,0,1,0
Note: <ds>=1
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>
Happy Birthday! <ctrl-Z>
Note: Send a message in text mode
AT+CMTI: “SM”,1
Note: message received
OK
+CMT: “123456”,”98/10/01,12:30 00+00”,129,4,32,240,
“15379”,129,5<CR><LF>
Note: message received
OK
+CMGS: 7
OK
Note: Successful transmission
+CDS: 2, 116, ”+33146290800”, 145, “98/10/01,12:30:07+04”,
“98/10/01
12:30:08+04”, 0
Note: message was correctly delivered
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
67
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Read Message +CMGR
Description:
This command allows the application to read stored messages. The messages are read from the
memory selected by the +CPMS command.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CMGR=<index>
Response syntax for text mode:
For SMS-DELIVER only
+CMGR: <stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>,] <scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]
<CR><LF> <data>
For SMS-SUBMIT only
+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>,] [,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>, [<vp>], <sca>,
<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF> <data>
For SMS-STATUS-REPORT only)
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
Response syntax for PDU mode:
+CMGR: <stat>, [<alpha>] ,<length> <CR><LF> <pdu>
Notes:
A message read with status “REC UNREAD” will be updated in memory with the status “REC READ”.
The <stat> parameter for the SMS Status Reports is always “READ”.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CMGR=<index>
Command
AT+CMGR=1
Note: Read the message
AT+CMGR=1
Note: Read the message again
AT+CMGR=2
AT+CMGF=0 ;+CMGR=1
Note: In PDU mode
AT+CMGF=1;+CPMS=”SR”;+CNMI=,,,2
Reset to text mode, set read memory to
“SR”, and allow storage of further SMS
Status Report into “SR” memory
AT+CMSS=3
Send an SMS previously stored
AT+CMGR=1
Read the SMS Status Report
Possible responses
AT+CMTI: “SM”,1
Note: New message received
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,
”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>
ABCdefGHI
OK
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,
”98/10/01,18:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>
ABCdefGHI
OK
Note: Message is read now
OK
Note: Location empty
+CMGR: 2,,<length> <CR><LF><pdu>
OK
Note: Message is stored but unsent, no <alpha>field
OK
+CMSS: 160
OK
+CDSI: “SR”,1
New SMS Status Report stored in “SR” memory at
index 1
+CMGR: "REC UNREAD",6,160, "+33612345678",129,
"01/05/31,15:15:09+00",
"01/05/31,15:15:09+00",0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
68
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
List Message +CMGL
Description:
This command allows the application to read stored messages, by indicating the type of the message to
read. The messages are read from the memory selected by the +CPMS command.
Values:
<stat> possible values (status of messages in memory):
Text mode
possible values
“REC UNREAD”
“REC READ”
“STO UNSENT”
“STO SENT”
“ALL”
PDU mode
possible values
0
1
2
3
4
Status of messages in
memory
received unread messages
received read messages
stored unsent messages
stored sent messages
all messages
Note: For SMS Status Reports, only “ALL” / 4 and “READ” / 1 values of the <stat> parameter
will list messages; other values will only return OK.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CMGL=<stat>
Response syntax for text mode:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>[,<alpha>], [<scts>, <tooa/toda>, <length>] <CR><LF><data> (for
SMS-DELIVER and SMS-SUBMIT. May be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st> (for SMS-STATUS-REPORT
only. May be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)
Response syntax for PDU mode:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>, [<alpha>], <length> <CR><LF> <pdu> (for SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT
and SMS-STATUS-REPORT. May be followed by other <CR><LF>+CMGL:<index>…)
Command
AT+CMGL=“REC UNREAD”
Note: List unread messages in text
mode
AT+CMGL=”REC READ”
Note: List read messages in text
mode
AT+CMGL=”STO SENT”
Note: List stored and sent messages
in text mode
AT+CMGL=1
Note: List read messages in PDU
mode
Possible responses
+CMGL: 1,”REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,
<CR><LF> I will be late
+CMGL: 3,”REC UNREAD”, “46290800”,
<CR><LF>See you tonight!
OK
Note: 2 messages are unread, these messages will then
have their status changed to “REC READ”
+CMGL: 2,”REC READ”,”0146290800”,<CR><LF>
Keep cool
OK
OK
Note: No message found
+CMGL: 1,1,,26
<CR><LF>
07913366003000F3040B913366920547F400130011904125
30400741AA8E5A9C5201
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
69
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Send Message +CMGS
Description:
The <address> field is the address of the terminal to which the message is sent. To send the message,
simply type, <ctrl-Z> character (ASCII 26). The text can contain all existing characters except <ctrl-Z>
and <ESC> (ASCII 27).
This command can be aborted using the <ESC> character when entering text. In PDU mode, only
hexadecimal characters are used (‘0’…’9’,’A’…’F’).
Values:
See the Parameters Definition list at the beginning this chapter.
Syntax:
Command syntax in text mode:
AT+CMGS= <da> [ ,<toda> ] <CR>
Text is entered: <ctrl-Z / ESC >
Command syntax in PDU mode:
AT+CMGS= <length> <CR>
PDU is entered: <ctrl-Z / ESC >
Command Syntax: AT+CMGS
Command
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>
-----------------------------------------------Please call me soon, Fred. <ctrl-Z>
Note: Send a message in text mode
------------------------------------------------
AT+CMGS=<length><CR>
Note: Send a message in PDU mode (1/3)
-------------------------------------------------------<pdu>
Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)
-------------------------------------------------------<ctrl-Z>
Note: End the message (3/3)
Possible responses
>
----------------------------------------------------------------------------+CMGS: <mr>
OK
Note: Successful transmission
>
------------------------------------------------------------------------------+CMGS: <mr>
OK
Note: Successful transmission
The message reference <mr> is returned to the application and allocated by the product. This number
begins with 0, is incremented by one for each outgoing message (successes and failures), and is cyclic
on one byte (0 follows 255).
Note: This number is not a storage number. Outgoing messages are not stored.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
70
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Write Message to Memory +CMGW
Description:
This command stores a message in memory (either SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-DELIVERs).
The memory location <index> is returned (no choice possible as with phonebooks +CPBW).
Text or PDU is entered as described for the Send Message +CMGS command.
Values:
<oa/da>
Originating or Destination Address Value in string format
<tooa/toda> Type of Originating / Destination Address
<stat>
Integer type in PDU mode (default 2 for +CMGW) or string type in text mode (default
“STO UNSENT” for +CMGW). Indicates the status of message in memory. If <stat> is
omitted, the stored message is considered as a message to send
0
“REC UNREAD”
1
“REC READ”
2
“STO UNSENT”
3
“STO SENT”
<length>: Length of the actual data unit in bytes
Syntax:
Command syntax in text mode: (<index> is returned in both cases)
AT+CMGW= <oa/da> [,<tooa/toda> [,<stat> ] ] <CR>
Enter text: <ctrl-Z / ESC>
Command syntax in PDU mode:
AT+CMGW= <length> [,<stat>] <CR>
Give PDU: <ctrl-Z / ESC>
Response syntax:
+CMGW: <index> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if writing fails
Command Syntax: +CMGW
Command
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>
-----------------------------------------------Hello how are you ? <ctrl-Z>
Note: Write a message in text mode
---------------------------------------------------
AT+CMGW=<length><CR><pdu><ctrl-Z>
Note: Write a message in PDU mode (1/3)
----------------------------------------------------------<pdu>
Note: Enter message in PDU mode (2/3)
-----------------------------------------------------------<ctrl-Z>
Note: End the message (3/3)
Possible responses
>
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------+CMGW: 4
OK
Note: Message stored in index 4
>
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------+CMGW: <index>
OK
Note: Message stored in <index>
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
71
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Send Message from Storage +CMSS
Description:
This command sends a message stored at location value <index>.
Values:
<index>
<da>
<toda>
<mr>
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CMSS=<index>[,<da> [,<toda>] ]
Response syntax: +CMSS: <mr> or +CMS ERROR: <err> if sending fails
If a new recipient address <da> is given, it will be used instead of the one stored with the message.
Location of stored message
Destination address
Type of destination address
Message reference
Command
AT+CMGW=0660123456<CR>
Today is my birthday
Possible responses
+CMGW: 5
OK
Note: Message stored with index 5
AT+CMSS=5, 0680654321
AT+CMSS:<mr>
OK
Note: Send the message 5 to a different destination number Note: Successful transmission
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP
Description:
This command selects values for <vp>, <pid>, and <dcs>.
Values:
<fo>
byte comprises 6 different fields:
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
RP
UDHI
SRR
VPF
RD
MTI
Note: <fo> must be entered in DECIMAL format. Hexadecimal format would lead to
irrelevant results
RP
UDHI
SRR
VPF
RD
MTI
Reply Path, not used in text mode.
User Data Header Information, b6=1 if the beginning of the User Data field contains a
Header in addition to the short message. This option is not supported in +CSMP
command, but can be used in PDU mode (+CMGS).
Status Report Request, b5=1 if a status report is requested. This mode is supported.
Validity Period Format
b4=0 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is not present
b4=1 & b3=0 -> <vp> field is present in relative format
Others formats (absolute & enhanced) are not supported.
Reject Duplicates, b2=1 to instruct the SC to reject an SMS-SUBMIT for an SM still
held in the SC that has the same <mr> and <da> as the previously submitted SM
from the same <oa>.
Message Type Indicator
b1=0 & b0=0 -> SMS-DELIVER (in the direction SC to MS)
b1=0 & b0=1 -> SMS-SUBMIT (in the direction MS to SC)
In text mode <vp> is only coded in “relative” format. The default value is 167 (24 hours). This
means that one byte can describe different values:
VP value
0 to 143
144 to 167
168 to 196
197 to 255
Validity period value
(VP + 1) x 5 minutes (up to 12 hours)
12 hours + ( (VP – 143) x 30 minutes )
(VP – 166) x 1 day
(VP – 192) x 1 week
<pid>
This is used to indicate the higher layer protocol being used or indicates interworking with a
certain type of telematic device. For example, 0x24 is for voice telephone, 0x25 is for ERMES
(European Radio Messaging System).
<dcs>
This is used to determine the way the information is encoded. Compressed text is not
supported. Only GSM default alphabet, 8 bit data and UCS2 alphabet are supported.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
72
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CSMP=<fo>, <vp>, <pid>,<dcs>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CSMP?
+CSMP: 0,0,0,0
OK
Note: current values
Note: No validity period <dcs>= PCCP437
alphabet (8 bits Æ 7 bits)
AT+CMPS=17,23,64,244
OK
Note: <vp> = 23 (2 hours, relative format)
Note: Command correct
<dcs> = GSM 8 bits alphabet
Reminder: Enter <fo> value in decimal format
Delete Message +CMGD
Description:
This command deletes one or several messages from preferred message storage (“BM” SMS CB ‘RAM
storage’, “SM” SMSPP storage ‘SIM storage’ or “SR” SMS Status-Report storage).
Refer to the Preferred Message Storage +CPMS command.
Values:
<index> If <DelFlag>=0
•
•
(1-20) If the preferred message storage is “BM”
Sim dependent integer values (in the range of SIM location number) if the preferred
message storage is “SM” or “SR”.
If <DelFlag> is > 0, <index> is ignored.
<DelFlag>
0
Delete message at location <index>.
1
Delete All READ messages
2
Delete All READ and SENT messages
3
Delete All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages
4
Delete All messages.
Notes:
If <DelFlag> is omitted, default value is used.
When the preferred message storage is “SR”, as SMS status reports are assumed to have a “READ”
status, if <DelFlag> is greater than 0, all SMS status reports will be deleted.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CMGD=<Index> [,<DelFalg>]
Command
AT+CMGR=3
Note: Read it
AT+CMGD=3
Note: Delete it
AT+CMGD=1,0
AT+CMGD=1,1
AT+CMGD=1,2
AT+CMGD=1,3
AT+CMGD=1,4
Possible responses
+CMTI:”SM”,3
Note: New message received
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,
“98/10/01,18:19:20+00” <CR><LF>
Message received!
Note: Unread message received from 0146290800 on the 01/10/1998 at 18H19m
20s
OK
Note: Message deleted
OK
Note: The message from the preferred message storage at the location 1 is deleted
OK
Note: All READ messages from the preferred message storage are deleted
OK
Note: All READ messages and SENT mobile originated messages are deleted
OK
Note: All READ, SENT and UNSENT messages are deleted
OK
Note: All messages are deleted
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
73
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Service Center Address +CSCA
Description:
This command indicates the service center to which the message must be sent.
The product has no default value for this address. If the application tries to send a message without
having indicated the service center address, an error will be generated.
Therefore, the application must indicate the SC address when initializing the SMS. This address is then
permanently valid. The application may change it if necessary.
Values:
<sca> service center address
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CSCA=<sca>
Command
AT+CMGS= “+33146290800”<CR>
Hello, how are you?<ctrl-Z>
Note: Send a message
AT+CSCA=”0696741234”
Note: Service center initialization
AT+CMGS=”+33146290800”<CR>
Happy Birthday ! <ctrl-Z>
Note:
Possible responses
+CMS ERROR: 330
Note: service center unknown
OK
+CMGS: 1
OK
Note: Successful transmission
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB
Description:
This command selects which types of CBMs are to be received by the ME. This command is allowed in
both PDU and text modes.
Values:
The <bm> parameter of +CNMI command controls the message indication.
The activation of CBM reception (<mode>=0) can select only specific Message Identifiers (list in
<mids>) for specific Languages (list in <dcss>), but the deactivation stops any reception of CBMs
(only AT+CSCB=1 is allowed).
Message Identifiers (<mids> parameter) indicates the type of message identifiers for which the ME
should listen.
<dcss> Supported languages
0 for German
8 for Portuguese
1 for English
9 for Finnish
2 for Italian
10 for Norwegian
3 for French
11 for Greek
4 for Spanish
12 for Turkish
5 for Dutch
13 for Hungarian
6 for Swedish
14 for Polish
7 for Danish
32 for Czech
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CSCB= <mode>, [ <mids>, [ <dcss> ] ]
Important Note: Test/Read command AT+CSCB? is not supported.
Command
AT+CSCB=0,”15-17,50,86”,” ”
Note: Accept SMS-CB types, 15,16,17,50 and
86 in any language
AT+CSCB=1
Note: Deactivate the reception of CBMs
Possible responses
OK
Note: CBMs can be received
+CBM: 10<CR><LF>
00112233445566778899
Note: CBM length of a received Cell Broadcast
message (SMS-CB), CBM bytes in PDU mode
OK
Note: CBM reception is completely stopped
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
74
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM
Description:
This specific command is used to read the EF-CBMI SIM file.
The EF-CBMI file is not used with the +CSCB command.
The application should read this file (using AT+WCBM ?) and combine the Message Identifiers with
those required by the application.
Values:
<mids> message identifiers
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WCBM= <mids>
Command
AT+WCBM=”10,100,1000,10000”
Note : Write 4 messages identifiers in EFCBMI
AT+WCBM?
Note : Read the CBMIs in EF-CBMI
Possible responses
OK
Note : CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI
+WCBM=”10,100,1000,100000”
OK
Note : 4 CBMIs are stored in EF-CBMI
Message Status Modification +WMSC
Description:
This command allows the manipulation of a message status. The accepted status changes are from
READ to NOT READ and vice versa, and also from SENT to NOT SENT and vice versa.
Values:
<loc>
Location number of the stored message <integer>
<status> New status to be stored, as in the +CMGL command
PDU Mode
0
1
2
3
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WMSC= <loc>, <status>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CMGR=2
+CMGR: “REC READ”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01
14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>
Hello All of you!
OK
AT+WMSC=2,”REC
UNREAD”
AT+CMGR=2
Possible responses:
OK
+CMS ERROR: 321
+CMS ERROR: 302
Note:
Text Mode
“REC UNREAD”
“REC READ”
“STO UNSENT”
“STO SENT”
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+336290918”,,”99/05/01
14:19:44+04” <CR><LF>
Hello All of you!
OK
If the location is valid
If <loc> is invalid or free
If the new <status> and the previous one are incompatible (1)
If all parameters are correct, the product overwrites the whole SMS in SIM.
Only the first byte (Status byte) is changed.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
75
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Message Overwriting +WMGO
Description:
The +CMGW command specifies a location in the SMS or Flash memory for the next SMS to be stored
when the +CMGW indicates a message is ready to be stored. The defined location is used only once:
+WMGO has to used again to perform another overwrite.
Important Notes:
• If the external application specifies a free location and an incoming message is received before the
AT+CMGW command occurs, the product may store the incoming message at the specified available
location. If the user then issues an AT+CMGW command without changing the location with another
AT+WMGO, the received message will be overwritten.
• The location number is not kept over a software reset.
Values:
<loc>
Location number of the SIM record to write or overwrite. The number depends on the SIM or
Flash memory capacity.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WMGO= <loc>
Command
AT+CPMS?
Note: Check the storage area
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>
Hello how are you?<ctrl-Z>
Note: Write a message in text mode
AT+WMGO=?
AT+WMGO=4
AT+CMGW=”+33146299704”<CR>
You are overwritten<ctrl-Z>
AT+WMGO?
AT+WMGO=4
AT+CPMS=”SM”,”ME,””SM”
AT+WMGO?
AT+WMGO?
AT+WMGO=999
Possible responses
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10,”SM”,3,10
+CMGW: 4
OK
Note: Message stored in index 4 in the SIM
+WMGO: (1-10)
OK
Note: Possible values for the SIM
+CMGW: 4
OK
Note: New Message stored in index 4
+WMGO: 4
OK
Note: The value was used, so re-initialization
OK
+CPMS: 3,10,0,99,3,10
OK
Note: Change the storage area from SIM to Flash
+WMGO: (1-99)
OK
Note: Possible values for Flash
+WMGO: 0
OK
Note: We changed the storage area, so the value
was reinitialized
+CMS ERROR: 321
Note: If the storage area is changed with the AT+CPMS command, the value of WMGO will be reset to
zero.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
76
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS
Description:
The +WUSS command allows the SMS Status to be kept at UNREAD after the +CMGR or +CMGL
commands are used.
Values:
<mode>
0 The SMS Status will change
1 The SMS Status will not change
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WUSS=<mode>
Command
AT+WUSS=?
AT+WUSS=1
AT+CMGR=10
AT+CMGR=10
AT+WUSS=0
AT+CMGR=11
AT+CMGR=11
AT+WUSS?
AT+CMGR=10
AT+WUSS?
Possible responses
+WUSS: (0-1)
OK
OK
+CMTI: “SM”,10
Note: SMS has been received in index 10
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:36:35+00”<CR><LF>
Do you want to change state?
OK
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:36:35+00”<CR><LF>
Do you want to change state?
OK
Note: The state hasn’t been updated
OK
+CMTI: ”SM”,11
Note: SMS has been received in index 11
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
Note: The state has been updated.
+WUSS: 0
OK
+CMGR: “REC READ”,”+33660669023”,,”03/02/13,18:56:55+00”<CR><LF>
It is me again.
OK
Note: The state has been updated
+WUSS: 0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
77
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Copy Messages +WMCP
Description:
This command copies the SMS from the SIM to the Flash or from the Flash to the SIM.
Values:
<mode>
0 From SIM to the Flash
1 From the Flash to the SIM
<loc>
Location of the SMS to copy (mandatory for <mode>=1)
If this location is not defined, all the SMS will be copied
Note: The SMS copied will be placed in the first free location
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>]
Command
AT+WMCP=?
AT+CPMS?
Note: Read the SMS storage
AT+CMGR=1
Note: Read the first SMS from the
SIM
AT+WMCP=0,1
Note: Copy the SMS at location 1 in
the SIM to the Flash
AT+CPMS?
Note: Read the SMS storage
AT+CPMS=“ME”,”ME”,“ME”
Note: Select ME for reading, ME for
writing and ME for storing
AT+CMGR=1
Note: Read the first SMS from the
Flash
AT+CMGW=”+33146290800”<CR>
Other test message: SMS in
the Flash at location 2
<ctrl-Z>
Note: Write a message in text mode
AT+CPMS?
Note: Read the SMS storage
AT+WMCP=1,2
Note: Copy the SMS at location 2 in
the Flash to the SIM
AT+CPMS=“SM”,”ME”,“SM”
Note: Select SM for reading, ME for
writing and SM for storing
AT+CMGR=4
Note: Read the first SMS from the
SIM
Possible responses
+WMCP: 0,(1-12)
+WMCP: 1,(1-99)
OK
Note: The location of the SMS that can be copied from the
SIM to the Flash is 1 to 12 (maximum available in the SIM).
The location of the SMS that can be copied from the Flash to
the SIM is 1 to 99 (the maximum available in the Flash).
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read, write...SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in the
SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM. No SMS in
Flash.
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”0146290800”,
“98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>
My test message: SMS in the SIM at location 1
OK
OK
+CPMS: “SM”,3,10,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,3,10
OK
Note: Read, write...SMS from/to SIM. 3 SMS are stored in the
SIM. 10 is the total memory available in SIM. No SMS in
Flash.
+CPMS: 1,99,1,99,1,99
OK
+CMGR: “REC READ”,”0146290800”,
“98/10/01,18:22:11+00”, <CR><LF>
My test message: SMS in the SIM at location 1
OK
+CMGW: 2
OK
Note: Message stored in index 2in the Flash
+CPMS: “ME”,2,99,”ME”,2,99,”ME”,2,99
OK
Note: Read, write...SMS from/to the Flash. 2 SMS are stored
in the Flash.
OK
+CPMS: 4,10,2,99,4,10
OK
+CMGR: “REC UNREAD”,”+33146290800”,
“98/10/01,8:22:11+00”,<CR><LF>
Other test message: SMS in the Flash at
location 2
OK
Continued on the next page.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
78
Chapter 9 – Short Messages Commands
Command Syntax: AT+WMCP=<mode>[,<loc>] Continued
Command
AT+CPMS=”ME”
Note: Select ME for reading
AT+CMGD=0,4
Note: Erase all the SMS stored in the
Flash
AT+CPMS?
Note: Read the SMS storage
AT+WMCP=0
Note: Copy all the SMS from the SIM
to the Flash
AT+CPMS?
Note: Read the SMS storage
Possible responses
+CPMS: 2,99,2,99,4,10
OK
OK
+CPMS: “ME”,0,99,”ME”,0,99,”SM”,4,10
OK
Note: No SMS is stored in the Flash
OK
+CPMS: “ME”,4,99,”ME”,4,99,”SM”,4,10
OK
Note: 4 SMS are stored in the Flash
More Messages to Send +CMMS
Description:
This short message service-oriented AT command allows the link to be kept open while sending several
short messages with only a short delay.
Values:
<mode>
0 Disable feature
1 Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between two messages exceeds 5
seconds, the link is closed and the mode is reset to 0: the feature is disabled.
2 Keep link opened while messages are sent. If the delay between two messages exceeds 5
seconds, the link is closed but the mode remains set to 2: the feature is still enabled.
Notes:
• IMPORTANT: Before sending the last SMS in the link, you must use the AT+CMSS=0
command. This command will indicate that the FOLLOWING SMS will be the last one.
• The delay of 5 seconds complies with Rec 3GPP 27.005...3.5.6
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CMMS=<mode>
Command
Possible responses
AT+CMMS=0
OK
Note: Disable feature
Note: Feature is disabled
AT+CMMS=1
OK
Note: Enable feature 1 time
Note: Feature is enabled; link is open
AT+CMMS=2
OK
Note: Enable feature
Note: Feature is enabled; link is open
AT+CMMS?
+CMMS: 2
OK
AT+CMMS=?
+CMMS: (0-2)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
79
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Chapter 10 – Supplementary
Services Commands
Call Forwarding +CCFC
Description:
Values:
This commands allows control of the "call forwarding" supplementary service.
<reason>
0 Unconditional
1 Mobile busy
2 No reply
3 Not reachable
4 All call forwarding
5 All conditional call forwarding
<mode>
0 Disable
1 Enable
2 Interrogate
3 Registration
4 Erasure
<type> TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format) (default 145 when dialing string includes
international access code character “+”; otherwise, 129).
<class>
1 Voice
2 Data
4 Short Messages
5 All classes
Note: The combination of different classes is not supported, it will only result in the activation /
deactivation / status request of all classes (7).
In the case where the FDN phonebook is activated, the registration is restricted to the phone
numbers written in the FDN.
If <Class> parameter is not given in the command, 7 is used as the default value.
<subaddr> not managed
<satype> not managed
<time>
For <reason> = 2 (No reply), 4 (all call forwarding) and 5 (all conditional call forwarding),
time to wait (1 to 30) in seconds before call is forwarded. Default value is 20.
<status>
0 not active
1 active
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CCFC= <reason>, <mode> [, <number> [,<type> [,<class>
[,<subaddr>[,<satype>[,<time> ] ] ] ] ] ]
Response syntax: +CCFC: <status>, <class1> [, <number>, <type> [,<subaddr>, <satype> [,<time> ] ]
] [ <CR><LF>+CCFC: <status>, <class2> [, <number>, <type> [,<subaddr>, <satype>
[,<time> ] ] ] [ … ] ]
Command
Possible responses
AT+CCFC=0,3,”0146290800”
OK
Note: Register to an unconditional call forwarding Note: Command valid
AT+CCFC=0,2
+CCFC:1,1,”0146290800”,129
Note: Interrogate unconditional call forwarding
Note: Call forwarding active for voice
<CR><LF>+CCFC:1,2,”0146290802”,129
Note: Call forwarding active for data
AT+CCFC=0,4
Note: Erase unconditional call forwarding
OK
Note: Command valid
+CCFC responses are not sorted by <class> parameter, but only by the order of network response.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
80
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Call Barring +CLCK
Description:
This command allows control of the call barring supplementary service. Locking, unlocking or querying
the status of call barring is possible for all classes or for a specific class, but not for a combination of
some.
Values:
<fac>
“AO”, “OI”, “OX”
barring outgoing calls
“AI”, “IR”
barring incoming calls
“AG”, “AC”, “AB
barring all calls (<mode>=0 only)
<mode>
0 Unlocks the facility
1 Locks the facility
2 Query status
<class>
See description for the +CLCK command (Facility Lock) or +CCFC (Call forwarding).
Note: A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the
activation/deactivation/status_request for all classes (7).
<status>
0 Not active
1 Active
Command Syntax: AT+CLCK= <fac>, <mode> [, <password> [, <class> ] ]
Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)
+CLCK: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CLCK: <status>, <class2> [… ] ]
Syntax:
Command
AT+CLCK=”AO”,1,1234
AT+CLCK=”AO”,0,5555
AT+CLCK=”AO”,0,1234
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Wrong password
OK
Note: Command valid
Modify SS Password +CPWD
Description:
This command changes the supplementary service password.
Values:
<fac> See +CLCK command with only “P2” facility added (SIM PIN2).
Note: Regardless of the specified facility, the change of password applies to barring all calls.
<OldPassword>, (NewPassword> The password code is over 8 digits for P2 facility (4 to 8 digits)
The password code is over 4 digits for other facilities (1 to 4 digits)
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CPWD=<fac>,<OldPassword>,<NewPassword>
Command
AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555
Note: Change Call Barring password
AT+CPWD=”AO”,1234,5555
Note: Change password
AT+CPWD=”AO”,5555,1234
Note: Change password
Possible responses
OK
Note: Password changed
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Wrong password
OK
Note: Password changed
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
81
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Call Waiting +CCWA
Description:
This command controls the call waiting supplementary service.
The product will send a +CCWA unsolicited result code when the call waiting service is enabled.
Values:
<n>: result code presentation status in the TA
0 Disable
1 Enable
<mode>
0 Disable
1 Enable
2 Query status
<type>
0 Type of address byte in integer format (refer to Rec GSM 04.08 [8] sub clause 10.5.4.7)
<class>
1 Voice
2 Data
8 Short Messages
7 All classes (voice, data)
Note: A combination of different classes is not supported. It will only result in the activation /
deactivation / status request for all classes (7).
<status>
0 Not Active
1 Active
<alpha>: Optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry
found in the ADN or FDN phonebook.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CCWA=<n>, [ <mode> [, <class> ] ]
Response Syntax: (for <mode>=2 and command successful)
+CCWA: <status> [, <class1> [ <CR><LF>+CCWA: <status>, <class2> [ … ] ]
Unsolicited Result: +CCWA: <number>, <type>, <class> [ ,<alpha>]
(when waiting service is
enabled)
Command
AT+CCWA=1,1,1
Note: Enable call waiting for voice
calls
AT+CCWA=1,2
Note: Interrogate call waiting
AT+CCWA=1,0,7
Note: Erase call waiting
AT+CCWA?
AT+CCWA=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
+CCWA:1,1
OK
Note: Call waiting active for voice calls
+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”FREDDY”
Note: Number and name of the waiting voice call
or
+CCWA:”0146290800”,145,1,”8023459678FFFF” (UCS2 format)
OK
Note: Command valid
+CCWA:,,1
Note: voice call waiting (no number)
+CCWA: <n>
OK
+CCWA: List of supported <n>
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
82
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR
Description:
This command controls the Calling Line Identification restriction supplementary service.
Values:
<n> Sets the line ID restriction for outgoing calls
0 Presentation indicator is used according to the subscription of the CLIR service
1 CLIR invocation
2 CLIR suppression
<m> Shows the subscriber CLIR status in the network
0 CLIR not provisioned
1 CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2 Unknown (no network…)
3 CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
4 CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CLIR=<n>
Response syntax: +CLIR:<n>,<m>
Command
AT+CLIR=2
AT+CLIR ?
Note: Ask for current functionality
(for AT+CLIR ?)
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
+CLIR:<n>,<m>
OK
Note: <n> and <m> as defined above
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP
Description:
This command controls the calling line identification presentation supplementary service. When
presentation of the CLI (Calling Line Identification) is enabled (and calling subscriber allows), +CLIP
response is returned after every RING (or +CRING) result code.
Values:
<n> Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation in the TA
0 Disable
1 Enable
<m> parameter shows the subscriber CLIP service status in the network
0 CLIP not provisioned
1 CLIP provisioned
2 Unknown (no network…)
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CLIP=<n>
Response syntax: +CLIP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+CLIP)
+CLIP: <number>, <type>[ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ] (for an incoming call,
after each RING or +CRING indication)
Command
AT+CLIP=1
Note: Enable CLIP
AT+CLIP?
Note: Ask for current functionality
AT+CLIP=0
Note: Disable CLIP presentation
Possible responses
OK
Note: CLIP is enabled
+CLIP:<n>,<m>
OK
Note: <n> and <m> defined as below
RING
Note: Incoming call
+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,,,”FRED”
Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation
RING
Note: Incoming call
+CLIP: “0146290800”,129,1,, “8000204212FFFF”
Note: Incoming call with number and name presentation
(UCS2 format)
OK
Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
83
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP
Description:
This command controls the connected line identification presentation supplementary service - useful for
call forwarding of the connected line.
Values:
<n> Parameter sets/shows the result code presentation status in the TA
0 Disable
1 Enable
<m> Parameter shows the subscriber COLP service status in the network
0 COLP not provisioned
1 COLP provisioned
2 Unknown (no network)
Syntax:
Command syntax:
Response syntax:
AT+COLP=<n>
+COLP: <n>,<m> (as response to AT+COLP?)
+COLP: <number>,<type> [ ,<subaddr>, <satype>, <alpha> ]
After ATD command, before OK or CONNECT <speed>
Command
AT+COLP=1
Note: Activate COLP
AT+COLP?
Note: Ask for current
functionality
ATD146290928;
Note: Outgoing call
AT+COLP=0
Note: Deactivate COLP
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
+COLP:1,1
OK
Note: COLP is enabled and provisioned
+COLP:”0146290928”,129,,,”JOE”
or
+COLP:“0146290800”,129,1,,,”8000204212FFFF” (UCS2 format)
OK
Note: Connected outgoing line number and name presentation
OK
Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
84
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Advice of Charge +CAOC
Description:
This refers to the Advice of Charge supplementary service (GSM 02.24 and GSM 02.86), which enables
the subscriber to obtain information on call cost. With <mode>=0, the command returns the current call
meter value (CCM) from the modem (ME).
If AOC is supported, the command can also enable unsolicited event reporting on CCM information.
The unsolicited result code +CCCM: <ccm> is sent when the CCM value changes. Deactivation of
unsolicited event reporting is performed with the same command.
If AOC is supported, the Read command indicates whether unsolicited reporting is activated or not.
Values:
<mode>
0 Query CCM value
1 Deactivate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
2 Activate the unsolicited reporting of CCM value
<ccm>
String type; three bytes of the current call meter value in hexadecimal format (e.g., “00001E”
corresponds to the decimal value 30); value is in home units and bytes are coded in a similar way
as the ACMmax value in SIM
Command syntax: AT+CAOC= <mode>
Syntax:
Command
AT+CAOC=0
Note: Query CCM value
Possible responses
+CAOC: “000A08”
OK
Note: Display Current Call Meter value (CCM=2568)
AT+CAOC=1
OK
Note: Deactivate unsolicited report of CCM value Note: CCM report deactivated
AT+CAOC=2
OK
Note: Activate unsolicited report of CCM value
Note: CCM report activated
AT+CAOC ?
+CAOC:<mode>
Note: Request mode
OK
Note: Display unsolicited report mode (1 or 2)
AT+CAOC=?
+CAOC: (0-2)
Note: Request supported modes
OK
Note: 0,1,2 modes supported
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM
Description:
This command resets the Advice of Charge for accumulated call meter value in SIM file EFACM. The
ACM contains the total number of home units for both the current and preceding calls. SIM PIN2 is
required to reset the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
The Read command returns the current value of the ACM.
The ACM value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.
Values:
<pin2 passwd> string type
<acm value> string type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CACM=<pin2 passwd>
Possible Response: +CACM: <acm value>
Command
AT+CACM?
Note: Request ACM value
AT+CACM= 1234
Note: Request ACM reset, real PIN2 is “1234”
AT+CACM= 0000
Note: Request ACM reset with wrong PIN2 value
AT+CACM ?
Note: Request ACM value
Possible responses
+CACM: “000400”
OK
Note: Display ACM value (ACM=1024)
OK
Note: ACM value is reset
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect password
+CACM: “000000”
OK
Note: Display ACM value (ACM = 0)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
85
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM
Description:
The set command sets the Advice of Charge related to accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM
file EFACMmax. ACMmax contains the maximum number of home units the subscriber is allowed to
consume. When ACM (see +CACM) reaches ACMmax, calls are prohibited. SIM PIN2 is required to set
the value. If setting fails in an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned.
The Read command returns the current value of ACMmax.
The ACMmax value (entered or displayed) is in hexadecimal format with 6 digits.
Values:
<ACMmax>
String type coded as <ccm> under +CAOC. Value 0 disables ACMmax feature.
<pin2 passwd> String type
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CAMM:<ACMmax>,<pin2 passwd>
Command
AT+CAMM=”000400”,1234
Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is “1234”
AT+CAMM=”000400”,0000
Note: Request ACMmax update, PIN2 is “1234”
AT+CAMM ?
Note: Request ACMmax value
Possible responses
OK
Note: ACMmax updated to 1024
+CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect password
+CAMM: “000400”
OK
Note: ACMmax = 1024
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC
Description:
The set command sets the parameters for Advice of Charge related to price per unit and the currency
table in SIM file EFPUCT. PUCT information can be used to convert the home units (as used in +CAOC,
+CACM and +CAMM) into currency units. SIM PIN2 is required to set the parameters. If setting fails in
an ME error, +CME ERROR: <err> is returned..
Values:
<currency> String type
<ppu> String type
<pin2 passwd> String type
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CPUC <currency>,<ppu>,<pin2 passwd>
Command
AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1234
Note: Request Currency and Price per unit update
AT+CPUC=”FFR”,”0.82”,1111
Note: Request Currency and PPU update (wrong PIN2)
AT+CPUC?
Note: Request Currency and Price
Possible responses
OK
+ CME ERROR: 16
Note: Incorrect password
+CPUC:”FFR”,”0.82”
OK
Note: Currency= “FFR”
Price per unit= “0.82”
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
86
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD
Description:
This command manages call hold and multiparty conversation (conference call). Calls can be put on
hold, recovered, released or added to a conversation.
Values:
<n>
0
1
1x
2
2x
3
4
Syntax:
Release all held calls or set User Determined User Busy (UDUB) for a waiting call.
Release all active calls (if any exist) and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.
Release a specific call X (active, held or waiting)
Place all active calls (if any exist) on hold and accepts the other (held or waiting) call.
Place all active calls on hold except call X with which communication is supported.
Adds a held call to the conversation.
Connects the two calls and disconnects the subscriber from both calls (Explicit Call Transfer).
Command syntax: AT+CHLD=< n >
Command
AT+CHLD=<n>
AT+CHLD=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: If n is within the defined values
+CHLD: (0-4, 11-17, 21-27)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
87
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
List Current Calls +CLCC
Description:
This command returns a list of current calls.
Values:
<idx> integer type, call identification as described in GSM 02.30
<dir> direction of the call
0 mobile originated (MO) call
1 mobile terminated (MT) call
<stat> (state of the call):
0 active
1 held
2 dialing (MO call)
3 alerting (MO call)
4 incoming (MT call)
5 waiting (MT call)
<mode> (teleservice)
0 voice
1 data
9 unknown
<mpty>
0 call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1 call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
<number> string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type>
type of address byte in integer format
<alpha>
optional string type alphanumeric representation of <number>
corresponding to the entry found in phonebook. (for UCS2 format see commands examples
+CLIP, +CCWA or +COLP)
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CLCC
Response syntax: OK (if no calls are available)
Else:
+CLCC: <id1>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type> [<alpha>] ]
[<CR><LF>
+CLCC: <id2>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>[,<number>,<type>[<alpha>] ] [. . . ] ] ]
<CR><LF>
OK
Command
RING
Note: Incoming call
AT+CLCC
ATA
Note: Answering the call
AT+CLCC
ATD0146299704
Note: Outgoing Call
AT+CLCC
Note: Before the phone called is ringing
AT+CLCC
Note: The phone called is ringing
AT+CLCC
Note: The call is being answered
Possible responses
+CLCC: 1,1,4,0,0,”0146294079”,129
OK
OK
+CLCC: 1,1,1,0,0,”0146294079”,129
OK
OK
+CLCC: 1,0,2,0,0,”0146294079”,129
OK
+CLCC: 1,0,3,0,0,”0146294079”,129
OK
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,”0146294079”,129
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
88
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN
Description:
This command refers to supplementary service related network initiated notifications.
Values:
<n> Parameter sets/shows the +CSSI result code presentation status
0 disable
1 enable
<m> Parameter sets/shows the +CSSU result code presentation status
0 disable
1 enable
<code1>
0 unconditional call forwarding is active
1 some of the conditional call forwarding calls are active
4 closed User Group call, with CUG <index>
5 outgoing calls are barred
6 incoming calls are barred
7 CLIR suppression rejected
<code2>
0 this is a forwarded call (MT call setup)
1 closed User Group call, with CUG <index>
2 call has been put on hold (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)
3 call has been retrieved (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)
4 multiparty call entered (during a voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)
5 call on hold has been released (during a voice call)
7 call is being connected (alerting) with the remote party in alerting state in Explicit Call Transfer
operation (during a voice call)
8 call has been connected with the other remote party in Explicit Call Transfer operation (during a
voice call, <number> & <type> fields may be present)
<index>
Closed User Group index
<number> String type phone number
<type>
Type of address
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CSSN= <n>, <m>
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received after a mobile
originated call setup, intermediate result code +CSSI:<code1>[,<index>] is sent
before any other MO call setup result codes.
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is received during a call,
unsolicited result code +CSSU:<code2>[,<index>[,<number>,<type>]] is sent.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
89
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
The USSD supplementary service is described in GSM 02.90. It is based on sequences of digits which
may be entered by a mobile user with a handset. A sequence entered is sent to the network which
replies with an alphanumerical string, for display only, or for display plus request for the next sequence.
This command is used to:
• Enable or disable the CUSD indication sent to the application by the product when an incoming
USSD is received
• Send and receive USSD strings
<n>
0 Disable the result code presentation
1 Enable the result code presentation
2 Cancel session (not applicable to read command response)
<m>
0 no further user action required (network initiated USSD-Notify, or no further information needed
after mobile initiated operation)
1 further user action required (network initiated USSD-Request, or further information needed after
mobile initiated operation)
2 USSD terminated by network
4 Operation not supported
<str> is network string, converted in the selected character set
<dcs> is the data coding scheme received (GSM TS 03.38).
Command syntax: AT+CUSD = <n> [ ,<str> [ <dcs> ] ]
Note: In case of enabled presentation, a +CUSD (as direct answer to a send
USSD) is then indicated with:
+CUSD: <m> [,<str>,<dcs> ]
Command Syntax To Send and Receive USSD: AT+CUSD= <n> [,<str> [,<dcs>]]
Note: Please be aware that the send USSD command needs the user to re-enter
the <n> parameter!
Values for Send and Receive USSD
<str> The USSD string to be sent.
<dcs> The default alphabet and the UCS2 alphabet are supported.
When the product sends a USSD, an OK response is first returned, the
intermediate +CUSD indication comes subsequently. In case of error, a +CUSD:
4 indication is returned.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
90
Chapter 10 – Supplementary Services Commands
Closed User Group +CCUG
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
The Closed User Group Supplementary Service enables subscribers to form closed user groups with
restricted access (both access to and from).
The CUG supplementary service is described in GSM 02.85. This service is provided on prior
arrangement with the service provider. Subscription options should be selected at implementation.
The +CCUG command is used to:
• Activate/deactivate the control of CUG information for all following outgoing calls
• Select a CUG index
• Suppress outgoing access (OA). OA allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside the CUG
• Suppress the preferential CUG. Preferential is the default CUG used by the network when it does
not receive an explicit CUG index
<n>
0
Disable CUG mode (default)
1
Enable CUG mode
<index>
0-9
CUG index (0 default),
10
Preferred CUG
<info>
0
No information (default)
1
Suppress OA
2
Suppress preferential CUG
3
Suppress OA and preferential CUG
Note: To activate the control of the CUG information by call, add [G] or [g] to the ATD command.
Index and info values will be used.
Command syntax: AT+CCUG = <n> [ ,<index> [ <info> ] ]
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
91
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Using AT Commands During a Data Connection
To use AT Commands during a data connection (such as while the product is in online mode), it is necessary either to
switch to offline mode, or to use the +WMUX command to enable Commands / Data multiplexing.
Switch from Online to Offline Mode
To switch from online mode to offline mode, the “+++” sequence must be sent. Following this, the product gets back
to offline mode with an “OK” response, and an AT command can be sent.
Note: The “+++” sequence only works with the +ICF command using the following settings:
• 8 data bits, with no parity
• 7 data bits, with even parity
Switch from Offline to Online Mode
See the ATO command description.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
92
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Bearer Type Selection +CBST
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command applies to both outgoing and incoming data calls, but in a different way. For an outgoing
call, the two parameters (e.g., <speed> and <ce>) apply; whereas, for an incoming call, only the <ce>
parameter applies.
Notes:
• For incoming calls, if <ce> is set to T, only and the network offers NT only or vice versa. Then the
call is released.
• The values 2 and 3 for the <ce> parameter are equivalent to the former values of 100 and 101.
Those values are managed for compatibility purposes, but they should no longer be used in the
new code (2 as former 100 and 3 as former 101).
<speed>
0 (default)
Autobauding (modem type: none)
1
300 bps
(modem type: V.21)
2
1200 bps
(modem type: V.22)
3
1200/75 bps (modem type: V.23)
4
2400 bps
(modem type: V.22bis)
5
2400 bps
(modem type: V.26ter)
6
4800 bps
(modem type: V.32)
7
9600 bps
(modem type: V.32)
8
Specific
12
9600 bps
(modem type: V.34)
14(*)
1400 bps
(modem type: V.34)
65
300 bps
(modem type: V.110)
66
1200 bps
(modem type: V.110)
68
2400 bps
(modem type: V.110)
70
4800 bps
(modem type: V.110)
71
9600 bps
(modem type: V.110)
75(*)
14400 bps (modem type: V.110)
(*) This speed configures data 14.4 kbps bearers.
<name> No data compression is provided and only asynchronous modem is supported (<name> = 0).
<ce>
Connection element
0
Transparent only
1 (default)
Non transparent only
2
Transparent preferred
3
Non transparent preferred
Command syntax: AT+CBST= <speed>, <name>, <ce>
Command
AT+CBST=?
Note: Test command
AT+CBST=?
Note: Test command
AT+CBST=7,0,1
Note: Ask for a bearer
AT+CBST?
Note: Current values
AT+CBST=81,0,0
Note: Ask for a bearer
Possible responses
+CBST: (0-8,65,66,68,70,71),(0),(0-3)
OK
Note: Data 14,4 kbps not supported
+CBST: (08,12,14,65,66,68,70,71,75),(0),(0-3)
OK
Note: Data 14,4 kbps not supported
OK
Note: Bearer supported
+CBST:7,0,1
OK
Note: Command valid
+CME ERROR: 4
Note: Bearer not supported
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
93
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Select Mode +FCLASS
Description:
This command puts the product into a particular operating mode (data).
Values:
<n>
0 Data
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+FCLASS= <n>
Command
AT+FCLASS=?
Note: Test command
AT+FCLASS=?
Note: Test command
AT+FCLASS=0
Note: Data mode requested
AT+FCLASS?
Note: Current value
Possible responses
+FCLASS: (0)
OK
+FCLASS: (0)
OK
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+FCLASS:
OK
Note: Command valid
Service Reporting Control +CR
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command enables a more detailed type of service reporting in the case of incoming or outgoing
data calls. Before sending the CONNECT response to the application, the product will specify the type
of data connection that has been set up.
These report types are:
+CR: ASYNC
For asynchronous transparent
+CR: REL ASYNC For asynchronous non-transparent
<mode>
0 Disable extended reports
1 Enable extended reports
Command syntax: AT+CR=<mode>
Command
AT+CR=0
Note: Extended reports disabled
AT+CR=1
Note: Extended reports enabled
AT+CR?
AT+CR=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+CR: 1
OK
+CR: (0,1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
94
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Cellular Result Codes +CRC
Description:
This command shows more detailed ring information for an incoming call (voice or data). Instead of the
string “RING”, an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING: VOICE).
These extended indications are:
+CRING: ASYNC
for asynchronous transparent
+CRING: REL ASYNC
for asynchronous non-transparent
+CRING: VOICE
for normal speech.
Values:
<mode>
0 Disable extended reports
1 Enable extended reports
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CRC=<mode>
Command
AT+CRC=0
Note: Extended reports disabled
AT+CRC=1
Note: Extended reports enabled
AT+CRC?
AT+CRC=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+CRC: 1
OK
+CRC: (0,1)
OK
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR
Description:
This parameter controls whether or not the extended-format “+ILRR:<rate>” information text is
transmitted from the DCE to the DTE. The <rate> reported represents the current (negotiated or
renegotiated) DTE-DCE rate.
If enabled, the intermediate result code is transmitted in an incoming or outgoing data call, after any
data compression report, and before any final result code (CONNECT).
Values:
<value>
0 Disable local port rate report
1 Enable local port rate report
<rate> Can take the following values: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Kbps.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+ILRR = <value>
Command
AT+ILRR=0
Note: Local port rate report disabled
AT+ILRR=1
Note: Local port rate report enabled
AT+ILRR?
AT+ILRR=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+ILRR: 1
OK
+ILRR: (0,1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
95
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP
Description:
This command changes the radio link protocol parameters used for non transparent data transmission.
Values:
Value:
<iws>
<mws>
<T1>
<N2>
<ver>
0
1
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CRLP=<iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>, <ver>
Range:
0-61
0-61
40-255
1-255
0-1
Command
AT+CRLP=?
Note: Test command
AT+CRLP=?
Note: Test command
AT+CRLP=61,61,48,6,0
Note: Set new parameters
AT+CRLP?
Note: Current values
Description:
Down window size, (default is 61)
Up window size, (default is 61)
Acknowledgement timer in units of 10ms, (default is 48)
Retransmission attempts, (default is 6)
Version number
V42bis is not supported
V42bis is supported
Possible responses
+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0)
OK
Note: V42bis not supported
+CRLP: (0-61),(0-61),(40-255),(1,255),(0,1)
OK
Note: V42bis supported
OK
Note: Command valid
AT+CRLP: 61,61,48,6,0
Note: Command valid
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT
Description:
This command modifies some supplementary radio link protocol parameters.
Values:
<reset_allowed>
0
Data communication is hung up in case of bad radio link.
1
Default. Data communication continues in case of bad radio link (possible loss of data)
<dtx_allowed>
0
Normal mode
1
Default. Economic battery mode (not supported by all networks)
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+DOPT=<reset_allowed>,<dtx_allowed>
Command
AT+DOPT=1
Note: Set new parameters (2nd value is the default)
AT+DOPT+?
Note: Test command
AT+DOPT=1,1
Note: Set new parameters
AT+DOPT?
Note: Current values
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
(0,1),(0,1)
OK
Note: DTX is supported
OK
Note: Command valid
1,1
OK
Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
96
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
Select Data Compression %C
Description:
This command enables or disables data compression negotiation if this feature is supported on the
product.
Values:
<n>
0
2
Syntax:
no compression (default)
V42bis compression if supported
Command syntax: AT%C<n>
Command
AT%C0
Note: Command
AT%C2
Note: Command
AT%C?
Note: Current value
Possible responses
OK
Note: Feature supported
OK
Note: V42bis supported
2
OK
Note: Command valid
V42bis Data Compression +DS
Description:
This command enables or disables V.42bis data compression if this feature is supported on the product.
Note that the product allows only the MNP2 protocol.
Values:
< dir >
Specifies the desired direction(s) of operation of the data compression function; from the
DTE point of view, (default is 3)
0 Negotiated … no compression
1 Transmit only
2 Receive only
3 Both directions, accept any direction. Default.
< neg > Specifies whether or not the DCE should continue to operate if the desired result is not
obtained, (default is 0)
0 Do not disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>.
Default.
1 Disconnect if V.42 bis is not negotiated by the remote DCE as specified in <dir>
< P1 >
< P2 >
Syntax:
Specifies the maximum number of dictionary entries that should be negotiated,
Range is 512 to 2048. Default is 2048.
Specifies the maximum string length to be negotiated. Range is 6 to 250. Default is 20.
Command syntax: AT+DS=[[<dir>][,[<neg>][,[<P1>][,[<P2>]]]]
Command
Possible responses
AT+DS=?
Note: Test command
AT+DS=3,0,2048,250
Note: Set new parameters
AT+DS?
Note: Current values
+DS: (0-3),(0,1),(512-2048),(6-250)
OK
OK
Note: Command valid
+DS: 3,0,2048,20
OK
Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
97
Chapter 11 – Data Commands
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR
Description:
This command determines whether or not the use of V42bis is allowed for an incoming or outgoing data
call, if this feature is provided by the product. The intermediate result code represents current DCE-DCE
data compression type. The format of this result code is as follows:
+DR: NONE
Data compression is not in use
+DR: V42B
Rec. V.42 bis is in use in both directions
+DR: V42B RD
Rec. V.42 bis is in use in receive direction only
+DR: V42B TD
Rec. V.42 bis is in use in transmit direction only
The +DR intermediate result code, if enabled, is issued before the final result code, before the +ILRR
intermediate report and after the service report control +CR.
Values:
<status>
State of the V42bis
0
Disable. Default value.
1
Enable
Command syntax: AT+DR=<status>
Syntax:
Command
AT+DR=?
Note: Test command
AT+DR=1
Note: Reporting enabled
AT+DR?
Note: Current value
Possible responses
+DR: (0-1)
OK
OK
Note: Command valid
+DR: 1
OK
Note: Command valid
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N
Description:
If this feature is provided by the product, this command controls the preferred error correcting mode for
a data connection. It can only be used for transparent data transmission.
If the MNP2 feature is provided, the product authorizes MNP error correction mode.
Values:
<n>
0
Default. Disables error correction mode
5
Selects MNP error correction mode
Note: +E prefixed commands of V.25 ter are not used.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT\N<n>
Command
AT\N0
Note: no error correction
AT\N?
Note: Current value
AT\N4
Possible responses
OK
0
OK
Note: Command valid
+CME ERROR: 3
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
98
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25
Commands
Important
All commands described hereafter will to the currently selected (and used) UART.
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR
Description:
This commands specifies the data rate at which the DCE will accept commands.
Notes:
• The serial autobauding feature is supported and covers the following serial speeds only:
2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600 bps. Beyond those serial speeds, proper operation of
the modem is not guaranteed.
• Any AT command issued by the DTE must start with both capital ‘A’ and ‘T’ (or ‘/’) or both lower
case ‘a’ and ‘t’ (or ‘/’); otherwise, the DCE may return some garbage characters and become
desynchronized. Should this happen, the DTE simply issues ‘AT\r’ (at 2400 or 4800 bauds) once
or twice or just ‘AT’ (at 9600 bauds) to resynchronize the modem.
• The DTE waits for 1ms after receiving the last character of the AT response (which is always ‘\n’
or 0x0A) to send a new AT command at either the same rate or a new rate. Should this delay be
ignored, the DCE can become desynchronized. Once again, sending ’AT\r’ once or twice or just
‘AT’ causes the DCE to recover.
Caution: When starting up, if autobauding is enabled and no AT command has yet been received, the
product sends all unsolicited responses (like RING) at 9600 bauds.
Values:
<value> Baud rates that can be used by the DCE
0
Enables autobauding
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
19200
38400
57600
115200
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+IPR=<value>
Command
AT+IPR?
Possible responses
+IPR: 9600
OK
Note: Current rate is 9600 bps
AT+IPR=?
+IPR: (0,2400,4800,9600,19200,38400,57600,115200), (300,600,1200)
OK
Note: Possible values, according to V25ter Recommendation:
The first set of values indicates the range of auto-detectable baud rates (including
0). The second set of values indicates the baud rates supported by the DCE but not
auto-detectable.
AT+IPR=38400 OK
Note: Disable autobauding and set rate to 38400 bps
AT+IPR=0
OK
Note: Enable autobauding
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
99
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF
Description:
This command determines the local serial port start-stop (asynchronous) character framing that the
DCE uses.
Values:
<format>
0
Auto detect (not supported)
1
8 Data 2 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored
2
8 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported)
If no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value
3
8 Data 1 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored
4
7 Data 2 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored
5
7 Data 1 Parity 1 Stop (supported)
If no <parity> provided, 3 is used by default as <parity> value
6
7 Data 1 Stop (supported)
<parity> parameter is ignored
<parity>
0
Odd
(supported)
1
Even
(supported)
2
Mark
(supported)
3
Space
(supported)
4
None
(supported)
Note: All character framing formats settings of the serial interface (i.e., 801, 8E1, 8S1, 8N1, 7N1, 7O1,
7E1, 7S1 and 7N2) are supported on autobauding operation.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+ICF= <format>[, <parity>]
Command
AT+ICF?
AT+ICF=?
AT+ICF=2,0
Possible responses
+ICF: 3,4
OK
Note: Current values
+ICF: (1-6),(0-4)
OK
Note: Possible values
OK
Note: New values
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
100
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC
Description:
This command is controls the operation of local flow control between the DTE and DCE.
Values:
< DCE_by_DTE >
0 none
(supported)
1 Xon/Xoff local circuit 103
(not supported)
2 RTS
(supported)
3 Xon/Xoff global on circuit 103
(not supported)
Important Note: When this parameter is set to 2 (DTE invokes flow control through RTS) DCE
behavior is as follows:
• If the DCE has never detected RTS in the high (or ON) condition since startup then it ignores
RTS as it assumes that this signal is not connected.
• As soon as the DCE detects RTS high the signal acts on it. Therefore subsequent RTS
transition to OFF will prevent the DCE from sending any further data in both online and
offline modes.
• This behavior allows the user to use the default settings (hardware flow control) and leave
RTS disconnected. In the case where RTS is connected and is high at least once, it acts on
the DCE.
< DTE_by_DCE >
0 none
(supported)
1 Xon/Xoff circuit 104
(not supported)
2 CTS
(supported)
Note: When this parameter is set to 0 (none), then CTS is kept high all the time.
Command syntax: AT+IFC=<DCE_by_DTE>,<DTE_by_DCE>
Syntax:
Command
AT+IFC?
AT+IFC=?
AT+IFC=0,0
Possible responses
+IFC: 2,2
OK
Note: Current values
+IFC: (0,2),(0,2)
OK
Note: Possible values
OK
Note: New values
Set DCD Signal &C
Description:
This commands controls the Data Carrier Detect (DCD) signal.
Values:
<n>
0
1
Syntax:
DCD always on
DCD matches the state of the remote modem’s data carrier
Command syntax: AT&C <n>
Command
AT&C0
Note: DCD always on
AT&C1
Note: DCD matches state of the remote
modem’s data carrier
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
101
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
Set DTR Signal &D
Description:
This commands controls the Data Terminal Ready (DTR) signal.
Values:
<n>
0
1
2
Syntax:
The DTR signal is ignored
Modem switches from data to command mode when DTR switches from ON to OFF
Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released
Command syntax: AT&D<n>
Command
AT&D0
Note: The DTR signal is ignored
AT&D1
Note: Modem switches from data to command mode when
DTR switches from ON to OFF
AT&D2
Note: Upon DTR switch from ON to OFF, the call is released
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
Set DSR Signal &S
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This commands controls the Data Set Ready (DSR) signal.
<n>
0 DSR always on
1 DSR off in command mode. DSR on in data mode.
Command syntax: AT&S<n>
Command
AT&S0
Note: DSR always on
AT&S1
Note: DSR off in command mode, DSR on in data mode
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
Back to Online Mode O
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
If a connection has been established and the ME is in command mode, this command allows you to
return to online data mode.
No parameters
Command syntax: ATO
Command
ATO
Return from offline mode to online mode
Possible responses
OK
Result Code Suppression Q
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command determines whether the mobile equipment sends result codes or not.
<n>
0 DCE transmit result codes
1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
Command syntax: ATQ<n>
Command
ATQ0
Note: DCE transmits result codes
ATQ1
Note: Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
Note: No response
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
102
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
DCE Response Format V
Description:
This command determines the DCE response format, with or without header characters <CR><LF>.
Result codes are provided as numeric or verbose.
Values:
Information
responses
Result codes
Syntax:
<n>=0
<text><CR><LF>
<numeric code><CR>
<n>=1
<CR><LF>
<text><CR><LF>
<CR><LF>
<verbose code><CR><LF>
Command syntax: ATV<n>
Command
ATV0
Note: DCE transmits limited headers and trailers and
numeric result codes
ATV1
Note: DCE transmits full headers and trailers and
verbose response text
Possible responses
0
Note: Command is valid (0 means OK)
OK
Note: Command valid
Default Configuration Z
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command restores the configuration profile. Any call is released.
No parameters
Command syntax: ATZ
Command
ATZ
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
Save Configuration &W
Description:
Values:
Syntax:
This command writes the active configuration to a non-volatile memory (EEPROM). For description of
the stored parameters, refer to Appendix A.
No parameters
Command syntax: AT&W
Command
AT&W
Note: Writes current configuration to EEPROM
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
103
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
Auto-Tests &T
Description:
This command runs various auto-tests.
Values:
<n>
0
1
2
Syntax:
Perform software auto-tests
The response will be OK if no software problem is detected (EEPROM, RAM, and ROM
checksums); otherwise, a simple ERROR response is sent.
Perform the audio loop test (close)
This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker)
Stop the audio loop test (open)
This is used to validate the audio loop (microphone to speaker)
Command syntax: AT&T<n>
Command
AT&T0
Note: Perform software auto-tests
AT&T1
Note: Do the audio loop test (close)
AT&T2
Note: Stop the audio loop test (open)
Possible responses
OK
Note: No software problem detected, all checksums are
correct
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
Echo E
Description:
This command is used to determine whether or not the modem echoes characters received by an
external application (DTE).
Values:
<n>
0
1
Syntax:
Characters are not echoed
Characters are echoed
Command syntax: ATE<n>
Command
ATE0
Note: Characters are not echoed
ATE1
Note: Characters are echoed
Possible responses
OK
Note: Done
OK
Note: Done
Restore Factory Settings &F
Description:
This command is used to restore the factory settings from EEPROM.
It only restores the parameters that can be found in the Parameters Storage table with column AT&F
checked. Those parameters are restored in RAM and in E2P, overwriting the profile set with AT&W.
Values:
<n>
0 Restore factory settings
Note: No other value is supported.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT&F<n>
Command
AT&F
Note: Ask for restoring the factory settings
AT&F0
Note: Ask for restoring the factory settings
Possible responses
OK
Note: Done
OK
Note: Done
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
104
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
Display Configuration &V
Description:
This command is used to display the modem configuration.
Values:
<n>
0 Displays the modem configuration in RAM. Default value if no parameter provided.
1 Displays the modem configuration in EEPROM.
2 Displays the modem factory configuration.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT&V<n>
The parameters displayed are the following:
Q: val 1, V: val 2, S0: val 3, S2: val 4, S3: val 5, S4: val 6, S5: val 7,
+CR: val 8, +CRC: val 9, +CMEE: val 10, +CBST: val 11,
+SPEAKER: val 12, +ECHO: val 13, &C: val 14, &D: val 15, %C: val 16,
+IPR: val 17, +ICF: val 18, +IFC: val 19
Command
AT&V
Note: Display active
parameters in RAM
Possible responses
Q:0 V:1 S0:000 S2:043 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008
+CR:0 +CRC:0 +CMEE:0 +CBST:0,0,1
+SPEAKER:0 +ECHO:0,0 &C:1 &D:2 %C:0
+IPR:9600 +ICF:3,4 +IFC:2,2
OK
Note: Done
For Echo the first value corresponds to Echo cancellation 1.
Request Identification Information I
Description:
This command causes the product to transmit one or more lines of specific information text.
Values:
<n>
0 Displays manufacturer followed by model identification. Equivalent to +CGMI and +CGMM.
3 Displays revision identification. Equivalent to +CGMR.
4 Displays modem configuration in RAM. Equivalent to &V0.
5 Displays modem configuration in EEPROM. Equivalent to &V1.
6 Displays modem data features. Lists the supported data rates and data modes.
7 Displays modem voice features.
Other values: OK string will be sent back.
Syntax:
Command syntax: ATI<n>
Command
ATI0
Note: Manufacturer and model
identifications
ATI3
Note: Revision identification
ATI6
Note: Modem data features
ATI7
Note: Modem voice features
Possible responses
WAVECOM MODEM
900P
OK
Note: GSM 900 MHz primary band
657_09gg.Q2406B 2015268 100506 17:01
OK
Note: Software release 6.57, generated on the 5th of October
2006
DATA RATES:
AUTOBAUD,300,1200,1200/75,2400,4800,9600,14400
DATA MODES: T/NT,ASYNCHRONOUS
OK
Note: Done
SPEECH CODINGS: FR,EFR,HR,AMR
OK
Note: Done
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
105
Chapter 12 – V.24 and V.25 Commands
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX
Description:
This command manages the data/AT commands in multiplexing mode. See Appendix B for the
Data/Commands multiplexing protocol description.
Values:
<mode>
0 Multiplexing disabled. When the product is online (data communication in progress), no AT
command can be used (default).
1 Multiplexing enabled. Data flows and AT commands are multiplexed while in online mode (data
communication in progress).
Note: The Multiplexing mode is available to only one UART. If this mode is available on UART1
and the AT+WMUX=1 command is sent through UART2, the multiplexing mode will be
available on UART2 and disabled on UART1.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WMUX=<mode>
Command
AT+WMUX=?
AT+WMUX?
AT+WMUX=1
Note: Enable Data/Commands multiplexing
Possible responses
+WMUX: (0-1)
OK
+WMUX: 0
OK
Note: Data/Commands multiplexing disabled
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
106
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Chapter 13 – Specific AT
Commands
Cell Environment Description +CCED
Description:
This command can be used by the application to retrieve the parameters of the main cell and of up to
six neighboring cells.
There are two possible methods for the external application to determine these cell parameters:
• On request by the application
• Automatically by the product every 5 seconds.
Automatic mode is not supported during registration.
Values:
<mode>
0 One shot requested
1 Automatic shots requested
2 Stop automatic shots
<requested dump>
1 Main Cell:
• If the Cell Identity is available
MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full, RxLev Sub, RxQual,
RxQual Full, RxQual Sub,Idle TS
• If the Cell Identity is not available
MCC, MNC, LAC, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev, RxLev Full, RxLev Sub, RxQual,
RxQual Full, RxQual Sub,Idle TS
2
Neighbor1 to Neighbor6:
• If the Cell Identity is available
MCC, MNC, LAC, CI, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev
• If the Cell Identity is not available
MCC, MNC, LAC,, BSIC, BCCH Freq (absolute), RxLev
4
Main Cell Timing Advance
8
Main cell RSSI indications (RxLev) in a range from 0 to 31
16
<requested dump>=1 + <requested dump>=2 + <requested dump>=4 + Neighbor1 to
Neighbor6 Timing Advance (only available for mode=0) Neighbor1 to Neighbor6 Timing
Advance are only available in Idle Mode.
<CsqStep> Indicates the step required for RSSI indications between 2 + CSQ unsolicited response.
The range of this step is [1,5]. Default value: 1. If this field is not indicated, the previous value is used.
Notes:
• The response for the requested dump 1, 2, and 4 will be:
+CCED:<value>, … , <value n>
OK
Where <value> is the ASCII string of the values (in decimal form except the LAC and CI values
which are in hexadecimal form) of the parameters. If a field cannot be measured – or is
meaningless – the parameter is not filled in and two consecutive commas are sent.
• The response for the requested dump 8 will be a +CSQ response and not a +CCED. The 7.07
format for +CSQ is respected. The <ber> is not evaluated by this command, so the <ber> value
will always be 99.
+CSQ:<rssi>, 99
OK
When automatic shots are selected, this +CSQ response is sent every time the <rssi> measured
by the product is equal or greater than the value <CsqStep>. So the <rssi> level between 2
successive +CSQ responses is equal or greater than <CsqStep>. Automatic shots are supported
in idle mode and during communication. The activation or deactivation of this flow (8) does not
affect the other flows.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
107
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
• Combination of the requested dump is supported (addition of the values 1, 2, 4, and 8):
Value Requested Dump
1
+CCED response: Main Cell only
2
+CCED response: Neighbors 1 to 6
3
+CCED response: Main Cell; then Neighbors 1
to 6
+CCED response: Timing Advance Only
4
5
6
7
8
+CCED response: Main Cell; then Timing
Advance
+CCED response: Neighbors 1 to 6; then
Timing Advance
+CCED response: Main Cell; then Neighbors 1
to 2, then Timing Advance
+CSQ response: Main Cell RSSI indications
Value Requested Dump
9
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with
Main Cell only
10
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with
Neighbors 1 to 6
11
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with
Main Cell; then Neighbors 1 to 6
12
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with
Timing Advance Only
13
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with
Main Cell; then Timing Advance
14
+CSQ response; then +CCED response with
Neighbors 1 to 6; then Timing Advance
15
+CSQ response; then +CCED response: Main
Cell, then Neighbors 1 to 6, then Timing Advance
16 +CCED response: Main Cell, then Neighbors 1 to
6, then Main Cell Timing Advance, then
Neighbor1 to Neighbor6 Timing Advance
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------No Last value used for CCED request or 15
value
• If requested dump parameter is not provided, one of the last +CCED commands sill be used (or 15 by default) will
be used.
• Values of MCC/MNC are set to 0 in the case of “No service”.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CCED=<mode>[, <requested dump>]
Command
Possible responses
AT+CCED=0
Note: Last request was AT_CCED=0,3 (main cell
and neighbors 1 to 6): you can see MCC,MNC
sequences (here 208,20)
+CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,24,,,0,,,0,208,20,0006,98
9b,37,835,20,208,,20,0002,02a9,37,831,12,208,20,0101,79
66,34,818,508,20,0006,9899,39,713,9,208,20,0002,0a72,3
3,711,12,208,20,0101,03fb,36,824,10,1
OK
+CCED:208,20,0002,0418,37,706,25,,,0,,,0
OK
+CCED:208,10,189C,,19,85,,31,32,,0,0
OK
AT+CCED=0,1
Note: Only Main Cell request
AT+CCED=0,1
Note: Call in progress: RxLev and RxQual are
empty, RxLevFull, RxLevSub, RxQualFull, and
RxQualSub have data
AT+CCED=1,8,1
AT+CCED=0,16
Note: idle mode
AT+CCED=0,16
Note: dedicated mode
AT+CCED=1,16
OK
+CSQ: 12,99
+CSQ: 13,99
+CCED:
208,20,0006,0418,54,789,,,,255,,,0,208,20,0,0006,57,1018,
20,208,01,7500,6497,17,55,17,208,10,54c4,f0ed,31,700,9,
208,20,0006,7d9a,50,1023,8,208,20,0002,9a29,48,1015,7,
1,1,1,2,1,2
OK
Note: 1,1,1,2,1,2 correspond to the Main Cell Timing
Advance and 5 Neighbors Timing Advance
+CCED:
208,20,0006,0418,54,789,,19,19,0,0,,,,,,41,801,6,,,,,57,101
8,20,,,,,48,1015,10,,,,,57,1006,4,,,,,50,1023,7,,,,,57,814,3,1,
,,,,,
OK
Note: Neighbors Timing Advances are not available in
dedicated mode
+CME ERROR: 3
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
108
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
General Indications +WIND
Description:
This command provides a general mechanism to send unsolicited non-standardized indications to the
application. The indicators are:
• Indication of a physical change on the SIM detect pin from the connector (meaning SIM inserted,
SIM removed)
• Indication during mobile originated call setup that the calling party is ringing.
• Indication of the availability of the product to receive AT commands after boot.
• NITZ indication (Network Information and Time Zone)
For each of these indications, a “bit flow” has to be indicated.
Values:
<IndLevel>
0
1 (bit-0)
2 (bit-1)
4 (bit-2)
No unsolicited “+WIND: <IndNb>” will occur. Default.
Hardware SIM Insert/Remove indications or SIM presence after software reset.
Calling party alert indication.
Product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS), but
still in emergency mode.
8 (bit-3)
The product is ready to process all AT commands at the end of init or after
swapping to ADN in case of FDN configuration
16 (bit-4)
A new call identifier has been created (after an ATD command, +CCWA indication)
32 (bit-5)
An active, held or waiting call has been released by network or other party
64 (bit-6)
Network service available indication
128 (bit-7)
Network lost indication
256 (bit-8)
Audio ON indication
512 (bit-9)
SIM phonebooks reload status
1024 (bit-10) SIM phonebooks checksum indication
2048 (bit-11) Interruption indication (only if FTR_INT is activated)
4096 (bit-12) Hardware rack open/closed indication
8192 (bit-13) NITZ indication
16384 (bit-14) SMS service ready indication
Combination (addition of the values) is used to allow more than one indication flow: 0 ≤ IndLevel ≤
32767
<event>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7:
8
9
10
11
12
13
•
To activate a specific WIND indication, <IndLevel> must have a value described above.
AT+WIND=16384 only activates SMS service indication.
•
To activate several WIND indications, <IndLevel> must have a value just before the last
indication required.
AT+WIND=32767 all unsolicited indications.
The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM removed”
The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM inserted”
Calling party is alerting
Product is ready to process AT commands (except phonebooks, AOC, SMS), at init or after
AT+CFUN=1
Product is ready to process all AT commands, end of phonebook init or swap (FDN to ADN)
Call <idx> has been created (after ATD or +CCWA…)
Call <idx> has been released, after a NO CARRIER, a +CSSU: 5 indication, or after the
release of a call waiting.
The network service is available for an emergency call.
The network is lost.
Audio ON.
Show reload status of each SIM phonebook after init phase (after Power-ON or SIM
insertion).
Show the checksum of SIM phonebooks after loading.
An interruption has occurred.
The rack has been detected as Closed.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
109
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
14
15
16
The rack has been detected as Open.
The modem received a NITZ information message from the network.
SMS and SMS CB services are ready.
For Event 10:
<phonebook>: SIM phonebook
"SM”
“FD”
“ON”
“SN”
“EN”
<status>:
0 Not Reloaded from SIM (no change since last init or SIM remove)
1 Reloaded from SIM to internal memory (at least one entry has changed)
For Event 11:
<checksum>: 128-bit “fingerprint” of the phonebook.
Note: If the service of the phonebook is not loaded or not present, the checksum is not displayed and
two commas without checksum are displayed (,,).
For Event 15:
<Full name>: String. Updated long name for current network.
<Short name>: String. updated short name for current network.
<Local time zone>: Signed integer. Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an
hour, between the local time and GMT.
<Universal time and local time zone>: String, Universal Time and Time Zone, in format
"yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss±zzz" (Year/Month/Day,Hour:Min:Seconds± Time Zone).
The Time Zone indicates the difference, expressed in quarters of an hour,
between the local time and GMT.
<LSA Identity>:
Hexa string. LSA identity of the current cell in hexa format (3 bytes).
<Daylight Saving Time>: Integer (0-2). When the LTZ is compensated for DST (Daylight Saving Time
or summertime), the serving PLMN shall provide a DST parameter to indicate it.
The adjustment for DST can be + 1h or +2h.
Note: For the NITZ indication, all the fields indicated here are optional. That is why there is an index
related to each of the following:
• 1: Full name for network
• 2: Short name for network
• 3: Local time zone
• 4: Universal time and local time zone
• 5: LSA identity
• 6: Network Daylight Saving Time
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WIND= <IndLevel >
Command
AT+WIND?
AT+WIND=255
Note: The SIM has been removed.
Note: The SIM has been inserted.
Note: The network service is available
for an emergency call
Note: The initialization has been
completed
Note: The modem received a NITZ
information message
Possible Responses
+WIND: 0
OK
OK
+WIND: 0
Note :The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM
removed”
+WIND: 1
Note :The SIM presence pin has been detected as “SIM
inserted”
+WIND: 7
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 15,1,"Cingular Extended",2,"Cingular",3,"+08",
4,"03/14/27,16:59:48+08",5,"123456",6,"2"
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
110
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Additional Notes:
• The AT+WIND? command is supported and indicates the <allowed bit flows>.
• AT+WIND settings are automatically stored in non volatile memory (EEPROM). This means the &W
command does not need to be used and the selected flows are always activated after boot.
• Default value is 0: no flow activated, no indication.
• AT+WIND=? gives the possible value range (0-4095)
• The unsolicited response will then be:
+WIND: <event> [,<idx>]
<idx>: Call identifier, defined in +CLCC command.
• Or for event 10:
+WIND: <event>,<phonebook>,<status>,…,<phonebook>,<status>
• Or for event 11:
+WIND: <event>,[“<checksum of SM>”],[“<checksum of FD>”],[“<checksum of
ON>”],[“<checksum of SN>”] ,[“<checksum of EN>”],[“<checksum of LD>”]
• Or for event 15 (NITZ indication):
+WIND: <event>[,1,"Full name>"][,2,"<Short name>"][,3,"<Local time zone>"][,4,"<Universal
time and local time zone>"][,5,"<LSA identity>"][,6,"<Daylight Saving Time>"]
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC
Description:
This command gets the (DC level * 1024) of ADC A and ADC B, and possibly ADC C. These voltages
are coded on 10 bits.
Values:
<n>
0 Select 2 converters
1 Select 3 converters
<ADCValA>
ADC A value, coded on 10 bits. The value returned includes the resistor bridge. Values are updated
every 10 seconds. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.
<ADCValB>
ADC B value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on modes 0 and 1.
<ADCValC>
ADC C value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on mode 1 only.
<ADCValD>
ADC D value, coded on 10 bits. Displayed on mode 1 only.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+ADC<n>
Response syntax: +ADC: <ADCValA>,<ADCValB>[,<ADCValC>][,<ADCValD>]
Command
AT+ADC=?
Note: Ask for the list of possible values
AT+ADC=0
Note: Select 2 converters (mode 0)
AT+ADC?
Note: Ask for the current values of
converters in mode 0
AT+ADC=1
Note: Select extended mode (mode 1)
Possible responses
+ADC: (0-1)
Note: possible values 0 or 1
OK
Note: 2 converters mode selected
+ADC: 500,412
OK
Note: ADC A, ADC B on 10 bits
OK
Note: Extended mode selected
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
111
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER
Description:
This command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes in the case of a key press.
Values:
<keyp> (keypad)
0 No keypad event reporting.
1 Keypad event reports are routed using unsolicited code: +CKEV: <key>, <press> only those
key pressings, which are not caused by +CKPD are indicated.
2 Keypad event reports are routed using unsolicited code: +CKEV: <key>, <press> all key
pressings are indicated.
Note: As AT software does not manage the emulation of key press, the values 1 and 2 lead to the
same results.
<ind>
0 No indicator event reporting
1 Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. Only the indicator events not caused by
+CIND shall be indicated by the TA to the TE.
2 Indicator event reporting using unsolicited result code. All indicator events shall be directed
from TA to TE (DTE).
<key> Keyboard map is (5,5)
0
5
10
15
20
1
6
11
16
21
2
7
12
17
22
3
8
13
18
23
4
9
14
19
24
<press>
1 key press
0 key release
<indresp> Indicator order number (as specified for +CIND)
<value> New value of the indicator
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
AT+CMER=<mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
Response Syntax: +CKEV: <key>, <press> (key press event report)
Response Syntax: +CIEV: <indresp>, <value> (indicator event report)
Command
AT+CMER=1
Note: Ask for key press event report
AT+CMER?
Possible responses
OK
+CKEV:12,1
+CKEV:12,0
Note: Key 12 has been pressed and released
+CMER: 3,1,0,0,0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
112
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Read Language Preference +WLPR
Description:
Read a Language Preference value of EF-LP. The first indices should have the highest priority.
Values:
<index> Offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)
<value> Values for language. See Recommendation 3GPP TS 23.038. Language example:
<value>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
32
33
34
35
36
Syntax:
Language
German
English
Italian
French
Spanish
Dutch
Swedish
Danish
Portuguese
Finnish
Norwegian
Greek
Turkish
Hungarian
Polish
Czech
Hebrew
Arabic
Russian
Icelandic
Command syntax: AT+WLPR= <index >
Response syntax: +WLPR: <value>
Command
AT+WLPR?
Note: Read command
AT+WLPR=1
Note: Read first EF-LP index value
Possible responses
+WLPR: 4
OK
Note: Four language preferences are available in EF-LP
+WLPR: 5
OK
Note: Language preference is 5
Write Language Preference +WLPW
Description:
Values:
Write a Language Preference value in EF-LP.
<index> Offset in the available languages range (SIM dependent)
<value> See <values> examples above (Read Language Preference +WLPR)
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WLPW=<index >,<value>
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>
Command
Possible responses
AT+WLPW=1,5
OK
Note: Write Lang Pref equal to 5 in EF-LP with index 1 Note: EF-LP correctly updated
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
113
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Read GPIO Value +WIOR
Description:
Read the requested GPI or GPIO pin value.
Notes:
• By default (e.g., after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM command.
• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application or
for bus operations.
• When the BT chip is switched on, the GPIO5 is not available anymore.
Values:
<index>
Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.
<value>
0 I/O port number <index> is reset.
1 I/O port number <index> is set.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WIOR=<index>
Response syntax: +WIOR: <value>
Command
AT+WIOR=0
Read I/O (number 0) value
Possible responses
+WIOR: 0
OK
GPIO number 0 is reset
Write GPIO Value +WIOW
Description:
Set the requested GPO or GPIO pin value.
Notes:
• By default (e.g., after a reset), the I/O ports configuration is set by the +WIOM command.
• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by an Open-AT embedded application or
for bus operations.
• When the BT chip is switched on, the GPIO5 is not available anymore. It is not possible to
change the state of the GPIO using this command.
Values:
<index>
Up to ten I/O ports are available. The <index> value is between 0 and 9.
<value>
0 I/O port number <index> is reset.
1 I/O port number <index> is set.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WIOW=<index >,<value>
Command
AT+WIOW=2,0
Reset I/O (number 2)
Possible responses
OK
GPIO value is written
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
114
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Input/Output Management +WIOM
Description:
This command sets the default GPIO’s configuration (input or output) after reset, and each GPIO default
value (if set as an output) after reset.
Notes:
• This command is allowed only on a GPIO not allocated by the Open-AT embedded application or
for bus operations.
• When UART is activated, GPIOs 0 and 5, GPO2 and GPI are not available anymore. When you
try to do writable or readable operations on these I/O, CME ERROR: 3 will be returned. This
applies for modems running AT X50 software and supporting the multi-UART feature.
• When the BT chip is switched on, the GPIO5 is not available anymore. It is not possible to
change the state of the GPIO using this command.
Values:
<GpioDir> Bit table parameter indicating each GPIO direction.
0 Input
1 Output. Default.
Default value: 2047 (all GPIOs set as outputs).
<GpioVal> Bit table parameter indicating each output-configured GPIO value (each bit gives the
corresponding GPIO default value).
0
Reset. Default.
1 Set
The GPIOs set as inputs by the <GpioDir> parameter are not affected by the value set by the
<GpioVal> parameter.
Notes:
• <GpioDir> bit values for GPI and GPO are ignored.
• <GpioVal> bit values for GPI are ignored.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WIOM=[<GpioDir>],[<GpioVal>]
Command
AT+WIOM?
AT+WIOM=?
AT+WIOM=254
Set GPIO 0 as an input, and all others as outputs
AT+WIOM=,128
Set GPIO 3; default output value to 1
AT+WIOM=,128
Note: Set GPIO 8 or GPIO12 or GPIO7; default
output value to 1
Possible responses
+WIOM: 2047,0
OK
On reset, all GPIOs are set to 0, as an output
+WIOM: (0-2047),(0-2047)
OK
Range allowed for the parameters.
OK
OK
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
115
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Abort Command +WAC
Description:
This command allows SMS, SS and PLMN selection related commands to be aborted.
Values:
No parameters
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WAC
Command Syntax
AT+WAC
AT+WAC=?
AT+WAC?
Return
OK
OK
Example 1
Command
AT+COPS=?
Note: Available PLMN
AT+WAC
Note: Abort the request of PLMN list
Possible responses
OK
Note: PLMN list request aborted
Example 2
Command
Possible responses
AT+CCFC=0,2
Note: Query status of Call Forwarding service
AT+WAC
CME ERROR: 551
Note: Abort the request of the query of the
Note: Query of Call Forwarding service request failed
Call Forwarding service
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
116
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Play Tone +WTONE
Description:
Values:
This command allows a tone to be played on the current speaker or on the buzzer. Frequency, gain and
duration can be set.
<mode>
0 Stop playing.
1 Play a tone
<dest> Sets the destination (mandatory if <mode>=1)
1 Speaker
2 Buzzer
<freq> Sets tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if <mode>=1).
nd
<freq2> Sets the 2 tone frequency (in Hz) (mandatory if <mode>=1). Available with speaker only.
If <dest>=1 speaker:
Range is 1 Hz to 3999 Hz
If <dest>=2 buzzer:
Range is between 1 Hz and 50000 Hz.
<gain> Sets the tone gain for the <freq>. The default is 9.
<gain2> Sets the tone gain for the <freq2>. The default is 9.
Range of values is 0 to 15
<gain>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Speaker (db)
0
-0.5
-1
-1.5
-2
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-36
-42
-infinite
Buzzer (db)
-0.25
-0.5
-1
-1.5
-2
-3
-6
-9
-12
-15
-18
-24
-30
-40
-infinite
-infinite
<duration> Sets tone duration (unit of 100 ms).
Range is 0 to 50. Default 0. 1 -> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)
When this <duration>=0, the duration is infinite, and the tone can be stopped by
AT+WTONE=0.
Note: The frequency <freq2> and gain <gain2> are allowed for the speaker only.
Caution: Hardware can only generate the following frequencies:
Freq = (13 000 000 / (N * 64))
N: Integer value in the recommended range 1 to 2048.
With N=1, the frequency 203 125 Hz is generated.
With N=2048, the frequency 99.18 Hz is generated.
Some noise problems have been detected if the frequency is below 100 Hz.
The lowest frequency possible is 12 Hz.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WTONE=<mode>[,<dest>,<freq>,<gain>,<duration>[,<freq2>,[gain2>]]]]]
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>
Command
Possible responses
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50
OK
Note: Play a tone
Note: Done
AT+WTONE=0
OK
Note: Stop playing
Note: Done
AT+WTONE=?
OK
Note: Test command
Note: Done
AT+WTONE?
ERROR
Note: Current value
AT+WTONE=1,1,300,9,50,600,9
OK
Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies (allowed with speaker only) Note: Done
AT+WTONE=1,2,300,9,50,600,9
+CME ERROR: 3 (Note: Dual
Note: Play a tone with 2 frequencies with the buzzer
frequency for speaker only)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
117
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF
Description:
This command allows a DTMF tone to be played on the current speaker. DTMF, gain, and duration can
be set.
Note: This command is only used to play a DTMF tone. To send a DTMF over the GSM network, use
the +VTS command.
Values:
<mode>
0 Stop playing.
1 Play a DTMF tone
<dtmf> Sets the DTMF to play in (mandatory if <mode>=1).
Value must be in {0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D}
<gain> (0-15) Sets tone gain. The values are identical to those of the +WTONE (speaker) command.
Range is 0 to 15 (see array on previous page). By default, the value is 9.
<duration> (0-50) Sets the tone duration (unit of 100 ms).
Range 0 to 50. Default 0 (1-> 0,1 s., 50 -> 5 s.)
When this parameter is 0 (default value), the duration is infinite, and the DTMF tone
can be stopped by AT+WDTMF=0.
Command syntax: AT+WDTMF=<mode>[,<dtmf>,<gain>,<duration>]
Response syntax: OK or +CME ERROR: <err>
Command
Possible responses
AT+WDTMF=1,"*",9,50
OK
Note: Play a DTMF tone
Note: Done
AT+WDTMF=0
OK
Note: Stop playing
Note: Done
AT+WDTMF=?
+WDTMF: (0-1),(0-9,*,#,A,B,C,D),(0-15),(0-50)
Note: Test command
OK
Note: Done
AT+WDTMF?
ERROR
Note: Current value
Syntax:
Downloading +WDWL
Description:
This command switches the product to download mode.
AT+WDWL allows the download process to launch on UART1 only.
Downloading is performed using the 1K-XMODEM protocol.
Important Note: Software damages may occur if power is lost or if a hardware reset occurs during the
downloading phase. This would seriously affect the modem.
Values:
No parameters
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WDWL
Command
AT+WDWL
Note: Switch on downloading mode
AT+WDWL?
Possible responses
+WDWL: 0
Note: Start the downloading
…
Note: Downloading in progress
AT+CFUN=1
Note: Reset the product at the end
OK
Note: Reset completed. New software running
+WDWL: VO2.12
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
118
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Voice Rate +WVR
Description:
This command allows the voice rate for bearer voice to be configured for outgoing and incoming calls.
Note: According to the modem’s capabilities, the following voice coding type are allowed:
• Modem that supports AMR: FR, EFR, AMR-FR, AMR-HR are supported.
• Modem that does not support AMR: FR, EFR, HR are supported.
Values:
Voice coding type.
Voice Coding
Type
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Preferred Other Supported Types
Type
FR
EFR
HR
FR
HR
EFR
AMR-FR
AMR-FR
AMR-HR
AMR-HR
AMR-HR
AMR-HR
AMR-FR
AMR-FR
AMR-FR
EFR
Default Values
Default incoming voice calls rate
FR
FR
HR
EFR
HR, FR
EFR, AMR-HR, FR
EFR, AMR-HR, HR, FR
HR, AMR-FR, EFR, FR
AMR-FR, EFR, FR
AMR-FR, FR
HR, AMR-FR, FR
AMR-HR, FR
FR, AMR-HR
FR, AMR-HR, HR
FR, HR
Default outgoing voice calls rate
Command syntax: AT+WVR=
AT+WVR=
AT+WVR?
<out_coding_type>[,<in-coding_type>]
[<out_coding_type>],<in-coding_type>
+WDR: <out_coding_type>,<in-coding_type>
OK
Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls; <in-coding_type> to incoming calls.
Command
AT+WVR=1
Note: Configure voice type FR and EFR
for outgoing calls only
AT+WVR=1,4
Note: Configure voice type FR and EFR
for outgoing calls and HR and EFR for
incoming calls
AT+WVR=,4
Note: Configure voice type HR and
EFR for incoming calls
AT+WVR=6
Note: Syntax error
AT+WVR?
Note: Ask for the current values
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
AT+WVR=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls
OK
Note: Bearer is configured for outgoing calls and
incoming calls
OK
Note: Bearer is unchanged for outgoing calls and
configured for incoming calls
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
+WVR: 1,1
OK
+WVR: (0,2,3),(0,2,3)
Note: If Half Rate is available
+WVR: (0,1),(0,1)
Note: If EFR available.
+WVR: (0),(0)
Note: If neither HR nor EFR is available
+WVR: (0-5,15),(0-5,15)
Note: If HR and EFR are available
+WVR:
(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14),(0,2,3,10,11,12,13,14)
Note: If Half Rate and AMR are available
+WVR: (0,1,6,9,10,11,12,13),(0,1,6,9,10,11,12,13)
Note: If EFR and AMR are available
+WVR: (0,10,12,13),(0,10,12,13)
Note: If AMR is available
+WVR: (0-15),(0-15)
Note: If HR,EFR, and AMR are available
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
119
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Data Rate +WDR
Description:
This command allows the data rate for bearer data to be configured for outgoing and incoming calls.
Values:
<out_coding_type>: Data Coding Type for Outgoing Calls.
Data Coding
Type
0
1
2
3
Preferred Other Supported Types
Type
FR
HR
FR
FR
Default Values
Default incoming voice calls rate
FR
HR
HR
<in_coding_type>: Data Coding Type for Incoming Calls.
Data Coding
Type
Type
Default Values
0
1
HR
FR
Default incoming data calls rate
Command syntax: AT+WDR= <out_coding_type>[,<in-coding_type>]
AT+WDR= [<out_coding_type>],<in-coding_type>
AT+WDR? +WDR: <out_coding_type>[,<in-coding_type>
Note: <out_coding_type> is related to outgoing calls, and <in_coding_type to incoming calls.
Command
AT+WDR=?
AT+WDR=?
AT+WDR=1
Note: Configure data type FR, HR with HR
preferred for outgoing calls
(<in_coding_type> parameter is omitted)
AT+WDR=1
Note: Configure data type FR for incoming
calls (<out_coding_type> parameter is
omitted)
AT+WDR=3
Note: Illegal value
AT+WVR?
Note: Ask for the current values
Possible responses
+WDR: (0-2),(0-2)
Note: If Half Rate is available in both directions
+WDR: (0),(1)
OK
Note: If Half Rate is not available.
OK
Note: Bearer is configured
OK
Note: Bearer is configured
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
+WVR: 1,1
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
120
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Select Voice Gain +WSVG
Description:
The product has 2 voice gain controllers. This specific command selects the microphone gain
controller.
Values:
<n> Controller
0 Controller 1 (Default)
1 Controller 2
Command syntax: AT+WSVG = <n>
Syntax:
Command
AT+WSVG=<n>
AT+WSVG=0
Note: Select Controller 1 (Default)
AT+WSVG=1
Note: Select Controller 2 (Default)
AT+WSVG=?
Note: Get the list of possible values
AT+WSVG?
Note: Get the current value
Possible responses
OK
Note: Controller 1 selected
OK
Note: Controller 2 selected
+WSVG: (0-1)
Note: possible values 0 or 1
+WSVG: 1
Note: Controller 1 is selected
Status Request +WSTR
Description:
This command returns some operation status. It can be used to check the state of the initialization
sequence; the different values returned are Not started, Ongoing, Finished.
Values:
<status>
1 Initialization sequence
<value>
0 Not started
1 On going
2 Finished
2 Network status
<value>
0 No network
1 Network available
Syntax;
Command syntax: AT+WSTR=<status>
Response syntax: +WSTR: <status>,<value>
Command
AT+WSTR=<status>
AT+WSTR=1
Note: Select the status 1 (INIT SEQUENCE)
Possible responses
+WSTR:<status>,<value>
+WSTR: 1,2
OK
Note: Init finished
AT+WSTR=2
+WSTR: 2,1
Note: Select the status 2 (NETWORK STATUS) OK
Note: The network is available
AT+WSTR=?
+WSTR: (1-2)
Note: Ask the list of possible values
Note: possible values: 1, 2
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
121
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Scan +WSCAN
Description:
This command displays the received signal strength indication (<rssi>) for a specified frequency (in
absolute format). This command is not allowed during communication.
Values:
<absolute frequency> frequency in absolute format <rssi>
0
-113 dBm or less
1
-111 dBm
2...30 -109 to -53 dBm
31
-51dBm or greater
99
not known or not detectable
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WSCAN=<absolute frequency>
Response syntax: +WSCAN: <rssi>
Command
AT+WSCAN=50
Note: Request <rssi> of absolute frequency 50
AT+WSCAN=1025
Note: Request power of absolute frequency 1025
Possible responses
+WSCAN: 23
OK
Note: <rssi> is 23.
CME ERROR: 3
Note: 1025 is not a valid absolute frequency
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM
Description:
This command sets or returns the state of the Ring Indicator Mode.
• In up-down RI mode, no pulses are sent before unsolicited AT response, and up-down signals
are sent when receiving an incoming call.
• In pulse RI mode, an electrical pulse is sent on the Ring Indicator signal just before sending any
unsolicited AT response in order not to lose AT responses when client tasks are in sleep state.
Still in RI mode, when receiving incoming calls, electrical pulses are sent on the RI signal.
• Pulse RI Mode + Pulse On Packet Downloaded: based on Pulse RI mode but an electrical pulse
is also sent on the Ring Indicator signal just before sending a downloaded data packet (GPRS or
CSD) if the remote client has dropped down his RTS signal.
Values:
<mode>
0 Up-down RI mode
1 Pulse RI mode
2 Pulse RI mode + Pulse on Downloaded Packet
<n> used only in mode RI Pulse + Pulse on Downloaded Packet (<mode>=2).
0 Duration of pulse is 5 μs
1-31 Duration of pulse is n x 30 μs
Important: Pulse duration may be increased by up to 3 ms, due to interrupt processes
overhead.
Note: Remind that this mode corresponds to the case where the remote equipment has dropped its
RTS signal to stop its flow control.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WRIM=<n>
Command
AT+WRIM=0
Note: Select up-down RI mode
AT+WRIM=1
Note: Select pulse RI mode
AT+WRIM=2,0
Note: Select mode pulse RI on downloaded packet,
pulse duration is 5 μs
AT+WRIM=?
Note: Ask the list of possible values
AT+WRIM?
Note: Ask the current value
Possible responses
OK
Note: up-down RI mode selected
OK
Note: pulse RI mode selected
OK
Note: mode pulse RI + Pulse on
downloaded packet selected
+WRIM: (0-2),(0-33)
OK
Note: possible values 0, 1 or 2
+WRIM: 1
OK
Note: current RI mode is pulse RI
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
122
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K
Description:
This command allows the 32kHz power down mode to be enabled or disabled:
• When power down mode is entered, the product uses a 32kHz internal clock during inactivity
stages (regardless of its nominal internal clock).
Values:
• When enabled, power down mode is active after 1 to 15 minutes. The mode is not stored in
EEPROM: the command has to be repeated after a reset.
<mode>
0 Disable 32kHz power down mode
1 Enable 32kHz power down mode
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+W32K=<mode>
Command
AT+W32K=1
Note: Enable 32kHz power down mode
AT+W32K=0
Note: Disable 32kHz power down mode
Possible responses
OK
Note: 32kHz power down mode is enabled
OK
Note: 32kHz power down mode is disabled
Change Default Melody +WCDM
Description:
This command allows a the selection of a manufacturer-specific melody. This default melody will be
played for any new incoming voice call, either on the buzzer or on the speaker.
Values:
<melody>
0
1…10
<player>
0
1
Syntax:
No melody (default)
Melody 1 to 10
Melody n <melody> will be played on the buzzer for any new incoming voice call. Default.
Melody n <melody> will be played on the speaker for any new incoming voice call.
Command syntax: AT+WCDM=<melody>,<player>
Command
AT+WCDM=0
Note: Select no melody
AT+WCDM=5
Note: Select melody n5
AT+WCDM?
Note: Indicate the current melody
AT+WCDM=,1
Note: Select the speaker to play the
melody on.
AT+WCDM?
Possible responses
OK
OK
+WCDM: 5,0
OK
Note: Melody n5 is currently selected, and the buzzer is
selected to play it.
RING
Note: An incoming call occurs, and the melody n°5 is played
on the buzzer.
OK
+WCDM: 5,1
OK
Note: Now the speaker is selected to play the melody if an
incoming call occurs.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
123
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Custom Character Set +WCCS
Description:
This command allows you to edit and display the custom character set tables. These tables are used by
the “CUSTOM” mode of +CSCS and the +WPCS commands. In this CUSTOM mode, when you enter a
string, it is converted into the GSM alphabet using the Custom To GSM table. In a similar way, when the
user requests a string display, the string is converted from the GSM alphabet using the Custom
alphabet and Custom alphabet extension tables.
In edition mode, the session is terminated by <ctrl-Z> or aborted by <ESC>. Only hexadecimal
characters (‘0’…’9’, ‘A’…’F’) can be used. The number of characters entered must equal the edition
range requested; otherwise, the command will return “+CME ERROR: 24”.
The default Customer alphabet extension table contains the following extended characters:
|
^
ε
{
}
[
]
~
\
Values:
<mode>
0 Display the table
1 Edit the table
<table>
0 Custom to GSM conversion table (default table is PCCP437 to GSM table)
1 Custom alphabet table (default table is GSM 7 bit default alphabet)
2 Custom alphabet extension table (default table is GSM 7 bit default alphabet extended)
<char 1>, <char 2>
Character range to display/edit
0…127 for table 1 and 2
0…255 for Custom to GSM conversion table
Notes:
• <char1> and <char2> are not ASCII codes; they stand for the range of a given character in
the tables.
• If only <char 1> is provided, only this char is displayed/edited
• See Appendix C for informative examples of the use of these characters.
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WCCS=<mode>,<table>,<char 1>[,<char 2>]
Command
AT+WCCS=0,0,120,130
Note: Display from character 120 to character 130 of the
Custom to GSM conversion table
AT+WCCS=1,0,115<CR>
20<ctrl-Z>
Note: Edit character 115 of the Custom to GSM conversion
table
AT+WCCS=1,1,0,4<CR>
40A324A5E8<ctrl-Z>
Note: Edit the 5 first characters of the GSM to Custom
conversion table
AT+WCCS=0,2,20<CR>
Note: Display character 20 of the Custom alphabet extension
table
AT+WCCS=1,1,200
Note: Edit character 200 of GSM to Custom conversion table
Possible responses
+WCCS: 11,
78797A2020202020097E05
OK
Note: 11 characters displayed
OK
Note: Edition successful
OK
Note: Edition successful
+WCCS: 1,5E
OK
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Index out of range
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
124
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Lock +WLCK
Description:
This command allows the modem to be locked on a specific network operator.
Note: Test SIM cards (with MCC=001 & MNC=01) doesn’t check these locks.
Values:
<fac>
“PS”
“PN”
“PU”
“PP”
“PC”
<psswd>
<NetId>
SIM lock facility with a 8 digits password (PCK).
Network lock with a 8 digits password (NCK).
Network subset lock with a 8 digits password (NSCK).
Service provider lock with a 8 digits password (SPCK).
Corporate lock with a 8 digits password (CCK).
password code, 8 digits
IMSI for SIM lock (<fac>)=”PS”), operator in numeric format (MCC and MNC) for other
locks (other <fac> values).
<GID1>
Group Identifier level 1, mandatory for Service provider lock (<fac>)=”PP”) and for
Corporate lock (<fac>="PC").
<GID2>
Group Identifier level 2, mandatory for Corporate lock (<fac>="PC").
<CnlType> Type of lock for co-operative network list (CNL)
0
Automatic (co-operative network list retrieved from EFCNL SIM file)
Note: EFCNL file must be present in SIM to use automatic mode.
1
Manual (co-operative network list is given in the <CnlData> parameter)
<CnlData> Co-operative network list (hexa string type) using same format as in EFCNL SIM file (ETSI
GSM 11.11 or 3GPP 04.08).
Note: Only if <CnlType> = 1
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WLCK=<fac>,<passwd>,<NetId>[,<GID1>[,GID2]] [,<CnlType>[,<CnlData>]]
Response syntax: +WLCK: <status>
Command
AT+WLCK="PN",12345678,20810
Note: Activate network lock on SFR (208,10)
AT+WLCK="PS",12345678,20810592356897
4
Note: Activate SIM lock
AT+WLCK="PU",12345678,2081035
Note: Activate Network Subset lock on SFR
(208, 10, 35).
AT+WLCK="PU",12345678,20810
AT+WLCK=”PP”,12345678,20810,”E5”
Note: Activate Service Provider lock on SFR
(208, 10) and GID1 (0xE5).
AT+WLCK=”PC”,12345678,20810,”E5”,”10”
Note: Activate Corporate lock on SFR (208,
10), GID1 (0xE5) and GID2 (0x10).
AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20810,0
Note: Activate Network lock on SFR (208, 10)
using co-operative network list from SIM file
EFCNL (must be present in SIM)
AT+WLCK=”PN”,12345678,20801,1,”02F802
FFFFFF02F801FFFFFF”
Note: Activate Network lock on F ORANGE
(208, 01) with manual co-operative network
list including SFR (208, 10) and Bouygues
Telecom (208, 20)
Possible responses
OK
Note: Network lock activated
OK
Note: SIM lock activated
OK
Note: Network Subset lock activated
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Need 7 digits of IMSI to perform a service
provider lock
OK
Note: Service Provider lock activated.
OK
Note: Corporate lock activated.
OK
Note: Network lock activated on SFR and cooperative network list present in SIM
OK
Note: Network lock activated on F ORANGE
(primary network), SFR and Bouygues Telecom
(co-operative networks)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
125
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
CPHS Command +CPHS
Description:
This command is used to activate, deactivate or interrogate a CPHS feature (e.g., Voice Mail Indicator,
Mail Box Number…)
Note:
This command may answer +CME ERROR: 3 if the CPHS feature is disabled or if the
SIM card does not support this CPHS feature.
Values:
<mode>
0 Deactivate a CPHS feature
1 Activate a CPHS feature
2 Interrogate a CPHS status
Note: The deactivate or activate command has no effect on Alternate Line Service, Network
Operator Name, CPHS Information, and Customer Profile Service features.
<fctId>
1 Voice Mail Indicator
2 Mail Box Number
3 Alternate Line Service
4 Diverted Call Indicator
5 Network Operator Name
6 CPHS Information
7 Customer Service Profile
Note: The Customer Profile Service and Alternate Line Service features are activated if the
field is set in CPHS Information and CSP files. The Network Operator is activated if at least
one of the two format names exist (Long or Short format). This is done in initialization.
<precision> Used only if <mode>=2 and <fctId> = 5 to 7
if <fctId>=5, this field is <type format> (See +WNON)
if <fctId>=6, this field is <date field> (See +WCPI)
if <fctId>=7, this field is <service> (See +WCSP)
<Status>
0 CPHS feature disabled
1 CPHS feature enabled
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>[,<precision>]
Command
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
[,precision]
AT+CPHS=<Mode>,<FctId>
[,precision]
AT+CPHS?
AT+CPHS=?
Possible responses
OK
+CME ERROR: 3
+CPHS: <FctId1>,<Status><CR<LF>
+CPHS: <FctId2>,<Status><CR<LF>
…
+CPHS: <FctIdn>,<Status><CR<LF>
OK
OK
Examples:
AT+CPHS?
+CPHS: 1,0
+CPHS: 2,0
+CPHS: 3,1
+CPHS: 4,0
+CPHS: 5,1
+CPHS: 6,1
+CPHS: 7,1
OK
AT+CPHS=3,1
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
Voice mail indicator functionality is deactivated
Mail box number functionality is deactivated
Alternate Line Serve functionality is activated
Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated
Network Operator functionality is activated
CPHS Information functionality is activated
Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
Syntax error
+CME ERROR: 3
AT+CPHS=1,1
Activate the voice mail indicator functionality
OK
Examples continued on next page
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
126
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
AT+CPHS?
+CPHS: 1,1
+CPHS: 2,0
+CPHS: 3,1
+CPHS: 4,0
+CPHS: 5,1
+CPHS: 6,1
+CPHS: 7,1
OK
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
Voice mail indicator functionality is activated
Mail box number functionality is deactivated
Alternate Line Serve functionality is activated
Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated
Network Operator functionality is activated
CPHS Information functionality is activated
Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
**** the message box contains 1 message *****
+WVMI: 1,1
A message is waiting on Line 1
***** The message box contains a second message ***
+WVMI: 2,1
A message is waiting on Line 2
AT+CPHS=1,4
Activate Divert Call Indicator functionality
OK
****call forwarding is active on Line 1 *****
+WDCI: 1,1
AT+CPHS=2,1
+WVMI: 1,1
+WVMI: 2,1
+WVMI: 3,0
OK
AT+CPHS=1,2
Interrogate the status of voice mail indicator functionality
a message is waiting on LINE 1
a message is waiting on LINE 2
no data waiting
Activate the mail box number functionality
OK
AT+WALS=1
+WALS:2
OK
AT+CPHS=0,4
Interrogate the status of activated Line
Current line is number 2
Deactivate the Divet Call Indicator functionality
OK
AT+CPHS?
+CPHS: 1,1
+CPHS: 2,1
+CPHS: 3,1
+CPHS: 4,0
+CPHS: 5,1
+CPHS: 6,1
+CPHS: 7,1
OK
AT+CPHS=2,2
Interrogate the status of CPHS functionality
Voice mail indicator functionality is activated
The mail box number functionality is activated
Alternate Line Serve functionality is activated
Divert Call Indicator functionality is deactivated
Network Operator functionality is activated
CPHS Information functionality is activated
Customer Service Profile functionality is activated
Query current mail box numbers in SIM
+WMBN: 1,"19254871234",129,1 Mail box number for Line 1
+WMBN: 2,,,1
Mail box number for Line 2
+WMBN: 3,,,1
Mail box number for data Line
OK
Only Line1 can be updated
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
127
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Unsolicited Result: Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI
Description:
This unsolicited indication gives the status of the LINE 1, LINE 2, or Data mailbox. The +CPHS
command can be used to know the status of the voice mail indicator for each line.
Values:
<LineId>
1 Line 1
2 Line 2
3 Data
<Status>
0 No message waiting.
1 At least one message is waiting
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
+WVMI=<LineId>,<Status>
Response Syntax to AT+CPHS=2,1:
WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>
Command
AT+CPHS=1,1
Note: Activate Voice Mail Indicator feature
AT+CPHS=2,1
Note: Get the current status of Voice Mail
Indicator
AT+CPHS=2,1
Possible responses
OK
AT+CPHS=1,1
Note: Activation of Voice Mail Indicator feature
+WVMI: 1,1 a message is waiting on Line 1
+WVMI: 2,1 a message is waiting on Line 2
+WVMI: 3,0 no data waiting
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed
OK
Note: Voice Mail Indicator feature is activated
+WVMI: 1,1
Note: A message is waiting on Line 1
Unsolicited Result: Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI
Description:
This unsolicited indication provides the call forwarding flags. The +CPHS command can be used to
know the status of the Divert Call Indicator for each line.
Values:
<LineId>
1 Line 1
2 Line 2
3 Data
<flag>, <status>
0 Call forwarding is deactivated.
1 Call forwarding is activated.
Note: Call forwarding SS is set by the AT+CCFC command.
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
+WDCI: <LineId>,<Status>
Response Syntax to AT+CPHS: +WDCI: <LineId>,<flag>
Command
AT+CPHS=1,4
Note: Activate Divert Call Indicator feature
AT+CPHS=2,4
Note: Get the current status of Divert Call
Indicator
AT+CPHS=2,4
AT+CPHS=1,4
Note: Activation of Divert Call Indicator
feature
Possible responses
OK
+WDCI: 1,1 divert call indicator is active on Line 1
+WDCI: 2,1 divert call indicator is active on Line 2
+WDCI: 3,0 divert call indicator is deactivated on
data
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed
OK
Note: Divert Call Indicator feature is activated
+WDCI: 1,1
Note: Call forwarding is active on Line 1
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
128
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Network Operator Name +WNON
Description:
This indication provides the name of the network operator (as a character string). This command is the
response to the AT+CPHS 2,5 [,<type format>] command.
Values:
<type format>
0 Long format operator name
1 Short format operator name. Default.
<operator name> The name of the operator in long or short format
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
AT+CHPS=2,5[,<type format>]
Response Syntax: +WNON: <type format>,<operator name>
Command
AT+CPHS=2,5
Note: Get Operator Name
AT+CPHS=2,5,1
Note: Get short format Operator Name
AT+CPHS=2,5,0
AT+CPHS=2,5,1
AT+CPHS=0,5
Note: Deactivation of Network
Operator Name feature
Possible responses
+WNON: 0,”Orange F”
OK
+WNON: 1,”Orange”
OK
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed or format name is not
accessible
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed or format name is not
accessible
OK
Note: No effect
CPHS Information +WCPI
Description:
This indication provides CPHS information; i.e., which data fields are present in the SIM. This command
is the response to the AT+CPHS 2,6 [,<data field>] command.
Values:
<data field> value indicating the field of CPHS information
If <precision> field is omitted in the AT+CPHS command, all fields of CPHS Information will be
displayed.
<status>
0
data field is set
1
data field is unset
When all CPHS Information is requested, the status corresponds to a bit field. See Codes and
Values in the Appendix.
Note: The field CSP Service (<data field> = 1) is used to set the CSP feature at initialization.
Syntax:
Command Syntax:AT+CHPS=2,6[,<data field>]
Response Syntax: +WCPI: <data field>,<status>
`
Command
AT+CPHS=2,6
Note: Get current status for all CPHS Information fields
AT+CPHS=2,6,13
Note: Get the current status of Call Forward Activated
Indicator for Line 1
AT+CPHS=2,6,22
Note: Get current status for Line 2 Mailbox Number
AT+CPHS=2,6,17
AT+CPHS=2,6,22
Note: Get current status for Line 2 Mailbox Number
AT+CPHS=0,6
Note: Deactivation of CPHS Information feature
Possible responses
+WCPI: 0,”0033000F”
OK
+WCPI: 13,1
OK
Note: Call Forward is active for Line 1
+WCPI: 22,0
OK
Note: Mailbox Number for Line 2 is not
available
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Wrong data field
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: CPHS feature is not allowed
OK
Note: No effect
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
129
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Customer Service Profile +WCSP
Description:
This indication tells whether or not a service is accessible to the customer. This command is the
response to the AT+CPHS 2,7,<service>] command.
Values:
<service> value indicating the CSP field to display (See Codes and Values in the Appendix).
<status>
0 service is not customer-accessible
1 service is customer-accessible
Note: The field Alternate Line Service (CPHS Teleservices Group) sets the ALS feature at
initialization.
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
AT+CHPS=2,7,<service>
Response Syntax: +WCSP: <service>,<status>
Command
AT+WCSP=?
AT+WCSP?
AT+CPHS=2,7
Possible responses
ERROR
ERROR
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
AT+CPHS=2,7,9
+WCSP: 9,1
Note: Get current status of Barring All Outgoing Calls
OK
Note: Barring or All Outgoing Calls is
customer accessible
AT+CPHS=2,7,11
+WCSP: 11,1
Note: Get current status of Barring All Outgoing
OK
International Calls
Note: Barring or All International Outgoing
Calls is customer accessible
AT+CPHS=2,7,2
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Get current status of Call Forwarding on User Busy Note: CPHS feature is not allowed
AT+CPHS=0,7
OK
Note: Deactivation of CPHS Information
Note: No effect
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR
Description:
This command allow you to make a mirror copy of the current configuration parameters in the
EEPROM. In the case of a memory problem for the storage: if a customer mirror already exists, this one
will be restored. Otherwise, the default mirrored parameters are restored.
Warning: This command should be used only on special advice from a Technical Support person.
Values:
No parameters
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WMIR
Command
AT+WMIR=?
AT+WMIR
Note: Build the Customer Mirror
Possible responses
OK
OK
Change Default Player +WCDP
Description:
This command allows the default melody player to be selected.
Values:
<player>
0 Buzzer
1 Speaker
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WCDP = <player>
Command
AT+WCDP=?
AT+WCDP=0
Note: Select the buzzer
AT+WCDP?
Possible responses
+WCDP: (0-1)
OK
OK
+WCDP: 0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
130
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN
Description:
This command sets the different mailbox numbers in SIM. The +CPHS command can be used to know
which mailbox numbers can be updated.
Values:
<LineId>
1 Line 1
2 Line 2
3 Data
<number> Phone number in ASCII format
<type>
TON/NPI (Type of address byte in integer format)
<name>
name of mailbox
Notes:
• For the <name> parameter, all strings starting with “80”, “81”, or “82” are considered in
UCS2 format. See the Appendix G - Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2. If a
wrong UCS2 format is entered, the string is considered as an ASCII string.
• The AT command +WPCS affects the format of the Mailbox <name> entry.
<status>
When checked with “AT+CPHS=2,2”, it indicates if the number can be updated or not:
0
Update is not possible
1
Update is possible
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>
Response syntax to AT+CPHS=2,2: +WMBN = <LineId>,<number>,<type>,<name>,<status>
Command
AT+WMBN=?
AT+WMBN?
AT+CPHS=2,2
Note: Get the current Mail Box Numbers in SIM
AT+WMBN=1,”+33122334455”,145
Note: Set mailbox number for line.
AT+WMBN=2
Note: Erase mailbox number & name for line 2
AT+CPHS=2,2
Note: Get current Mail Box Numbers again
Possible responses
OK
OK
+WMBN: 1,"0123456789",129,”Maison” , 1
+WMBN: 2,”9876543210”,129,”Travail” , 1
+WMBN: 3,,,,1
+WMBN: 4,,,,1
OK
OK
Note: Mailbox number for Line 1 is set.
OK
+WMBN: 1,"+ 33122334455",145,1
+WMBN: 2,,,,1
+WMBN: 3,,,,1
+WMBN: 4,,,,1
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
131
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Alternate Line Service +WALS
Description:
This command allows you to set and to get the active line. The CPHS command can be used to know
which line is active.
Values:
<CmdType>
0 Set active line
1 Get active line
<Lineld> Used only for <CmdType>
1 Line 1
2 Line 2
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WALS = <CmdType>[,<Lineld>]
Response syntax to AT+CPHS=2,3: +WALS = <Lineld>
Command
AT+WALS?
AT+WALS=?
AT+WALS = 0,1
Note: Activate Line 1
AT+WALS = 0,2
Note: Activate Line 2
AT+WALS = 1
Note: Get the current Active Line
AT+WALS = 1,2
AT+CPHS=0,3
Note: Deactivation of ALS feature
AT+CPHS=2,3
Note: Interrogate ALS feature
Possible responses
+WALS: 1
OK
Note: Display current active line
+WALS: (0-1),(1-2)
OK
+WALS: 1
OK
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: When the ALS feature is not allowed
+WALS: 1
Note: Display the current Active Line
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Syntax error
OK
Note: No effect
+WALS: 1
Note: Display the current Active Line
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: In the case where the ALS feature is not allowed
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
132
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Wavecom Open AT Control Command +WOPEN
Description:
®
This command starts, stops, deletes, and gets information about the current Open AT embedded
application.
®
This command also allows you to erase the Open AT flash objects storage place and to configure the
Application and Data (A&D) storage place size.
Values:
<Mode>
0 Stop the Open AT embedded application. If this one was running, the product resets
1 Start the Open AT embedded application. If this one was stopped, the product resets
2 Get the Open AT library versions
3 Erase the objects flash of Open AT embedded application
4 Erase the Open AT embedded application
5 Suspend (in Wavecom software kernel) the Open AT embedded application tasks
6 If the (A&D size) parameter is used, configure the Application & Data storage size. Otherwise,
display the current A&D storage place size and Open AT application space size. If the A&D
storage place size has changed, the product resets.
Notes:
•
For Mode=1: If the main version numbers returned by the AT+WOPEN=2 command do
not match, the command will reply +CME ERROR: 541.
•
Mode=3 and 4 are only available only if the Open AT embedded application is stopped
(AT+WOPEN=0).
•
Open AT embedded applications can be resumed with the AT+OPENRES command or
INTERRUPT feature (see +WCFM).
•
Warning: With Mode 6, any A&D size change will lead to this area format process (this
process will take some seconds on start-up , before the +WIND:3 indication display (up to
1.5 seconds per 64 Kbytes flash sector size can be considered as a maximum; all A&D
cells data will be erased).
<IntVersion>
ASCII string giving the internal Open AT library version.
<ExtVersion>
ASCII string giving the external Open AT library version.
Note: If no embedded application is loaded, the <ExtVersion> parameter does not
appear.
<A&DSize>
Usable only with <mode>=6
[0 -1344]
Kbytes size allocated for the Application & Data storage place. Default = 768
Kbytes.
Provided parameter value will be updated with the nearest flash sector subdivision
(64 Kbytes). For example, if a 100 Kbytes size is required, a 128 Kbytes size will
effectively be set.
<OATSize>
Returned with <mode>=6
Open AT Application reserved size (in Kbytes). This size is deducted from the
<A&D size> one, since the whole available size for Open AT and A&D storage
places are 1600 Kbytes (<OATSize> + <A&D size> = 1600).
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WOPEN=<Mode>[,<A&D size>]
Response syntax according to mode: +WOPEN: <Mode>[,<IntVersion>[<ExtVersion>]]
or
+WOPEN: <Mode>,<A&DSize>,<OATSize>]
Command
Possible responses
AT+WOPEN=?
+WOPEN: (0-6),(0-1344)
OK
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN: 0
OK
AT+WOPEN=2
+WOPEN: 2, “AT v3.01”, “AT v2.10”
Note: Get the Open AT library OK
versions
Note: Open AT v2.10 library version. An embedded application has been
downloaded on this product
AT+WOPEN=1
+CME ERROR: 541
Note: Since main versions do not match, the Open AT Application
cannot be started
AT+WOPEN=2
+WOPEN: 2, “AT v2.00”,”AT v2.00”
Note: Get the Open AT library OK
versions
Note: Open AT v2.00 library version. An embedded application has been
downloaded on this product.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
133
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
AT+WOPEN=3
AT+WOPEN=1
Note: Start the embedded
application
AT+WOPEN=3
AT+WOPEN=4
AT+WOPEN=0
Note: Stop the embedded
application
AT+WOPEN=3
AT+WOPEN=4
AT+WOPEN=6
AT+WOPEN=6,1280
AT+WOPEN=6,768
AT+WOPEN=6,900
AT+WOPEN=6
AT+WOPEN=5
OK
Note: The objects flash are erased
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to start the embedded application
+CME ERROR: 532
Note: The embedded application is activated so the objects flash are not
erased
+CME ERROR: 532
Note: The embedded application is activated so it cannot be erased
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to stop the embedded application
OK
Note: The objects flash are erased.
OK
Note: The embedded application is erased
+WOPEN: 6,768,832
OK
Note: 768 Kbytes are reserved for A&D storage place, and 832 for the
Open AT Application
+CME ERROR: 550
Note: The current Open AT Application size is too big to allow this new
A&D storage place size
+WOPEN: 6,768,832
OK
Note: No product reset (same size used)
+WOPEN: 6,960,640
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Size updated according to the nearest flash sector sub-division;
product reset in order to set the new A&D storage place size.
+WOPEN: 6,960,640
OK
Note: 960 Kbytes are served for the A&D storage place, and 640 for the
Open AT application
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: The Open AT Application is not running
OK
+WIND: 3
Note: Product reset in order to start the embedded application
OK
AT+WOPEN=1
Note: Start the embedded
application
+WOPEN=5
Note: Suspend Open AT tasks
AT+WOPEN?
+WOPEN:5
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
134
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Reset +WRST
Description:
This command resets the modem after the time specified by the <delay> parameter.
Values:
<val1>
0 timer reset is disabled
1 timer reset is enabled
<Delay> specify the time for reset
Range “000:00”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)
<RemainTime> time before next reset
Range “000:01”- “168:59” (format hhh:mm)
Syntax:
Command syntax: AT+WRST =<Mode>,<Delay>
Response syntax: +WRST: <Mode>,<Delay>,<RemainTime>
Command
AT+WRST=?
AT+WRST=0
Note: Disable timer
AT+WRST=1,”001:03”
Note: Enable timer and put delay at 1 hour 3
minutes
AT+WRST?
Possible responses
OK
OK
OK
+WRST: 1,”001:03”,”001:01”
OK
Note: Timer activated to reset after 1 hour and 3
minutes. At this point, 1 hour and 1 minute remain
before next reset.
Set Standard Tone +WSST
Description:
This command sets and gets the sound level of the Standard Tones.
Values:
<sound level> Range [0; 15]
0 Maximum volume (default)
15 Minimum volume
<ring tone level> Range [0; 15]
0 Maximum volume (default)
15 Minimum volume
Syntax:
Command syntax:
AT+WSST=[<sound level>][,<ring tone level>]
Command
AT+WSST=0
Note: Set volume to Maximum
AT+WSST=15
Note: Set volume to Minimum
AT+WSST=,5
Note: Set ring tone level to 5
AT+WSST?
Note: get current standard tones
sound level
AT+WSST=?
Note: supported parameters
Possible responses
OK
OK
OK
+WSST: 15,5
OK
Note: current standard tones level is 15
(minimum), and ring tone level is 5.
+WSST: (0-15),(0-15)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
135
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Hang-up +WATH
Description:
This command disconnects the remote user, specifying a release cause and the location. In the case of
multiple calls, all calls are released (active, on-hold and waiting calls).
Values:
<RelCause>:
decimal value from 1 to 127
See table “Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 recommendation.”
<location>:
optional parameter (default value =0)
values as defined in 04.08
0
user
1
private network serving the local user
2
public network serving the local user
3
transit network
4
public network serving the remote user
5
private network serving the remote user
7
international network
10
network beyond interworking point
Note: In order to have a “Normal Release”, use the ATH command.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WATH=<RelCause>,<location>
Command
AT+WATH=31
Note: Ask for disconnection with release
cause=normal and location=USER
AT+WATH=?
AT+WATH=17,2
Note: Ask for disconnection with release
cause=user busy and location= public network
serving the local user
Possible responses
OK
Note: All calls, if any, are released
+WATH: (1-127),(0-5,7,10)
OK
Note: All calls, if any, are released
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
136
Chapter 13 – Specific AT Commands
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS
Description:
Use this command to select the GSM bands on which the modem will work. This command is allowed
only if the selected bands are supported.
You can choose whether the change is immediate or not:
• Either the modem has to be reset to take this change into account (this is the default)
• or the GSM stack restarts immediately on the specified band(s). In this mode, the command
+WMBS is forbidden during the initialization phase of the modem and during calls.
Values:
<Band>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
frequency band configuration to be supported
mono-band mode 850 MHz
mono-band mode 900 MHz
mono-band mode 1800 MHz
mono-band mode 1900 MHz
dual-band mode 850/1900 MHz
dual-band mode 900E (extended) /1800 MHz
dual-band mode 900E (extended) /1900 MHz
<Param> indicates the type of change
0
the modem will have to be reset in order to start on the specified band(s). <ResetFlag> is set
to 1.
1
the change is effective immediately. The GSM stack is restarted with the specified band(s).
<ResetFlag> stays at 0. This mode is forbidden while in communication and during modem
initialization.
Note: If <Param> is not given, the modem has to be reset to start on the specified band(s), as for
<param>=0.
<ResetFlag>
0
the feature was not modified since the last boot of the product
1
the feature has been modified since the last boot of the product; it has to be reset in order to
take the modification into account. This is the case when the band was changed with
“AT+WMBS=<band>” or “AT+WMBS=<band>,0”
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WMBS=<Band>[,<param>]
Response Syntax: +WMBS: <Band>,<ResetFlag>
Command
AT+WMBS=<Band>
AT+WMBS=<Band>,0
AT+WMBS=<Band>,1
AT+WMBS=<Band>
AT+WMBS?
AT+WMBS=?
AT+WMBS=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: The modem has to reset for the change to be effective
OK
Note: The modem has to reset for the change to be effective
OK
Note: Band mode selected and GSM stack restarted
+CME ERROR: 3
Note: Band not allowed
+WMBS:<Band>,<ResetFlag>
OK
Note: Current selected band mode is returned.
WMBS: (0,3,4),(0-1)
OK
Note: Only 850 mono-band or 850/1900 bi-band are available
WMBS: (01,2,3,4,5,6),(0-1)
OK
Note: All bands are available
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
137
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Overview of SIM Application Toolkit
SIM Toolkit, also known as “SIM Application Toolkit,” introduces new functionalities which open the way to a broad range of
value added services. The principle is to allow service providers to develop new applications (e.g.. for banking, travel, ticket
booking, etc.) for subscribers and to download them into the SIM.
This solution allows new services to be accessible to the user by adding new SIM-based applications without modifying the
handset.
Functionality
The term SIM Toolkit refers to the functionalities described in the GSM Technical Specification 11.14. It introduces about
twenty-five new commands for the SIM. Three classes of Toolkit functionalities have been defined, with Class 1 offering a
subset of commands and Class 3 offering the full range of commands (See the Support of SIM Toolkit Classes table in
APPENDIX D).
The SIM Application Toolkit supports:
•
profile download
•
proactive SIM
•
data download into SIM
•
menu selection
•
call control by SIM
Profile Download
The Profile Download instruction is sent by the customer application to the SIM as part of the initialization. It is used to
indicate which SIM Application Toolkit features the customer application supports. The AT command used for this
operation is +STSF (SIM Toolkit Set Facilities).
Proactive SIM
A proactive SIM provides a mechanism whereby the SIM can ask the customer application to perform certain actions.
These actions include:
•
display menu
•
display given text
•
get user input
•
send a short message
•
play the requested tone
•
set up a call
•
provide location information
This mechanism allows SIM applications to generate powerful menu-driven sequences on the customer application and to
use services available in the network.
The commands used for this operation are:
+STIN (SIM Toolkit Indication),
+STGI (SIM Toolkit Get Information),
+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response).
Data Download to SIM
Data downloading to the SIM allows (SMS, phonebook…) data or programs (Java applets) received by SMS or by Cell
Broadcast to be transferred directly to the SIM Application.
This feature does not need any AT command. It is transparent to the customer application.
Menu Selection
A set of menu items is supplied by the SIM Application Toolkit. The menu selection command can then be used to inform
the SIM Application which menu item is selected.
The commands used for this operation are +STIN, +STGI and +STGR.
Call Control by SIM
The call control mechanism allows the SIM to check all dialed numbers, supplementary service control strings and USSD
strings before connecting to the network. This gives the SIM the ability to allow, bar or modify the string before the
operation starts.
The commands used for this operation are:
+STCR (SIM Toolkit Control Response)
+STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
138
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Messages Exchanged During a SIM Toolkit Operation
The following scheme shows the SIM Toolkit commands and unsolicited results that are exchanged.
+STSF=X,XXXXXXXX
STEP 1: Configuration and Activation
+STIN=X
STEP 2: SIM sends pro-active command
MULTI-TECH
Modem
Customer
+STGI=X
Application
+STGI response
STEP 3: Customer application gets all the information.
+STCR:X
+STGR=X,XXXXXX
STEP 4: User response is sent to the SIM.
Step 1:
The customer application informs the modem which facilities are supported. This operation is performed with the +STSF
(SIM Toolkit Set Facilities) command, which also activates or deactivates the SIM Toolkit functionality.
Step 2:
An unsolicited result +STIN (SIM Toolkit indication) is sent by the product in order to indicate to the customer application
which command type the SIM Application Toolkit is running. The last SIM Toolkit indication can be requested by the
+STIN? command.
Step 3:
The customer application uses the +STGI (SIM Toolkit Get Information) command to get all the information about the SIM
Toolkit command, given by +STIN.
Step 4:
The customer application uses the +STGR (SIM Toolkit Give Response) to send its response (if any) to the SIM Toolkit
Application.
The +STCR (SIM Toolkit Control response) indication is an unsolicited result sent by the SIM when Call control
functionality is activated and before the customer application has performed any outgoing call, SMS, SS, or USSD.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
139
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
SIM Toolkit Commands
SIM Toolkit Set Facilities +STSF
Description:
This command allows SIM Toolkit facilities to be activated, deactivated or configured.
Values:
<mode>
0 Deactivates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.
1 Activates the SIM Toolkit functionalities.
2 Configures the SIM Toolkit functionalities.
<Config>
(160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F) (hex format)
Default: 1F6BFFFF1F
<Timeout>
1-255 Timeout for user responses (multiple of 10 seconds).
Default: 3
<Autoresponse>
0
Automatic response is not activated
1
Automatic response is activated
Default: 1
Notes about Values:
• The activation or deactivation of the SIM Toolkit functionalities requires the use of the +CFUN (Set
phone functionality) command to reset the product (this operation is not necessary if PIN is not
entered yet).
• The <Config> parameter gives the coding of the TERMINAL PROFILE, precisely the list of SIM
Application Toolkit facilities that are supported by the customer application.
• The <Timeout> parameter (multiple of 10 seconds) sets the maximum time the user has for reacting
(to select an item, to input a text, etc).
• When the <Autoresponse> is activated, the +STIN indication for Play Tone (5), Refresh (7), Send SS
(8), Send SMS (9) or Send USSD (10) is automatically followed by the corresponding +STGI
response.
Note about Bits:
Some bits are related to the product only and not to the customer application. The product automatically
sets these bits to either 0 or 1 whatever the user enters with the +STSF command. Those values are
given in Appendix D.
Each facility is coded on 1 bit:
• bit = 1: facility is supported by the customer application.
• bit = 0: facility is not supported by the customer application.
Only the first five bytes of the TERMINAL PROFILE (Class 2) can be configured. The other are set to 0.
(See structure of TERMINAL PROFILE in APPENDIX E.)
Syntax:
Command syntax: +STSF=<mode>[,<config>][,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]
Command
AT+STSF=<Mode>[,<Config>]
[,<Timeout>][,<AutoResponse>]
AT+STSF?
AT+STSF=?
Possible responses
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
+STSF: <Mode>,<Config>,<Timeout>,<Autoresponse>
+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F - 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-255),(0-1)
OK
SIM Toolkit Facilities Error Codes
+CME ERROR: 3
Operation not allowed.
This error is returned when a wrong parameter is entered.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
140
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Example
AT+CMEE=1
Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors
OK
AT+WIND=15
Set indications
OK
AT+CPAS
+CPAS: 0
OK
AT+STSF=?
Query ME Status
ME is ready.
Test command SIM Toolkit Set Facilities
+STSF: (0-2), (160060C01F – 5FFFFFFF7F),(1-255)
OK
AT+STSF?
+STSF: 0,”160060C000”,3
OK
AT+STSF=2,”5FFFFFFF7F”
OK
AT+STSF=3
+CME ERROR: 3
AT+STSF=1
OK
AT+CFUN=1
OK
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=0000
OK
+WIND: 4
AT+STSF?
+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3
OK
No activation of SIM Toolkit functionality
Set all SIM Toolkit facilities (class 3).
Syntax Error
Activation of SIM Toolkit functionality
Reboot Software.
Is the ME requiring a password?
Yes, SIM PIN required
PIN OK
Init phase is complete
SIM Toolkit functionality activated with all facilities
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
141
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
SIM Toolkit Indication +STIN or +STRIL
Unsolicited Result
In order to allow the customer application to identify the pro-active command sent via SIM Toolkit, a mechanism of
unsolicited SIM Toolkit indications (+STIN) is implemented.
Syntax: AT+STIN: <CmdType>
Option:
<CmdType>
0
Indicates that a ‘Setup Menu’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
1
Indicates that a ‘Display Text’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
2
Indicates that a ‘Get Inkey’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
3
Indicates that a ‘Get Input’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
4
Indicates that a ‘Setup Call’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
5
Indicates that a ‘Play Tone’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
6
Indicates that a ‘Sel Item’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
7
Indicates that a ‘Refresh’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
8
Indicates that a ‘Send SS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
9
Indicates that a ‘Send SMS’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
10
Indicates that a ‘Send USSD’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM. (*)
11
Indicates that a ‘SETUP EVENT LIST’ pro-active command has been sent from the SIM.
93
An “SMS-PP Download” failed due to SIM BUSY
94
An “SMS-PP Download” failed due to SIM ERROR
98
Indicates the timeout when no response from user.
99
Indicates that a “End Session” has been sent from the SIM.
(*) if the automatic response parameter is activated, this indication is followed by the corresponding +STGI
response.
Second SIM Toolkit Indication
If the customer application needs to exchange a SIM Toolkit message directly with the SIM card, the second
indication (+STRIL) gives the full command string provided by the SIM.
Values:
<CmdTreated>
0
The command must be treated by the application
1
The is already treated by the modem
<Command string> string type: SIM command string in hexadecimal format.
Syntax:
+STRIL: <CmdTreated>,<Command string>
Last SIM Toolkit Indication
The last SIM Toolkit indication sent by the SIM can be requested by the AT+STIN? command. This command is
only usable between the sending of the STIN indication by the SIM (Step 2, Messages exchanged during a SIM
Toolkit operation) and the response of the user with the +STGI command (Step 3).
Syntax: Command syntax: AT+STIN?
Command
AT+STIN?
Note: Ask for the last SIM Toolkit
indication sent by the SIM
AT+STGI=0
AT+STIN?
Note: Ask for the last SIM Toolkit
indication sent by the SIM
Possible responses
+STIN: 0
OK
Note: the last SIM Toolkit indication was a Setup Menu
Note: Display the SIM Toolkit application menu
+CME ERROR: 4
Note: Operation not supported. The +STGI command has
been already used
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
142
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
SIM Toolkit Get Information +STGI
Description:
This command allows to get the information (text to display, menu information, priorities…) of a proactive command sent from the SIM.
The information is returned only after receiving a SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN).
Values:
Values are listed after the Command Table
Syntax :
Command syntax: +STGI=<CmdType>
Command
AT+STGI=<CmdType>
AT+STGI=?
Possible responses
+CME ERROR: <err>
+STGI: (0-11)
OK
Table of Command Types
Cmd Description
Type
Get information about Setup Menu
0
pro-active command.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Get information about Display text
pro-active command.
Get information about Get Inkey
pro-active command.
Get information about Get Input
pro-active command.
Get information about Setup call
pro-active command.
Get information about Play Tone
pro-active command.
Get information about Sel Item
pro-active command.
Get information about Refresh
pro-active command.
Get information about Send SS
pro-active command.
Get information about Send SMS
pro-active command.
Get information about Send USSD
pro-active command.
Get information about SETUP EVENT LIST
pro-active command.
Possible responses
+STGI: <Alpha Identifier menu>
+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
+STGI: <Id2>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id2 Label>,<Help
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
[…]]
No action expected from SIM.
+STGI: <Prior>,<Text>,<ClearMode>
No action expected from SIM.
+STGI: <Format>,<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]
SIM expects key pressed (+STGR).
+STGI: <Format>,<EchoMode>,<SizeMin>,<SizeMax>,
<HelpInfo>[,<TextInfo>]
SIM expects key input (+STGR).
+STGI: <Type>,<CalledNb>,<SubAddress>,<Class>
SIM expects user authorization (+STGR).
+STGI: <ToneType>[,<TimeUnit>,<TimeInterval>,<TextInfo>]
No action.
+STGI: <DefaultItem>, <Alpha Identifier menu><CR><LF>
+STGI: <Id1>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id1 Label>,<Help
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
+STGI: <Id2>,<NbItems>,<Alpha Id2 Label>,<Help
Info>[,<NextActionId>]<CR><LF>
[…]]
SIM expects an item choice (+STGR).
+STGI: <RefreshType>
No action (Refresh done automatically by product).
+STGI:<TextInfo>
No action (Send SS done automatically by product).
+STGI: <TextInfo>
No action (Send SMS done automatically by product).
+STGI: <TextInfo>
No action (Send USSD done automatically by product).
+STGI: <Evt>
Values for the SIM Toolkit Get Information Command:
Values when CmdType=0 (Setup menu)
<Alpha Identifier menu>
Alpha identifier of the main menu
<Idx> (1-255)
Menu item Identifier
<NbItems> (1-255)
Number of items in the main menu
<Alpha Idx Label>
Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII format
<HelpInfo>
0
No help information available
1
Help information available
<NextActionId>
Contains a pro-active command identifier (see the table in APPENDIX F)
Compared to other commands the customer application can always get information about setup menu after having
received the +STIN:0 indication.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
143
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Values when CmdType=1 (Display text)
<Prior>
0
Normal priority of display
1
High priority of display
<Text>
Text to display in ASCII format
<ClearMode>
0
Clear message after a delay (3 seconds)
1
Wait for user to clear message
Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)
<Format>
0
Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)
1
SMS alphabet default
2
UCS2
<HelpInfo>
0
No help information available
1
Help information available
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format
Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)
<Format>
0
Digit (0-9, *, #,and +)
1
SMS alphabet default
2
UCS2
3
Unpacked format
4
Packed format
<EchMode>
0
Echo off
1
Echo on
<SizeMin> (1-255)
Minimum length of input
<SizeMax> (1-255)
Maximum length of input
<HelpInfo>
0
No help information available
1
Help information available
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format
Values when CmdType=4 (Setup Call)
<Type>
0
Set up call but only if not currently busy on another call
1
Set up call, putting all other calls (if any) on hold
2
Set up call, disconnecting all other calls (if any)
<CalledNb>
Called party number in ASCII format
<SubAdress>
Called party sub-address in ASCII format
<Class>
0
Voice call
1
Data call
<Alpha Id>
Values when CmdType=5 (Play tone)
<ToneType>
0
Tone Dial
1
Tone Busy
2
Tone Congestion
3
Tone Radio ack
4
Tone Dropped
5
Tone Error
6
Tone Call waiting
7
Tone Ringing
8
Tone General beep
9
Tone Positive beep
10
Tone Negative beep
<TimeUnit>
0
Time unit used is minutes
1
Time unit used is seconds
2
Time unit used is tenths of seconds
<TimeInterval> (1-255)
Time required expressed in units
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
144
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Values when CmdType=6 (Sel Item)
<DefaultItem> (1-255)
<Alpha Identifier menu>
<Idx> (1-255)
<NbItems> (1-255)
<Alpha Idx Label>
<HelpInfo>
0
1
<NextActionId>
No help information available
Help information available
Contains a pro-active command identifier. (see the table in APPENDIX F)
Values when CmdType=7 (Refresh)
<RefreshType>
0
1
2
3
4
SlM initialization and full file change notification
File change notification
SIM initialization and file change notification
SIM initialization
SIM reset
Default Item Identifier
Alpha identifier of the main menu
Identifier items
Number of items in the menu
Alpha identifier label of items in ASCII format
Values when CmdType=8 (Send SS)
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format
Values when CmdType=9 (Send SMS)
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format
Values when CmdType=10 (Send USSD)
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format
Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)
<Evt>
1
Reporting asked for an ‘Idle Screen’ event
2
Reporting asked for an ‘User Activity’ event
3
Reporting asked for ‘Idle Screen’ and ‘User Activity’ events
4
Cancellation of reporting event
Note: For the UCS2 format texts are displayed in Hexa ASCII format. Example: When the SIM sends a TextString
containing 0x00 0x41 the text displayed is “0041”.
Error Codes for the SIM Toolkit Get Information Command:
+ CME ERROR: 3
Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is detected.
+CME ERROR: 4
Operation not supported. This error is returned when the user wants to get information
about a SIM Toolkit pro-active command (with SIM Toolkit functionality not activated.)
+CME ERROR: 518
SIM Toolkit indication not received. This error is returned when the SIM Toolkit indication
(+STIN) has not been received.
Example
Initially, all facilities are activated. The PIN is not required and SIM Toolkit functionality is activated.
AT+CMEE=1
OK
AT+WIND=15
OK
Enable the reporting of mobile equipment errors
Set indications
AT+STSF?
+STSF: 1,”5FFFFFFF7F”,3
OK
+STIN: 0
AT+STIN?
+STIN: 0
OK
AT+STGI=0
+STGI: ”SIM TOOLKIT MAIN MENU”
+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0
+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0
+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0
OK
AT+STIN?
+CME ERROR: 4
SIM Toolkit functionality activated with all facilities.
The main menu has been sent from the SIM.
Get information about the main menu
Main menu contains 3 items.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
145
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Unsolicited Result: SIM Toolkit Control Response
+STCR
Description:
When the customer application makes an outgoing call or an outgoing SMS and if the call control facility
is activated, CALL CONTROL and SMS CONTROL responses can be identified. This is also applicable
to SS calls.
Values:
<Result>
0 Control response not allowed.
1 Control response with modification.
<Number>
Called number, Service Center Address or SS String in ASCII format.
<MODestAddr> MO destination address in ASCII format.
<TextInfo>
Text information in ASCII format.
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
+STCR: <Result>[,<Number>,<MODestAddr>,<TextInfo>]
SIM Toolkit Give Response +STGR
Description:
This command allows the application/user to select an item in the main menu or to answer the following
proactive commands:
•
GET INKEY
Key Pressed By The User.
•
GET INPUT
Message Entered By The User.
•
SELECT ITEM
Selected Item.
•
SETUP CALL
User Confirmation.
•
DISPLAY TEXT
User Confirmation To Clear The Message.
•
SETUP EVENT LIST
Reporting events.
It is also possible to terminate the current proactive command session by sending a Terminal Response
to the SIM, with the following parameters:
•
BACKWARD MOVE
Process a backward move
•
BEYOND CAPABILITIES
Command beyond ME capabilities
•
UNABLE TO PROCESS
ME is currently unable to process command
•
NO RESPONSE
No response from the user
•
END SESSION
User abort.
Values:
The values are listed after the Command Syntax Table.
Syntax:
Command syntax: +STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data>]
Command
AT+STGR=<CmdType>[,<Result>,<Data
For GetInput with <Result>=1:
AT+STGR=3,1<CR>
<Data><Ctrl Z>
For GetInkey with <Result>=1
AT+STGR=2,1,”<Data>”
AT+STGR=?
Values:
Possible responses
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
+CME ERROR: <err>
OK
<CmdType>
0
Item selection in the main menu.
1
User confirmation to clear a ‘Disp Text’.
2
Response for a ‘Get Inkey’.
3
Response for a ‘Get Input’.
4
Response for a ‘Setup call’.
6
Response for a ‘Sel Item’.
11 Response for a ‘Setup event list’.
95 Backward move
96 Command beyond ME capabilities
97 ME currently unable to process command
98 No response from the user.
99 User abort.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
146
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Values when CmdType=0 (Select an item from the main menu)
<Result>
1 Item selected by the user.
2 Help information required by user.
<Data> Contains the item identifier of the item selected by the user.
Values when CmdType=1 (Confirm the display text clearing)
No values.
Values when CmdType=2 (Get Inkey)
<Result>
0 Session ended by user.
1 Response given by the user.
2 Help information required by user.
<Data> Contains the key pressed by the user.
Values when CmdType=3 (Get Input)
<Result>
0 Session ended by user.
1 Response given by the user.
2 Help information required by user.
<Data> Contains the string of characters entered by the user.
Note: For Inputs in UCS2 format, the data are entered in ASCII format. Example: For
“8000410042FFFF” entered, the SIM receives 0x00 0x41 0x00 0x42 with UCS2 DCS. (See the
Appendix G about the different UCS2 syntaxes).
Values when CmdType=4 (Setup call)
<Result>
0 User refuses the call.
1 User accepts call.
Values when CmdType=6 (Select Item)
<Result>
0 Session terminated by the user
1 Item selected by the user
2 Help information required by the user
3 Return to the back item
<Data> Contains the item identifier selected by the user
Values when CmdType=11 (Setup Event List)
<Result>
1 Idle screen available.
2 User activity event.
Sending a Terminal Response to the SIM:
Values when CmdType=95 (Backward Move)
Values when CmdType=96 (Command beyond ME capabilities)
Values when CmdType=97 (ME currently unable to process command)
Values when CmdType=98 (No response from the user)
Values when CmdType=99 (SIM Toolkit Session aborting by the user)
No values.
It is possible to send a Terminal Response after the +STIN indication (step 2, of Messages exchanged during a SIM
Toolkit operation), or after the +STGI command (step 3).
Note: For the SETUP MENU Proactive Command, it is only possible to send a Terminal Response after the +STIN:
0 indication, not after a +STGI=0 request. All of the Terminal Responses are not possible with all of the
Proactive Commands. Compatibility between available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands is
given in Appendix D, Table 2. If a Terminal Response is attempted during a incompatible Proactive Command
session, a +CME ERROR: 3 will be returned.
Possible error codes
+CME ERROR: 3 Operation not allowed. This error is returned when a wrong parameter is detected.
+CME ERROR: 4 Operation not supported. This error is returned when the user gives a response with
SIM Toolkit functionality not activated. Or if the SIM Toolkit indication (+STIN) has not
been received.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
147
Chapter 14 – SIM Toolkit
Example
Initially, all facilities are activated, the PIN is not required and the SIM Toolkit functionality is activated.
+STIN: 0
The main menu has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=0
Get information about the main menu
+STGI: 1,3,”BANK”,0
The main menu contains 3 items.
+STGI: 2,3,”QUIZ”,0
+STGI: 3,3,”WEATHER”,0
OK
AT+STGR=0,1,1
The item 2 of the main menu has been selected.
OK
+STIN: 6
The Sel item menu has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=6
Get information about the BANK menu
+STGI: 1,”BANK”
The BANK menu contains two items.
+STGI: 1,2,”PERSONAL ACCOUNT ENQUIRY”,1
+STGI: 2,2,”NEWS”,0
OK
AT+STGR=6,1,1
Select Item 1.
OK
+STIN: 3
User request to enter Password sent.
AT+STGI=3
Get information about this request.
+STGI: 0,0,4,4,0,”Enter Account Password:’
OK
AT+STGR=3,1<CR>
The user enters the Password.
>0000<Ctrl Z>
OK
+STIN:1
A text info has been sent from the SIM.
AT+STGI=1
Get information about this text.
+STGI: 0,”Password correct, please wait for response”,0
OK
+STIN: 9
SIM requests a bank account update from bank server via the network (SEND SMS)
AT+STGI=9
Get all information about the SEND SMS
+STGI: ”Send account balance of user, authorization ok”
OK
********* After a short period of time. ********
+STIN: 5
Transaction is complete: BEEP
+STGI=5
Get information about the Tone
+STGI: 9,1,1
+STIN: 1
Display text indication
AT+STGI=1
+STGI: 0,”Your account balance is 1000 $”,0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
148
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Chapter 15 – GPRS commands
Important: GPRS commands are not available under GSM-only software.
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT
Description:
This command specifies PDP context parameter values for a PDP context identified by the local context
identification parameter, <cid>.
Four PDP contexts can be defined through the software.
A special form of the set command, +CGDCONT= <cid> causes the values for context number <cid> to
become undefined.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP
types, <PDP_type>, the parameter value ranges for each <PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP
types, <PDP_type), the parameter value ranges for each <PDP_type> are returned on a separate line.
Values:
<cid>
(PDP Context Identifier) a numeric parameter (1-4) which specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The parameter is local to the DTE-modem interface and is used in other PDP
context-related commands.
<PDP_type> (Packet Data Protocol type) a string parameter which specifies the type of packet data
protocol
• IP
Internet Protocol
• PPP Point to Point Protocol
<APN> (Access Point Name) a string parameter, which is a logical name that is used to select the
GGSN or the external packet data network.
If the value is null or omitted, then the subscription value will be requested.
<PDP_address> a string parameter that identifies the modem in the address space applicable to the
PDP.
If the value is null or omitted, then a value may be provided by the DTE during the PDP
startup procedure or a dynamic address will be requested. The read form of the command will
continue to return the null string even if an address has been allocated during the PDP
startup procedure. The allocated address may be read using the +CGPADDR command.
<d_comp> a numeric parameter that controls PDP data compression
0 Off (default if value is omitted)
1 On
Other values are reserved.
<h_comp> a numeric parameter that controls PDP header compression
0 Off (default if value is omitted)
1 On
Other values are reserved.
Notes:
• The data compression algorithm (V.42bis) provided in SNDCP is V.42bis.
• Four CIDs are available to specify four PDP contexts, but only 11 NSAPIs are available for
PDP activation. Only one can be activated at a time.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
149
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGDCONT
Command
AT+CGDCONT=[<cid> [,<PDP_type>
[,<APN> [,<PDP_addr> [,<d_comp>
[,<h_comp>]]]]]]
AT+CGDCONT?
AT+CGDCONT=?
AT+CGDCONT: 1, “IP” “internet”;
AT+CGCONT=2, “IP”, “abc.com”
AT+CGDCONT=?
AT+CGCONT?
Possible responses
OK
ERROR
+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>, <APN>,<PDP_addr>,
<data_comp>, <head_comp>
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: <cid>, <PDP_type>,
<APN>,<PDP_addr>, <data_comp>, <head_comp>
[...]]
OK
+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),
(list of supported <h_comp>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGDCONT: (range of supported <cid>s),
<PDP_type>,,,(list of supported <d_comp>s),(list of
supported <h_comp>s)
[...]]
OK
OK
+CGCONT: (1-4), “IP”,,,(0-1),(0-1)
+CGCONT: (1-4), “PPP”,,,0,0,0
OK
+CGCONT: 1, “IP”,”internet”,,0,0
+CGCONT: 2, “IP”,”abc.com”,,0,0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
150
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ
Description:
This command allows the DTE to specify a Quality of Service Profile that is used when the modem
sends an Activate PDP Context Request message to the network.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification
parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the
+CGQREQ command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile
consists of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQREQ= <cid>, causes the requested profile for context
number <cid> to become undefined.
The read command returns the current settings for each defined context. The test command returns
values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP types, the parameter value
ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.
Values:
<cid>
Numeric parameter that specifies a particular PDP context definition
Range 1- 3
<precedence> Numeric parameter that specifies the precedence class
0
Subscribed precedence - Subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted
1
High priority. Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence classes 2 & 3
2
Normal priority - Service commitments shall be maintained ahead of precedence class 3
3
Low priority - Service commitments shall be maintained after precedence classes 1 and 2
<delay> Numeric parameter that specifies the delay class
0
Subscribed
1
Delay class 1
2
Delay class 2
3
Delay class 3
4
Delay class 4
Delay (maximum values)
SDU size: 128 bytes
SDU size: 1024 bytes
Mean Transfer
95 percentile Delay Mean Transfer Delay 95 percentile Delay (sec)
Delay (sec)
(sec)
(sec)
0
Subscribed
Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted
1. (Predictive)
< 0.5
<2
<7
2. (Predictive)
<5
< 25
< 15
< 75
3. (Predictive)
< 50
< 250
< 75
< 375
4. (Best Effort)
Unspecified
Delay Class
<reliability>
0
Subscribed
1
Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s)
2
Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s)
3
Up to 4 000 (32kbit/s)
4
Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s)
5
Up to 16 000 (188 kbit/s)
6
Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s)
7
Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s)
8
Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s)
9
Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s)
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
151
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Reliability GTP Mode
Class
0
Subscribed
1
Acknowledged
LLC Frame Mode LLC Data RLC Block Mode Traffic Type
Protection
Subscribed by the Nwk / default if value is omitted
Acknowledged Protected Acknowledged
Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive
application that cannot cope with
data loss.
2
Unacknowledged Acknowledged Protected Acknowledged
Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive
application that can cope with
infrequent data loss.
3
Unacknowledged Unacknowledged Protected Acknowledged
Non real-time traffic, error-sensitive
application that can cope with data
loss, GMM/SM, & SMS.
4
Unacknowledged Unacknowledged Protected Unacknowledged Real-time traffic, error-sensitive
application that can cope with data
loss.
5
Unacknowledged Unacknowledged Unprotecte Unacknowledged Real-time traffic, error non-sensitive
d
application that can cope with data
loss.
Note: For real-time traffic, the QoS profile also requires appropriate settings for delay and throughput.
<peak>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Subscribed
Up to 1 000 (8 kbit/s)
Up to 2 000 (16 kbit/s)
Up to 4 000 (32kbit/s)
Up to 8 000 (64 kbit/s)
Up to 16 000 (188 kbit/s)
Up to 32 000 (256 kbit/s)
Up to 64 000 (512 kbit/s)
Up to 128 000 (1 024 kbit/s)
Up to 256 000 (2 048 kbit/s)
<mean>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
31
Subscribed by the Network by default if value is omitted
100 (~0.22 bit/s)
200 (~0.44 bit/s)
500 (~1.11 bit/s)
1 000 (~2.2 bit/s)
2 000 (~4.4 bit/s)
5 000 (~11.1 bit/s)
10 000 (~22 bit/s)
20 000 (~44 bit/s)
50 000 (~111 bit/s)
100 000 (~0.22 kbit/s)
200 000 (~0.44 kbit/s)
500 000 (~1.11 kbit/s)
1 000 000 (~2.2 kbit/s)
2 000 000 (~4.4 kbit/s)
5 000 000 (~11.1 kbit/s)
10 000 000 (~22 kbit/s)
20 000 000 (~44 kbit/s)
50 000 000 (~111 kbit/s)
Best effort
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
152
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax:
Command
AT+CGQREQ=[<cid> [,<precedence >
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> [,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
AT+CGQREQ?
AT+CGQREQ=?
AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14
AT+CGQREQ=?
AT+CGQREQ?
Possible Response(s)
OK
ERROR
+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>, <reliability>,
<peak>, <mean>
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,
<reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>
[…]]
OK
+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list
of supported <mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQREQ: <PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list
of supported <mean>s)
[…]]
OK
OK
+CGQREG: “IP”, (1-3), (1-4), (1-5), (1-9), (1-31)
+CGQREQ: “PPP”, (1-3), (1-4), (1-5), (1-9), (1-31)
OK
+CGQREQ: 1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
153
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable
+CGQMIN
Description:
This command allows the DTE to specify a minimum acceptable profile which is checked by the modem
against the negotiated profile returned in the Activate PDP Context Accept message.
The set command specifies a profile for the context identified by the local context identification
parameter, <cid>. Since this is the same parameter that is used in the +CGDCONT command, the
+CGQMIN command is effectively an extension to the +CGDCONT command. The QoS profile consists
of a number of parameters, each of which may be set to a separate value.
A special form of the set command, +CGQMIN= <cid> causes the minimum acceptable profile for
context number <cid> to become undefined. In this case no check is made against the negotiated
profile.
The read command returns the current settings1 for each defined context.
The test command returns values supported as a compound value. If the modem supports several PDP
types, the parameter value ranges for each PDP type are returned on a separate line.
Values:
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context .
<precedence>: a numeric parameter which specifies the precedence class.
<delay>: a numeric parameter which specifies the delay class.
<reliability>: a numeric parameter which specifies the reliability class.
<peak>: a numeric parameter which specifies the peak throughput class.
<mean>: a numeric parameter which specifies the mean throughput class.
Note: If a value is omitted for a particular class then this class is not checked.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGQMIN
Command
AT+CGQMIN=[<cid> [,<precedence >
[,<delay> [,<reliability.> [,<peak>
[,<mean>]]]]]]
AT+CGQMIN?
AT+CGQMIN=?
AT+CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,31
AT+CGQMIN=?
AT+CGQMIN?
Possible Response(s)
OK
ERROR
+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>, <reliability>,
<peak>, <mean>
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <cid>, <precedence >, <delay>,
<reliability.>, <peak>, <mean>
[…]]
OK
+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list
of supported <mean>s)
[<CR><LF>+CGQMIN: <PDP_type>, (list of supported
<precedence>s), (list of supported <delay>s), (list of
supported <reliability>s) , (list of supported <peak>s), (list
of supported <mean>s)
[…]]
OK
OK
+CGQMIN: “IP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)
+CGQMIN: “PPP”,(1-3),(1-4),(1-5),(1-9),(1-31)
OK
+CGQMIN=? 1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
154
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT
Description:
The execution command is used to attach the modem to, or detach the modem from, the GPRS service.
After the command has completed, the modem remains in V.25ter command state. If the modem is
already in the requested state, the command is ignored and the OK response is returned. If the
requested state cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned. Extended
error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.
Any active PDP contexts will be automatically deactivated when the attachment state changes to
detached.
The read command returns the current GPRS service state.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS service states.
Values:
<state> Indicates the state of GPRS attachment
0
Detached
1
Attached
2
Combined detach (GPRS and GSM detach in the same network request)
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.
Command Syntax: AT+CGATT
Syntax:
Command
AT+CGATT= [<state>]
AT+CGATT?
AT+CGATT=?
AT+CGATT=1
Possible Responses
OK
ERROR
+CGATT: <state>
OK
+CGATT: (list of supported
<state>s)
OK
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
155
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT
Description:
The execution command activates or deactivates the specified PDP context (s). After the command has
completed, the modem remains in V.25ter command state. If any PDP context is already in the
requested state, the state for that context remains unchanged.
If the requested state for any specified context cannot be achieved, an ERROR or +CME ERROR
response is returned. Extended error responses are enabled by the +CMEE command.
If the modem is not GPRS attached when the activation form of the command is executed, the modem
first performs a GPRS attach and them attempts to activate the specified contexts. If the attach fails
then the modem responds with ERROR or, if extended error responses are enabled, with the
appropriate failure-to-attach error message.
If no <cid>s are specified, the activation form of the command activates the first available defined
contexts. If no <cid>s are specified the deactivation form of the command deactivates all active
contexts.
One PDP context can be activated at the same time.
The read command returns the current activation states for all the defined PDP contexts.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported PDP context activation states.
Note: See “Full GPRS AT Command Examples” later in this chapter.
Values:
<state> Indicates the state of PDP context activation
0 Deactivated
1 Activated
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the execution command.
Syntax:
<cid>
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context.
Before a context can be activated, the modem must be attached to the GPRS network by
performing an automatic GPRS attach.
Note:
If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not
supported.
Command Syntax: AT+CGACT
Command
AT+CGACT=[<state>
[,<cid>[,<cid>[,…]]]]
AT+CGACT?
AT+CGACT=?
AT+CGACT=1,1
AT+CGACT?
AT+CGACT=?
Possible Response(s)
OK
ERROR
+CGACT: <cid>, <state>
[<CR><LF>+CGACT: <cid>, <state>
[...]]
OK
+CGACT: (list of supported <state>s)
OK
OK
+CGACT: 1,1
OK
+CGACT: (0-1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
156
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Enter Data State +CGDATA
Description:
The command causes the modem to perform the necessary actions to set up communication between
the DTE and the network. This may include performing a GPRS attach and one PDP context activation.
If the <cid> value is not defined to the modem, the modem will return an ERROR or +CME ERROR
response. Otherwise, the modem issues the intermediate result code CONNECT and enters V.25ter
online data state.
GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or during the PDP
startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT commands.
If no <cid> is given, the modem attempts to activate the context with whatever information is available to
the modem. The other context parameters is set to their default values (No APN, default QOS
parameters, dynamic IP address requested).
If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.
After data transfer and layer 2 protocol termination procedure completion, the V.25ter command state is
re-entered and the modem returns the final result code OK.
In case of an abnormal termination or start up, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the modem
returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach, activate and other
errors may be reported.
This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.
Note: The goal of this command is the same than ATD*99***.
Note:
If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.
Values:
<cid>
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGDATA
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
Command
AT+CGDATA=[<cid>]
AT+CGDATA=?
AT+CGDATA=?
AT+CGDATA=1
Possible Response(s)
CONNECT
ERROR
+CGDATA:
OK
+CGDATA:
OK
CONNECT
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
157
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS
Description:
The set command is used to set the modem to operate according to the specified GPRS mobile class. If
the requested class is not supported, an ERROR or +CME ERROR response is returned.
The read command returns the current GPRS mobile class.
The test command is used for requesting information on the supported GPRS mobile classes.
Values:
<class>
A string parameter which indicates the GPRS mobile class (in descending order of
functionality)
A
Class A (highest)
B
Class B
CG
Class C in GPRS only mode
CC
Class C in circuit switched only mode (lowest)
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command.
If the modem is GPRS attached when the set command is issued with a <class> = CC specified, a
GPRS detach request is sent to the network.
If the modem is GSM attached when the set command is issued with a <class> = CG specified, a GSM
detach request is sent to the network.
Class A is not supported.
Note: During switch-On in CG class, the modem always performs an automatic GPRS attach (the
ATTACH-STATUS parameter of +WGPRS is ignored). But if the modem is not already GPRSattached when switching from B/CC class to CG class, then no automatic GPRS attach is
performed.
Example of the Automatic Attachment (See Note Above):
AT+CGCLASS?
+CGCLASS: “B”
OK
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK
AT+CGCLASS=”CG”
OK
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 0
OK
AT+CGATT=1
OK
AT+CPOF
OK
AT+CFUN=1
OK
AT+CGCLASS?
+CGCLASS: “CG”
OK
AT+CGATT?
+CGATT: 1
OK
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGCLASS
Command
AT+CGCLASS= [<class>]
AT+CGCLASS?
AT+CGCLASS=?
AT+CGCLASS=”CG”
Note: Enter GPRS Class C
mode
AT+CGCLASS=”CC”
Note: Enter GMS mode
AT+CGCLASS=”A”
Note: Chosen class not
supported
AT+CGCLASS=?
AT+CGCLASS?
Possible Response(s)
OK
ERROR
+CGCLASS: <class>
OK
+CGCLASS: (list of supported <class>s)
OK
OK
OK
+CME ERROR: 150
+CGCLASS: (“CG”,”CC”)
OK
+CGCLASS: (“CC”)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
158
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS
Description:
The set command specifies the service or service preference that the modem will use to send MO SMS
messages.
The read command returns the currently selected service or service preference.
The test command requests information on the currently available services and service preferences.
Values:
<service>: a numeric parameter which indicates the service or service preference to be used
0
GPRS
1
Circuit switched
2
GPRS preferred (use circuit switched if GPRS is not available)
3
Circuit switched preferred (use GPRS if circuit switched not available)
Other values are reserved and will result in an ERROR response to the set command.
Command Syntax:
Syntax:
Command
AT+CGSMS= [<service>]
At+CGSMS?
AT+CGSMS=?
AT +CGSMS=0
AT+CGSMS=?
Possible Responses
OK
ERROR
+CGSMS: <service>
OK
+CGSMS: (list of currently available
<service>s)
OK
OK
+CGSMS=(0-3)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
159
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP
Description:
Set command enables or disables sending of unsolicited result codes, +CGEV: XXX from modem to
DTE in the case of certain events occurring in the GPRS modem or the network.
<mode> controls the processing of unsolicited result codes specified within this command.
Read command returns the current mode and buffer settings.
Test command returns the modes and buffer settings supported by the modem as compound values.
Values:
<mode>:
0 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the modem; if modem result code buffer is full, the oldest
ones can be discarded. No codes are forwarded to the DTE.
2 Buffer unsolicited result codes in the modem when modem-DTE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line
data mode) and flush them to the DTE when modem-DTE link becomes available; otherwise
forward them directly to the DTE.
<bfr>
0 Modem buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when
<mode> 1 or 2 is entered. This is the only case supported.
1 Modem buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is flushed to the DTE
when <mode> 2 is entered. This case is not supported.
The software provides a combination of all modes. When a serial link is available, indications are
forwarded directly to the DTE. If a serial link is reserved (e.g., in on-line data mode) or the modem
result code buffer is full, the oldest ones can be discarded.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGEREP
Command
AT+CGEREP=[<mode>]
AT+CGEREP?
AT+CGEREP=?
Possible Responses
OK
ERROR
+CGEREP: <mode>,<bfr>
OK
+CGEREP: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of
supported <bfr>s)
OK
Unsolicited Result Codes and Corresponding Events:
The following unsolicited result codes and the corresponding events are defined:
+CGEV: REJECT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>
A network request for PDP context activation occurred when the modem was unable to report it to
the DTE with a +CRING unsolicited result code and was automatically rejected.
+CGEV: NW REACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The network has requested a context reactivation. The <cid> that was used to reactivate the
context is provided if known to the modem.
+CGEV: NW DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The network has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the context is
provided if known to the modem.
+CGEV: ME DEACT <PDP_type>, <PDP_addr>, [<cid>]
The mobile equipment has forced a context deactivation. The <cid> that was used to activate the
context is provided if known to the modem.
+CGEV: NW DETACH
The network has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been
deactivated. These are not reported separately.
+CGEV: ME DETACH
The mobile equipment has forced a GPRS detach. This implies that all active contexts have been
deactivated. These are not reported separately.
+CGEV: NW CLASS <class>
The network has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported.
+CGEV: ME CLASS <class>
The mobile equipment has forced a change of MS class. The highest available class is reported.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
160
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG
Description:
The set command controls the presentation of an unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat> when <n>=1
and there is a change in the modem's GPRS network registration status, or code +CGREG:
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] when <n>=2 and there is a change of the network cell.
The read command returns the status of result code presentation and an integer <stat> which shows
whether the network has currently indicated the registration of the modem. Location information
elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and modem is registered in the network.
Values:
<n>
0
1
2
Disable network registration unsolicited result code
Enable network registration unsolicited result code +CGREG: <stat>
Enable network registration and location information unsolicited result code +CGREG:
<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
<stat>
0 Not registered; the modem is not currently searching a new operator to which to register
1 Registered, home network
2 Not registered, but modem is currently searching a new operator to which to register
3 Registration denied
4 Unknown
5 Registered, roaming
<lac>
String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
<ci>
String type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGREG
Command
AT+CGREG=[<n>]
AT+CGREG?
AT+CGREG=?
Possible response(s)
+CGREG: stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
OK
+CGREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
OK
Note: +CME ERROR: <err>
+CGREG: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
161
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Request GPRS IP Service D
Description:
This command causes the modem to perform whatever actions are necessary to establish
communication between the DTE and the external PDN.
The V.25ter 'D' (Dial) command causes the modem to enter the V.25ter online data state and, with the
DTE, to start the specified layer 2 protocol. The modem returns CONNECT to confirm acceptance of the
command prior to entering the V.25ter online data state. No further commands may follow on the AT
command line.
The detailed behavior after the online data state has been entered is described briefly in clause 9, for
IP, of GSM 07.60. GPRS attachment and PDP context activation procedures may take place prior to or
during the PDP startup if they have not already been performed using the +CGATT and +CGACT
commands.
If <cid> is supported, its usage is the same as in the +CGDATA command. The +CGDCONT,
+CGQREQ, etc. commands may then be used in the modem initialization AT command string to set
values for PDP type, APN, QoS etc.
If <cid> is not supported or is supported but omitted, the modem attempt to activate the context using
the 'Empty PDP type' (GSM 04.08). (No PDP address or APN is sent in this case and only one PDP
context subscription record is present in the HLR for this subscriber.)
Note: If a GPRS PPP session is already running, the setting of a CSD (GSM data call) is not supported.
Values:
<GPRS_SC_IP>
<cid>
Syntax:
(GPRS Service Code for IP) a digit string (value 99), which identifies a request to
use the GPRS with IP (PDP types IP and PPP)
A digit string which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
Command Syntax:
Command
D*<GPRS_SC_IP>[***<cid>]#
Example:
Possible Responses
CONNECT
ERROR
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
ATD*99***2#
ERROR
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
162
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Network Requested PDP Context Activation
In this mode of operation, the modem behaves like an answering modem and accepts the normal V.25ter commands
associated with answering a call. If GPRS-specific configuration commands are required, they may be sent to the modem
as part of the modem initialization commands. The +CGAUTO command is used to select modem compatibility mode.
Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP Context Activation S0
The V.25ter 'S0=n' (Automatic answer) command may be used to turn off (n=0) and on (n>0) the automatic response to a
network request for a PDP context activation. When the 'S0=n' (n>0) command is received, the modem attempt to perform
a GPRS attach if it is not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR being returned to the DTE. Subsequently, the
modem will announce a network request for PDP context activation by issuing the unsolicited result code RING to the
DTE, followed by the intermediate result code CONNECT. The modem then enters V.25ter online data state and follows
the same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <L2P> or <cid> values specified.
Note: The 'S0=n' (n=0) command does not perform an automatic GPRS detach.
Manual Acceptance of a Network Request for PDP Aontext Activation A
The V.25ter 'A' (Answer) command may be used to accept a network request for a PDP context activation announced by
the unsolicited result code RING. The modem responds with CONNECT, enters V.25ter online data state and follows the
same procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with no <cid> value specified. It is an error to issue the 'A'
command when there is no outstanding network request.
Manual Rrejection of a Network Request for PDP Context Activation H
The V.25ter 'H' or 'H0' (On-hook) command may be used to reject a network request for PDP context activation
announced by the unsolicited result code RING. The modem responds with OK. It is an error to issue the 'H' command
when there is no outstanding network request.
Note: This is an extension to the usage of the 'H' command that is described in ITU-T V.25ter.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
163
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Automatic Response to a Network Request for PDP
Context Activation +CGAUTO
Description:
The set command disables or enables an automatic positive response (auto-answer) to the receipt of a
Request PDP Context Activation message from the network. It also provides control over the use of the
V.25ter basic commands 'S0', 'A and 'H' for handling network requests for PDP context activation. The
setting does not affect the issuing of the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING.
The test command returns values of <n> supported by the modem as a compound value.
When the +CGAUTO=0 command is received, the modem will not perform a GPRS detach if it is
attached. Subsequently, when the modem announces a network request for PDP context activation by
issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING, the DTE may manually accept or reject the
request by issuing the +CGANS command or may simply ignore the network request.
When the +CGAUTO=1 command is received, the modem will attempt to perform a GPRS attach if it is
not already attached. Failure will result in ERROR or, if enabled, +CME ERROR being returned to the
DTE. Subsequently, when the modem announces a network request for PDP context activation by
issuing the unsolicited result code RING or +CRING to the DTE, this is followed by the intermediate
result code CONNECT. The modem then enters V.25ter online data state and follows the same
procedure as it would after having received a +CGANS=1 with <cid> values specified.
Values:
<n>
0
1
2
3
Note:
simultaneously.
Syntax:
Turn off automatic response for GPRS only
For <n> = 0 GPRS network requests are manually accepted or rejected by the +CGANS
command.
Turn on automatic response for GPRS only
For <n> = 1 GPRS network requests are automatically accepted according to the description
above.
Modem compatibility mode, GPRS only
For <n> = 2, automatic acceptance of GPRS network requests is controlled by the 'S0'
command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H' commands, respectively, to accept and reject
GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.) Incoming circuit switched calls can be neither
manually nor automatically answered
Modem compatibility mode, GPRS and circuit switched calls (default)
For <n> = 3, automatic acceptance of both GPRS network requests and incoming circuit
switched calls is controlled by the 'S0' command. Manual control uses the 'A' and 'H'
commands, respectively, to accept and reject GPRS requests. (+CGANS may also be used.)
Circuit switched calls are handled as described elsewhere in this specification.
In class C GPRS the modem can’t receive GPRS and GSM incoming calls
Command Syntax: AT+CGAUTO
Command
Possible response(s)
AT+CGAUTO=[<n>] OK
ERROR
AT+CGAUTO?
+CGAUTO: <n>
OK
AT+CGAUTO=?
+CGAUTO: (0-3)
OK
Example:
AT+CGAUTO=?
+CGAUTO: (0-2)
OK
AT+CGAUTO?
+CGAUTO: 2
OK
AT+CGAUTO=0
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
164
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Manual Response to a Network Request for PDP
Context Activation +CGANS
Description:
The execution command requests the modem to respond to a network request for GPRS PDP context
activation which has been signaled to the DTE by the RING or +CRING: unsolicited result code. The
<response> parameter allows the DTE to accept or reject the request.
If <response> is 0, the request is rejected and the modem returns OK to the DTE.
If <response> is 1, the following procedure is followed by the modem.
PDP context activation procedures take place prior to or during the PDP startup.
One <cid> may be specified in order to provide the values needed for the context activation request.
During the PDP startup procedure the modem has the PDP type and the PDP address provided by the
network in the Request PDP Context Activation message.
If a <cid> is given, this information must match with the PDP type and PDP address in the network
request as follows The PDP type must match exactly.
The PDP addresses are considered to match if they are identical or if the address in the context
definition is unspecified. If any of this information is in conflict, the command will fail.
The context is activated using the values for PDP type and PDP address provided by the network,
together with the other information found in the PDP context definition. An APN may or may not be
required, depending on the application.
If no <cid> is given, the modem will attempt to activate the context using the values for PDP type and
PDP address provided by the network, together with any other relevant information known to the
modem. The other context parameters will be set to their default values.
If the activation is successful, data transfer may proceed.
After data transfer is complete, and the layer 2 protocol termination procedure has completed
successfully, the V.25ter command state is re-entered and the modem returns the final result code OK.
In the event of an erroneous termination or a failure to startup, the V.25ter command state is re-entered
and the modem returns the final result code NO CARRIER or, if enabled, +CME ERROR. Attach,
activate and other errors may be reported. It is also an error to issue the +CGANS command when
there is no outstanding network request.
This command may be used in both normal and modem compatibility modes.
Values:
<response> A numeric parameter which specifies how the request should be responded to.
0
reject the request
1
accept and request that the PDP context be activated
If <response> is omitted it is assumed to be 0. Other values are reserved and will result in the
ERROR response.
<cid>: a numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition.
Command Syntax: AT+CGANS
Syntax:
Command
AT+CGANS=[<response>,
[<cid>]]
AT+CGANS=?
Possible response(s)
OK
ERROR
+CGANS: (list of supported <response>s), (list of supported <L2P>s)
OK
Example:
+CRING: GPRS "IP", "122.41.74.238"
AT+CGANS=1
CONNECT
AT+CGANS=?
+CGANS= (0-1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
165
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR
Description:
The execution command returns a list of PDP addresses for the specified context identifiers.
The test command returns a list of defined <cid>s.
Values:
<cid>
A numeric parameter which specifies a particular PDP context definition. If no <cid> is
specified, the addresses for all defined contexts are returned.
<PDP_address> A string that identifies the modem in the address space applicable to the PDP. The
address may be static or dynamic. For a static address, it will be the one set by the
+CGDCONT command when the context was defined. For a dynamic address it will be the
one assigned during the last PDP context activation that used the context definition
referred to by <cid>. <PDP_address> is omitted if none is available.
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CGPADDR
Command
Possible response(s)
AT+CGPADDR=[<cid> [,<cid> [,…]]] +CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>
[<CR><LF>+CGPADDR: <cid>,<PDP_addr>
[...]]
OK
AT+CGPADDR=?
+CGPADDR: (list of defined <cid>s)
OK
Example:
In this example, 1 <cid> is defined:
AT+CGPADDR=1
+CGPADDR=1,"107.210.5.4"
OK
AT+CGPADDR=?
+CGAPDDR= (1)
OK
AT+CGPADDR
+CGPADDR: 1,
Cellular Result Codes +CRC
Description:
This command enables a more detailed ring indication, in case of incoming call (voice or data). Instead
of the string “RING”, an extended string is used to indicate which type of call is ringing (e.g. +CRING:
VOICE).
These extended indications are:
+CRING: ASYNC
+CRING: REL ASYNC
+CRING: VOICE
+CRING: GPRS
Values:
Syntax:
for asynchronous transparent
for asynchronous non-transparent
for normal speech.
GPRS network request for PDP context activation
If the modem is unable to announce to the DTE the network's request (for example it is in V.25ter online
data state) the modem reject the request. No corresponding unsolicited result code is issued when the
modem returns to a command state.
No parameters
Command Syntax: AT+CRC
Command
AT+CRC=0
Note: Extended reports disabled
AT+CRC=1
Note: Extended reports enabled
AT+CRC?
AT+CRC=?
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
+CRC: 1
OK
+CRC: (0,1)
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
166
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Service Reporting Control +CR
Description:
This command enables a more detailed service reporting for incoming or outgoing calls. Before sending
the CONNECT response to the application, the GSM modem will precisely define the type of data
connection being established.
These report types are:
+CR: ASYNC
+CR: REL ASYNC
+CR: GPRS
Values:
Syntax:
For asynchronous transparent
For asynchronous non-transparent
For GPRS
No parameters
Command syntax: AT+CR
Command
AT+CR=0
Note: Extended reports disabled
AT+CR=1
Note: Extended reports enabled
Possible responses
OK
Note: Command valid
OK
Note: Command valid
Extended Error Report +CEER
Description:
This command gives the reason of the call release when the last call setup (originating or answering)
failed. New indication for GPRS is the reason of the last unsuccessful PDP context activation and the
last GPRS detach or PDP context activation.
Values:
No parameters
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+CEER
Command
ATD123456789 ;
Note: Outgoing voice call
AT+CEER
Note: Ask for reason of release
Possible Responses
NO CARRIER
Note: Call setup failure
+CEER: Error <xxx>
OK
Note: <xxx>is the cause information element values form GSM
recommendation 04.08 or specific Call accepted
“NO CARRIER” indicates that the AT+CEER information is available for a failure diagnostic.
See Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation in Appendix A.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
167
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS
Description:
This command modifies some of the GPRS parameters:
• The ATTACH-STATUS (the modem doesn’t automatically make a GPRS attachment after
initialization)
• The PDP-INIT-STATUS (activate automatically some defined PDP Contexts after initialization)
and
• The user-defined multislot class. This parameter represents the GPRS class chosen by the user
to perform power saving (by reducing TX [or uplink] time slots).
In addition, this command allows you to:
• Automatically set some defined PDP contexts to be activated after initialization.
• Set some parameters for the PALM® OS software: PPP Silent Mode (PPP waits for PPP Client
to start the dialog) and Slow CONNECT due to the delay of the processing of PALM® OK, the
CONNECT is sent one second after the dialing command request.
Important Note: The modem must be rebooted to activate the new setup except for <mode> 3, 5, 6
and 7 (refer to the Values section).
Values:
<mode>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
A numeric parameter which specifies a GPRS parameter:
ATTACH-STATUS (the modem doesn’t automatically make a GPRS attachment after init)
PDP-INIT-STATUS (declare some PDP contexts liable to be activated automatically after
initialization by <mode>=2)
Set “ACTIVABLE” automatically after init a define PDP context
PPP silent mode
Definition of the GPRS multislot class
Slow CONNECT for PALM® OS
PPP Filtering
Automatic GPRS roaming inter-operator: if activated, the modem automatically reattaches itself to the network and reactivates its PDP context by changing the operator
when reaching border areas.
Notes:
• If <mode>=0, 1, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 <cid> and <class> will be ignored.
• If <mode>=0, 1, 2, 3, 5, or 6 <class> will be ignored.
•
If <mode>=4 <parameter> and <cid> will be ignored. The modem must be restarted to
take the modification into account.
•
PPP Filtering is a test-purpose functionality. It avoids sending some OS-specific frames on
the radio link, for accurate transfer rate measurements.
<parameter> A numeric parameter that controls the operation defined by <mode> if it is equal to 0, 1, 2
or 3
0
Operation Off (disabled)
1
Operation On (enabled)
<cid>
<class>
(PDP Context Identifier). A numeric parameter that specifies a particular PDP context
definition. The parameter is local to the DTE-modem interface and is used in other PDP
context-related commands. The range of values is 0 to 4.
GPRS multislot class number. It may be loser than the maximum possible class. Possible
values are 2, 8, 10, 12. Note that the range of values is dependent upon the modem.
Multislot
Class
Minimum Number of
Slots
Tta
Ttb
Tra
Trb
3
2
3
1
3
1
2
1
Type
of MS
2
8
Maximum
Number of Slots
Rx Tx
Sum
2
1
3
4
1
5
10
12
4
4
3
2
1
1
2
4
5
5
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
Notes:
When the modem is set in CG class, the modem always makes an automatic GPRS attachment after
initialization. AT+WGPRS? always gives +WGPRS: 0,0 for the parameter 0.
The default value for mode 7 is 0. In this case, no automatic GPRS reconnection to a new operator is done
when reaching border areas.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
168
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Syntax:
Command Syntax: AT+WGPRS=<mode>,<parameter>,[<cid>],[<class>]
Command
AT+WGPRS=?
AT+WGPRS?
AT+WGPRS=2,1,3
Note: Set ACTIVABLE to ON on PDP context
3
AT+WGPRS=7,1
Note: Set automatic re-attachment to the
network and reactivation of PDP context in
case of change of operator for MCC/MNC
AT+WGPRS=4,,,18
Note: Choose GPRS multislot class 8
AT+WGPRS=?
Note: Request range of values
AT+WGPRS?
Note:
− Automatic re-attachment at init not activated
− Automatic reactivation of PDP context at init
not activated
− 3 PDP contexts and automatic reactivation
only for cid 1
−
−
−
−
−
PPP silent mode activated
GPRS class is 8
GPRS slow connect activated
PPP filtering activated
Automatic re-attachment and PDP
reactivation at operator board area
Possible Responses
+WGPRS: <mode>, <parameter1>,[<cid>]
[<CR><LF>+WGPRS: <mode>,
<parameter>,[<cid>]
[...]]
OK
+WGPRS:<mode>(list of supported
<parameter>),[(list of supported
<cid>)][<CR><LF>+WGPRS:<mode>(list of
supported <parameter>),[(list of supported
<cid>)] [...]]
OK
OK
OK
OK
AT+WGPRS: (0-7),(0-1),(0-4),(2,8,10,12)
OK
+WGPRS: 0,0
+WGPRS: 1,0
+WGPRS: 2,1,1
+WGPRS: 2,0,2
+WGPRS: 2,0,3
+WGPRS: 2,0,4
+WGPRS: 3,1
+WGPRS: 4,8
+WGPRS: 5,1
+WGPRS: 6,1
+WGPRS: 7,1
OK
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
169
Chapter 15 – GPRS Commands
Examples of Full GPRS AT Commands
Activation of an IP PDP Context
Example 1
AT +CGDCONT=1, "IP", "internet"; +GCDCONT=2, "IP", "abc.com"
OK
ATD*99***1#
CONNECT
Example 2
AT +CGCLASS=”CG”
OK
+CGREG: 1
AT +CGDCONT=1, "IP", "internet"
OK
AT +CGQREQ=1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
AT +CGQMIN=1,1,4,5,2,14
OK
AT +CGATT=1
OK
AT +CGACT=1,1
OK
//Remark about +CGDATA: the goal of this command is the same as ATD*99***
AT +CGDATA=1
CONNECT
…….
Data transfer
…….
+CGEV: NW DETACH
Network Request
AT+CGAUTO=0
OK
+CRING: GPRS "IP", "211.45.89.152"
AT+CGANS=1
CONNECT
……. Data transfer
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
170
Chapter 16 – Other AT Commands
Chapter 16 – Other AT
Commands
V.25ter Recommendation
The commands not listed in this document are not supported. For these commands, the product will then answer with
"ERROR". All modulation control, error control and data compression commands are not recognized. An "ERROR" string
will be returned.
GSM 07.05 Recommendation
All the 07.05 commands not described in this manual are not implemented. The product will answer "ERROR" to these
commands.
GSM 07.07 Recommendation
All the 07.07 commands not described in this manual are not implemented. The product will answer "ERROR" to these
commands.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
171
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Appendix A – Result Codes,
Failure Causes, Other Tables
Chapter Summary
The following tables are included in Appendix A:
• ME error result code: +CME ERROR: <error>
• Message service failure result code: +CMS ERROR <er>
• Specific error results codes
• Failure Cause from GMS 05.08 recommendation (+CEER)
• Specific Failure Cause for +CEER
• GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile originating SM-transfer
• Unsolicited result codes
• Final result codes
• Intermediate result codes
• Parameter storage
• GMS sequences list
• Operator names
• CPHS Information field
• CSP constraints
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
172
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
ME Error Result Code: +CME ERROR: <error>
<error>
3
4
5
10
11
12
13
16
Meaning
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
PH-SIM PIN required (SIM lock)
SIM not inserted
SIM PIN required
SIM PUK required
SIM failure
Incorrect password
17
18
SIM PIN2 required
SIM PUK2 required
20
21
22
Memory full
Invalid index
Not found
24
26
27
30
32
40
42
Text string too long
Dial string too long
Invalid characters in dial string
No network service
Network not allowed – emergency calls only
Network personal PIN required (Network lock)
Network personal PIN required (Network subset
lock)
Network personal PIN required (Service Provider
lock)
Network personal PIN required (Corporate lock)
Illegal MS (#3)
Illegal ME (#6)
Mobile Station is not allowed to operate in GPRS
Mobile Station is not allowed to operate in the
requested PLMN
Mobile Station is not allowed to make location
updating in this area
Roaming not allowed in this area (#13)
service option not supported (#32)
requested service option not subscribed (#33)
service option temporarily out of order (#34)
unspecified GPRS error
PDP authentication failure
invalid mobile class
44
46
103
106
107
111
112
113
132
133
134
148
149
150
Resulting from the following commands
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 3)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 4)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 5)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 10)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 11)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 12)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 13)
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CLCK, +CPWD, +CPIN,
+CPIN2 (+CME ERROR: 16)
+CPBW (FDN), +CLCK (FDN),
+CACM, +CAMM, +CPUC, +CPBW (FDN), +CPIN,
+CPIN2, +CLCK (FDN), +CPWD
+CPBW
+CPBR, +CPBW, ATD>[mem]index, +WMGO
+CPBF, +CPBP, +CPBN, +CGSN, +WOPN,
ATD>[mem]”name”
+CPBW, +CPIN, +CPIN2, +CLCK, +CPWD
+CPBW, ATD, +CCFC
+CPBW
+VTS, +COPS=?, +CLCK, +CCFC, +CCWA, +CUSD
+COPS
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 40)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 42)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 44)
All GSM 07.07 commands (+CME ERROR: 46)
+CGATT
+CGATT
+CGATT
+CGATT
+CGATT
+CGATT
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
All GPRS commands
+CGACT +CGDATA ATD*99
+CGCLASS +CGATT
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
173
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Message Service Failure Result Code +CMS ERROR
<er> is defined as below:
<er>
Meaning
1 to 127 Error cause values from the GSM
recommendation 04.11 Annex E-2
301
SMS service of ME reserved
302
Operation not allowed
303
Operation not supported
304
Invalid PDU mode parameter
305
Invalid text mode parameter
310
SIM not inserted
311
SIM PIN required
312
PH-SIM PIN required
313
SIM failure
316 SIM PUK required
317 SIM PIN2 required
318 SIM PUK2 required
321 Invalid memory index
322 SIM memory full
330 SC address unknown
340 no +CNMA acknowledgement expected
Resulting from the following commands
+CMGS, +CMSS
+CSMS (with +CMS: ERROR 301)
All SMS commands (+CMSS, +CMGL, +CPMS, +CSMP…
All SMS commands
+CMGS, +CMGW
+CMGS, +CMGW, +CMSS
All SMS commands
All SMS commands
All SMS commands
All SMS commands
All SMS commands
All SMS commands
All SMS commands
+CMGR, +CMSS, +CMGD
+CMGW
+CSCA?, +CMSS, +CMGS
+CNMA
Specific Error Result Codes
<error>
500
512
513
514
515
517
518
519
520
526
527
528
529
531
532
533
536
537
538
539
541
543
Meaning
unknown error.
MM establishment failure (for SMS).
Lower layer failure (for SMS)
CP error (for SMS).
Please wait, init or command processing in progress.
SIM Toolkit facility not supported.
SIM Toolkit indication not received.
Reset product to activate or change a new echo cancellation
algo.
Automatic abort about get plmn list for an incoming call.
PIN deactivation forbidden with this SIM card.
Please wait, RR or MM is busy. Retry your selection later.
Location update failure. Emergency calls only.
PLMN selection failure. Emergency calls only.
SMS not sent: the <da> is not in FDN phonebook, and FDN lock
is enabled. (for SMS)
Embedded application is activated so objects flash are not erased
Missing or Unknown APN
Class locked: A command has been launched from a port. The
effect is to lock all commands belonging to the same class. If
another port launches a command of this class, this error will
occur as long as the class is not released (at first command’s
completion time).
Phonebook group full.
Not enough space to copy SMS
Invalid SMS
Open AT® application and AT software version do not match
CMUX connection is refused by remote, after a restart of CMUX
protocol by the modem, due to a 27.010 connection loss during
virtual channels establishment.
Results from the following commands
All commands
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 512)
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 513)
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 514)
All commands ( “+CME ERROR: 515” or
“+CMS ERROR: 515”) except ATHO,
ATH1, AT+WOIR, AT+WIOW,
AT+CFUN=1, AT+CLCC, AT+WAC,
AT+CPAS, AT+VGR, AT+VTS,
AT+SPEAKER
+STGI
+STGI
+ECHO, +VIP
+COPS=?
+CLCK
+COPS
+COPS
+COPS
+CMGS, +CMSS (+CMS ERROR: 531)
+WOPEN
ATD*99 +GACT +CGDATA
All commands
+CPBW
+WMCP
+CMGR
+WOPEN
+CMUX
continued on next page
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
174
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Continued: Specific Error Result Codes
<error> Meaning
544
CMUX connection Timeout (no answer from the remote); i.e., no
DLCO opened response.
545
A CMUX session has been started on a physical UART, and the
user tries to start another CMUX session on another physical
UART. The error, +CME ERROR: 545 is raised on the UART
where AT+CMUX command is trying to be started again.
546
Emergency call is not allowed without SIM
547
Emergency call is allowed without SIM
548
No flash objects to delete
549
The phone number of the requested phonebook entry is empty
550
Unable to resize the Application & Data storage place since the
new required size would overlap with the current Open AT®
application storage place
551
Service abort request has failed
552
Unsolicited responses for autodiag or charge indication are
already activated on another port
Results from the following commands
+CMUX
+CMUX
+COPS
+COPS
+WOPEN
ATD><index>[;],ATD><phonebook><index>[;]
+WOPEN
AT+WAC
+WDIAG, +WBCM
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
175
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation +CEER
Cause Value
Diagnostic
1
Unassigned (unallocated) number
3
No route to destination
6
Channel unacceptable
8
Operator determined barring
16
Normal call clearing
17
User busy
18
No user responding
19
User alerting, no answer
21
Call rejected
22
Number changed
26
Non selected user clearing
27
Destination out of order
28
Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29
Facility rejected
30
Response to STATUS ENQUIRY
31
Normal, unspecified
34
No circuit/channel available
38
Network out of order
41
Temporary failure
42
Switching equipment congestion
43
Access information discarded
44
Requested circuit/channel not available
47
Resources unavailable, unspecified
49
Quality of service unavailable
50
Requested facility not subscribed
55
Incoming calls barred with in the CUG
57
Bearer capability not authorized
58
Bearer capability not presently available
63
Service or option not available, unspecified
65
Bearer service not implemented
68
ACM equal to or greater than ACMmax
69
Requested facility not implemented
70
Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available
79
Service or option not implemented, unspecified
81
Invalid transaction identifier value
87
User not member of CUG
88
Incompatible destination
91
Invalid transit network selection
95
Semantically incorrect message
96
Invalid mandatory information
97
Message type non-existent or not implemented
98
Message type not compatible with protocol state
99
Information element non-existent or not implemented
100
Conditional IE error
101
Message not compatible with protocol state
102
Recovery on timer expiry
111
Protocol error, unspecified
127
Interworking, unspecified
224
MS requested detach
225
NWK request Detach
226
Unsuccessful attach cause NO SERVICE
227
Unsuccessful attach cause NO ACCESS
228
Unsuccessful attach cause GPRS SERVICE REFUSED
229
PDP deactivation requested by NWK
230
PDP deactivation cause LLC link activation failed
231
PDP deactivation cause NWK reactivation with same TI
232
PDP deactivation cause GMM abort
233
PDP deactivation cause LLC or SNDCP failure
234
PDP unsuccessful activation cause GMM error
Continued on next page.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
176
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Continued: Failure Cause from GSM 04.08 Recommendation +CEER
Cause Value
235
236
237
238
239
Diagnostic
PDP unsuccessful activation cause NWK reject
PDP unsuccessful activation cause NO NSAPI available
PDP unsuccessful activation cause SM refuse
PDP unsuccessful activation cause MMI ignore
PDP unsuccessful activation cause Nb Max Session Reach
All Other Values in the Range
[0,31]
[32,47]
[48,63]
[64,79]
[80,95]
[96,111]
[112,127]
Will Be Treated as Cause
31
47
63
79
95
111
127
Specific Failure Cause for +CEER
Cause value
240
241
252
253
254
255
Diagnostic
FDN is active and number is not in FDN
Call operation not allowed
Call barring on outgoing calls
Call barring on incoming calls
Call impossible
Lower layer failure
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
177
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
GSM 04.11 Annex E-2: Mobile Originating SM-Transfer
These error causes could appear for SMS commands (+CMGS, +CMSS, +CMGD…)
Error #
1
8
10
Error Label
Unassigned
(unallocated) number
Operator determined
barring
Call barred
21
Short message transfer
rejected
27
Destination out of
service
28
29
30
Unidentified subscriber
Facility rejected
Unknown subscriber
38
Network out of order
41
Temporary failure
42
47
Congestion
Resources unavailable,
unspecified
Requested facility not
subscribed
Requested facility not
implemented
Invalid short message
transfer reference value
Invalid message,
unspecified
Invalid mandatory
information
50
69
81
95
96
97
98
99
111
127
Description
The destination requested by the Mobile Station cannot be reached because,
although the number is in a valid format, it is not currently assigned (allocated).
The MS has tried to send a mobile originating short message when the MS's
network operator or service provider has forbidden such transactions.
The outgoing call barred service applies to the short message service for the
called destination.
The equipment sending this cause does not wish to accept this short message,
although it could have accepted the short message. This cause is neither busy
nor incompatible.
The destination indicated by the Mobile Station cannot be reached because the
interface to the destination is not functioning correctly. The term "not functioning
correctly" indicates that a signaling message was unable to be delivered to the
remote user; e.g., a physical layer or data link layer failure at the remote user,
user equipment off-line, etc.
The subscriber is not registered in the PLMN (e.g., IMSI not known)
The facility requested by the Mobile Station is not supported by the PLMN.
The subscriber is not registered in the HLR (e.g., IMSI or directory number is
not allocated to a subscriber).
The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is likely to last a
relatively long period of time; e.g., immediately reattempting the short message
transfer is not likely to be successful.
The network is not functioning correctly and the condition is not likely to last a
long period of time; e.g., the Mobile Station may wish to try another short
message transfer attempt almost immediately.
The short message service cannot be serviced because of high traffic.
This cause is used to report a resource unavailable event only when no other
cause applies.
The requested short message service could
The network is unable to provide the requested short message service.
The equipment sending this cause has received a message with a short
message reference which is not currently in use on the MS-network interface.
This cause is used to report an invalid message event only when no other
cause in the invalid message class applies.
The equipment sending this cause has received a message where a mandatory
information element is missing and/or has a content error (the two cases are
undistinguishable).
Message type nonThe equipment sending this cause has received a message with a message
existent or not
type it does not recognize either because this is a message not defined or
implemented
defined but not implemented by the equipment sending this cause.
Message not compatible The equipment sending this cause has received a message such that the
with short message
procedures do not indicate that this is a permissible message to receive while in
protocol state
the short message transfer state.
Information element non- The equipment sending this cause has received a message which includes
existent or not
unrecognized information elements because the information element identifier is
implemented
not defined or it is defined but not implemented by the equipment sending the
cause.
However, the information element is not required to be present in the message
so that the equipment sends the cause to process the message.
Protocol error,
This cause is used to report a protocol error event only when no other cause
unspecified
applies.
Interworking, unspecified There has been interworking with a network which does not provide causes for
actions it takes; thus, the precise cause for a message which is being sent
cannot be ascertained.
Note: All values other than specified should be treated as error #41.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
178
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Unsolicited Result Codes
Verbose Result Code
+CALA: < time string>,<index>
+CBM: <length><pdu> (PDU) or
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages>…
(Text mode)
+CBMI: “BM”,<index>
Numeric
(V0 set)
As verbose
As verbose
Description
Alarm notification
Cell Broadcast Message directly displayed
As verbose
Cell Broadcast Message stored in mem at location
<index>
+CCCM: <ccm>
As verbose
Current Call Meter value
+CCED: <values>
As verbose (specific) Cell Environment Description indication
+CCWA:<number>,<type>, <class> [,<alpha>] As verbose
Call Waiting number
+CDS: <fo>, <mr>… (text mode)
As verbose
SMS status report after sending a SMS
or +CDS: <length>,… (PDU)
+CDSI: <mem>,<index>
As verbose
Incoming SMS Status Report after sending a SMS,
stored in <mem> (“SR”) at location <index>
+CKEV: <keynb>
As verbose
Key press or release
+CLIP: <number>, <type> [,,,<alpha>]
As verbose
Incoming Call Presentation
+CMT: <oa>…(text mode)
As verbose
Incoming message directly displayed
or +CMT: [<alpha>,]… (PDU)
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
As verbose
Incoming message stored in <mem> (“SM”) at
location <index>
+CREG: <stat> [,<lac>,<ci>]
As verbose
Network registration indication
+CRING: <type>
As verbose
Incoming call type (VOICE...)
+CSQ: <RxLev>,99
As verbose
Automatic RxLev indication with AT+CCED=1,8
+CSSU: <code2>[<number>,<type>]
As verbose
Supplementary service notification during a call
+STIN: <ind>
As verbose (specific) SIM Toolkit Indication
+WIND: <IndicationNb> [,<CallId>]
As verbose (specific) Specific unsolicited indication (SIM Insert/Remove,
End of init, Reset, Alerting, Call creation/release)
+WVMI: <LineId>,<Status>
As verbose (specific) Voice Mail Indicator notification (cf. +CPHS)
+WDCI: <LineId>,<Status>
As verbose (specific) Diverted call indicator
RING
2
Incoming call signal from network
+CIEV
As verbose (specific) Indicator event reporting
+CUSD: <m>,[<str>,<dcs>]
As verbose
USSD unsolicited response
Final Result Codes
Verbose Result Code
+CME ERROR: <err>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
BUSY
ERROR
NO ANSWER
NO CARRIER
OK
RING
Numeric (V0 set)
As verbose
As verbose
7
4
8
3
0
2
Description
Error from GSM 07.05 commands
Error from SMS commands (07.07)
Busy signal detected
Command not accepted
Connection completion timeout
Connection terminated
Acknowledges correct execution of a command line
Incoming call signal from network
Intermediate Result Codes
Verbose Result Code
+COLP:<number>,<type>
+CR: <type>
+ILRR: <rate>
CONNECT 300
CONNECT 1200
CONNECT 1200/75
CONNECT 2400
CONNECT 4800
CONNECT 9600
CONNECT 14400
+CSSI: <code1>[,<index>]
Numeric (V0 set)
as verbose
as verbose
as verbose
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
As verbose
Description
Outgoing Call Presentation
Outgoing Call report control
Local TA-TE data rate
Data connection at 300 bauds
Data connection at 1200 bauds
Data connection at 1200/75 bauds
Data connection at 2400 bauds
Data connection at 4800 bauds
Data connection at 9600 bauds
Data connection at 14400 bauds
Supplementary service notification during a call setup
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
179
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Parameter Storage Mode
Parameter Storage Mode
AT&W
Command
(E2P)
Command
(E2P)
AT+CSAS
(SIM, E2P)
General commands
+CMEE
X
+CSCS
X
+WPCS
X
Call Control commands
%D
ATS0
X
+CICB
X
+CSNS
X
+ECHO
X
X
AT&F (SIM,
E2P)
X
X
X
0
“PCCP437”
“TRANSPARENT”
X
X
X
X
X
0
0 (no auto-answer)
2 (speech)
0 (voice)
,1,0,3,10,7 (Algo ID 1)
,3,30,8000,256 (Algo ID 3)
1,2
0 (Spk 1 & Mic 1)
128 (speaker 1)
32 (speaker 2)
32 (mic 1 & ctrl 1)
0 (others)
+SIDET
+SPEAKER
+VGR
X
X
X
X
X
X
+VGT
X
X
Network Service commands
+COPS
X
+CREG
X
Default values
X
X
X
0,2
0
X
X
X
0
0
0
X
X
X
0,1,0,0,0
1 (text)
0
SIM dependant (phase 2)
0
1,167,0,0
0
0
Supplementary Services commands
+CCUG
X
+CCWA
X
+CLIP
X
+COLP
X
+CSSN
X
+CUSD
X
X
X
X
X
X
0,0,0
0
0
0
0,0
0
Data commands
%C
\N
+CBST
+CR
+CRC
+CRLP
+DOPT
+DS
+DR
+ILRR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
0
0
0,0,1
0
0
61,61,48,6,1
1,1
3,0,2048,20
0
0
Phonebook commands
+CSVM
+WAIP
X
+WCOS
SMS commands
+CNMI
+CMGF
+CMMS
+CSCA
+CSDH
+CSMP
+CSMS
+WUSS
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
180
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Parameter Storage Mode
AT&W
Command
(E2P)
Command
(E2P)
V24 – V25 commands
&C
X
&D
X
&S
X
E
X
Q
X
V
X
+ICF
X
+IFC
X
+IPR
X
+WMUX
X
Specific commands
+ADC
+CMER
X
+CPHS
AT&F (SIM,
E2P)
X
X
X
X
X
+WCCS
X
+WCDM
+WCDP
+WDR
+WIND
+WIOM
+WRIM
+WSVG
+WVR
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
SIM Toolkit commands
+STSF
X
GPRS commands
+GCAUTO
+GCCLASS
+GCDCONT
+GCEREP
+GCREG
+GCSMS
+WGPRS
AT+CSAS
(SIM, E2P)
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1
2
1
1
0
1
3,4
2,2
115200
0
0
0,0
1,0 for VMI
2,0 for MBN
4,0 for DCI
Custom table is the same as
PCCP437 to GSM table
0,0
0
0,1
0
May be 1023,0 or 0,0
0
0
5
0,”1F6BFFFF1F”,3,1
X
3
“B”
X
X
0
0
1
0,1
1,0
3,0
5,0
6,0
X
X
X
X
Default values
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
181
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
GSM Sequences List
In accordance with GSM Technical Specification 02.30, the product supports the following GSM sequences, which can
be used through the ATD and the +CKPD commands.
Security
**04*OLDPIN*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#
**042*OLDPIN2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#
**05*PUK*NEWPIN*NEWPIN#
**052*PUK2*NEWPIN2*NEWPIN2#
*#06#
Change PIN code
Change PIN2 code
Unlock PIN code
Unlock PIN2 code
Show the IMEI number
Call Forwarding
*SC# or
*SC**bs#
**SC*PhoneNumber# or
**SC*PhoneNumber*BS# or
**SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T# or
*SC*PhoneNumber# or
*SC*PhoneNumber*BS# or
*SC*PhoneNumber*[BS]*T#
*#SC#
*#SC**BS#
#SC#
#SC**BS#
##SC#
##SC**BS#
Activate
or
Register and activate
or
or
or
or
or
Check status
or
Deactivate
or
Unregistered and deactivate
or
The Service codes (SC) are:
002
all call forwarding
004
all conditional call forwarding
21
call forwarding unconditional
61
call forwarding on no answer
62
call forwarding on not reachable
67
call busy
The Network service codes (BS) are:
No code
All tele and bearer services
10
All teleservices
11
Telephony
12
All data teleservices
16
Short Message Services
17
Voice Group Call Service
18
Voice Broadcast Service
19
All teleservices except SMS
20
All bearer services
21
All asynchronous services
22
All synchronous services
24
All data circuit synchronous
25
All data circuit asynchronous
26
All dedicated packet access
27
All dedicated PAD access
Note: The no reply condition timer (T) is only used for SC = 002, 004 or 61.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
182
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Call Barring
Note: SC values are listed below. BS values are covered in Call Forwarding
*SC*Password#
*SC*Password*BS#
*#SC#
*#SC**BS#
#SC*Password#
#SC*Password*BS#
**03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
**03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
*03*330*OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
*03**OLDPWD*NEWPWD*NEWPWD#
Activate
or
Check status
or
Deactivate
or
Change password for call barring
or
or
or
The Service codes (SC) are:
33
call barring of outgoing call
330
all barring service (only for deactivation)
331
call barring of outgoing international call
332
call barring of outgoing international calls except to HPLMN
333
all outgoing barring service (only for deactivation)
35
call barring of incoming calls
351
call barring of incoming calls if roaming
353
all incoming barring service (only for deactivation)
Note: Network service codes (BS) are the same the call forwarding sequences.
Call Waiting
*43*BS#
*#43*BS#
#43*BS#
Activate
Check status
Deactivate
Number Presentation
*#30#
*#31#
*31#PhoneNumber
#31#PhoneNumber
*#76#
CLIP check status
CLIR check status
Suppress CLIR for a voice call
Invoke CLIR for a voice call
COLP check status
Operator Names
Refer to the following documentation:
•
SE13 (22nd August, 2005)
•
NAPRD10 2.6.8
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
183
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
CPHS Information Field
CPHS Information
Description
Data Field
Bit Field
All information
CSP service activated and allocated
SST service activated and allocated
Mailbox Number service activated and allocated
Operator Name Shortform service activated and allocated
Information Numbers service activated and allocated
RFU
RFU
RFU
Voice Message Waiting Indicator for Line 1
Voice Message Waiting Indicator for Line 2
Data Message Waiting Indicator
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Line 1
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Line 2
Call Forward Activated Indicator for Data
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Line 1 Mailbox Number Available
Line 2 Mailbox Number Available
Date Mailbox Number Available
EF Mn Updatable
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
25
None
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
184
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
CSP Constants
Service Group: Call Offering
Service
Call Forwarding Unconditional
Call Forwarding on User Busy
Call Forwarding on No Rely
Call Forwarding on User Not Reachable
Call Transfer
External Value
1
2
3
4
5
Service Group: Call Restriction
Service
Barring of All Outgoing Calls
Barring of Outgoing International Calls
Barring of Outgoing International Calls except those directed to
the Home PLMN country
Barring of All Outgoing Calls
BIC Roam
External Value
9
10
11
12
13
Service Group: Other Supplementary Services
Service
Multi-Party Service
Closed User Group
Advice of Charge
Perferential CUG
CUG Outgoing Access
External Value
17
18
19
20
21
Service Group: Group Completion
Service
Call Hold
Call Waiting
Completion of Call to Busy Subscriber
Restriction of the menus allowing use of user to user signaling
External Value
25
26
27
28
Service Group: Teleservices
Service
Short Message – Mobile Terminated
Short Message – Mobile Originated
Short Message – Cell Broadcast
Restricts menu options for the ability to set reply path active on
outgoing Short Messages
SMS Delivery Confirmation
Restriction of menus for SMS Protocol ID options
Validity Period, restriction of menus for SMS Validity period options
External Value
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Service Group: CPHS Teleservices
Service
Alternate Line Service
External Value
41
Service Group: Number Identification
Service
Calling Line Identification Presentation
Connected Line Identification Restriction
Connected Line Identification Presentation
Malicious Call Indicator
CLI per call mode – default block CLI – menu to send CLI
CLI per call mode – default block CLI – menu to block CLI
External Value
57
59
60
61
63
64
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
185
Appendix A – Result Codes, Failure Causes, Other Tables
Service Group: Phase 2+ Services
Service
Menus concerned with GPRS functionality
Menus concerned with High Speed Circuit Switched Data
functionality
ASCII Voice Group call menus
ASCII Voice Broadcast service menus
Multi Subscriber profile menus
Multi band: Restriction of menus allowing user to select a
particular GSM 900/1800 or 1900 band
External Value
65
66
67
68
69
70
Service Group: Value Added Services
Service
Restriction of menus options for manual PLMN selection
Restriction of menus options for Voice Mail or other similar menus
Restriction of menus options for the ability to send Short
Messages with type Paging
Restriction of menus options for the ability to send Short
Messages with type Email
Restriction of menus options for Data calls
Restriction of menus allowing the user to change language
External Value
73
74
75
76
78
80
Service Group: Information Numbers
Service
The ME shall only present information numbers to the user if this
field is set to FF
External Value
81
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
186
Appendix B – ME SIM Toolkit Support
Appendix B - ME SIM Toolkit
Support
TABLE 1 – Support of SIM Toolkit classes (This has been extracted from the GMS Technical Specification 11.14.)
Command description
CALL CONTROL
CELL BROADCAST DOWNLOAD
DISPLAY TEXT
EVENT DOWNLOAD
- MT call
- Call connected
- Call disconnected
- Location status
- User activity
- Idle screen available
GET INKEY
GET INPUT
GET READER STATUS
MENU SELECTION
MO SHORT MESSAGE CONTROL
MORE TIME
PERFORM CARD APDU
PLAY TONE
POLLING OFF
POLL INTERVAL
POWER ON CARD
POWER OFF CARD
PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION
REFRESH
RUN AT COMMAND
SELECT ITEM
SEND SHORT MESSAGE
SEND SS
SEND USSD
SET UP CALL
SET UP EVENT LIST
SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT
SET UP MENU
SMS-PP DOWNLOAD
TIMER MANAGEMENT
TIMER EXPIRATION
Class 1
Class 2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Lc
X
X
X
Lc
X
X
X
Lc
Lc
X
X
Lc
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Lc
Lc
X
X
$(MultipleCard)$
X
X
$(MultipleCard)$
X
X
X
$(MultipleCard)$
$(MultipleCard)$
X
X
X
$(AT$)
X
X
X
X
$(IdleModeText)$
X
X
X
Class 3
X
X
X
$(Timer)$
$(Timer)$
TABLE 2 - Compatibility between Available Terminal Responses and Proactive Commands
Proactive commands
Terminal Reponses
Backward Move (95)
Command beyond ME
capabilities (96)
ME currently unable to
process command (97)
No response from the user (98)
SIM session terminated by the
user (99)
Setup Display Get Get Setup Play Select Refresh Send Send Send Setup
(7)
Menu Text (1) Inkey Input Call Tone Item
SS SMS USSD event
(0)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(8)
(9)
(10) list (11)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
187
Appendix C – Structure of the Terminal Profile
Appendix C – Structure of the
Terminal Profile
First byte (Download):
b8
b7 b6
b5 b4
Second byte (Other):
b8
b7 b6
b5
b3
b4
b3
b2
b2
b1
Profile download
User choice
SMS-PP data download
Cell Broadcast data download
Menu selection
'9E XX' response code for SIM data
download error
Timer expiration
USSD string data object supported in
Call Control
RFU, bit=0
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
User choice
Set by product to 1
Command result
Call Control by SIM
Cell identity included in Call Control
by SIM
MO short message control by SIM
Handling of the alpha identifier
according to subclause 9.1.3
UCS2 Entry supported
UCS2 Display supported
Display of the extension text
User choice
User choice
User choice
Proactive SIM: DISPLAY TEXT
Proactive SIM: GET INKEY
Proactive SIM: GET INPUT
Proactive SIM: MORE TIME
Proactive SIM: PLAY TONE
Proactive SIM: POLL INTERVAL
Proactive SIM: POLLING OFF
Proactive SIM: REFRESH
User choice
User choice
User choice
User choice
User choice
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
User choice
Proactive SIM: SELECT ITEM
Proactive SIM: SEND SHORT
MESSAGE
Proactive SIM: SEND SS
Proactive SIM: SEND USSD
Proactive SIM: SET UP CALL
Proactive SIM: SET UP MENU
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (MCC, MNC, LAC,
Cell ID & IMEI)
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (NMR)
User choice
User choice
Set by product to 0
User choice
b1
4
Third byte (Proactive SIM):
b8
b7 b6
b5 b4
b3
b2
User choice
User choice
User choice
User choice
User choice
b1
4
Fourth byte (Proactive SIM):
b8
b7 b6
b5 b4
b3
b2
b1
4
User choice
User choice
User choice
User choice
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
188
Appendix C – Structure of the Terminal Profile
Fifth byte (Event driven information):
b8
b7 b6
b5 b4
b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: SET UP EVENT LIST
Event: MT call
Event: Call connected
Event: Call disconnected
Event: Location status
Event: User activity
Event: Idle screen available
Event: Card reader status
b8
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 1
User choice
User choice
Set by product to 0
Sixth byte: (reserved for Event driven information extensions)
b7 b6
b5 b4
b3 b2 b1
RFU, bit = 0
b8
Seventh byte (Multiple card proactive commands) for class "a"
b7 b6
b5 b4
b3 b2 b1
Proactive SIM: POWER ON CARD
Proactive SIM: POWER OFF CARD
Proactive SIM: PERFORM CARD APDU
Proactive SIM: GET READER STATUS
RFU, bit = 0
Eighth byte (Proactive SIM):
b8
b7 b6
b5 b4
b3
Ninth byte:
b8
b7 b6
b5
Subsequent bytes:
b8
b7 b6
b5
b4
b4
b3
b3
b2
b2
b2
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
b1
Proactive
SIM:
TIMER
MANAGEMENT (start, stop)
Proactive
SIM:
TIMER
MANAGEMENT (get current value)
Proactive SIM: PROVIDE LOCAL
INFORMATION (date, time and time
zone)
Binary choice in GET INKEY
SET UP IDLE MODE TEXT
RUN AT COMMAND (e.g.. class "b"
is supported)
2nd alpha identifier in SET UP
CALL
2nd
capability
configuration
parameter (see 9.1.6)
Set by product to 1
Sustained DISPLAY TEXT (see
6.4.1)
SEND DTMF command (see 6.4.24)
RFU, bit = 0
RFU, bit = 0
RFU, bit = 0
RFU, bit = 0
RFU, bit = 0
RFU, bit = 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 1
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
Set by product to 0
b1
Set by product to 0
b1
RFU, bit = 0
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
189
Appendix D – Command Type and Next Action Indicator
Appendix D – Command Type
and Next Action Indicator
This table has been extracted from the GMS Technical Specification 11.14.
Value
Name
'00'
'01'
'02'
'03'
'04'
'05'
'10'
'11'
'12'
'13'
'14'
'20'
'21'
'22'
'23'
'24'
'25'
'26'
'27'
'28'
'30'
'31'
'32'
'33'
'34'
'81'
REFRESH
MORE TIME
POLL INTERVAL
POLLING OFF
SET UP EVENT LIST
SET UP CALL
SEND SS
SEND USSD
SEND SHORT MESSAGE
SEND DTMF
PLAY TONE
DISPLAY TEXT
GET INKEY
GET INPUT
SELECT ITEM
SET UP MENU
PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION
TIMER MANAGEMENT
SET UP IDLE MODEL TEXT
PERFORM CARD APDU class "a" only
POWER ON CARD
class "a" only
POWER OFF CARD
class "a" only
GET READER STATUS
class "a" only
RUN AT COMMAND
class "b" only
End of the proactive session
Used for Type of
Command coding
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
not applicable
Used for Next
Action Indicator
coding
-
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
190
Appendix E – Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2
Appendix G – Coding of Alpha
fields in the SIM for UCS2
The coding can take one of the three following structures. If the ME supports UCS2 coding of alpha fields in the SIM, the
ME shall support all three coding schemes for character sets containing 128 characters or less; for character sets
containing more than 128 characters, the ME shall at least support the first coding scheme. If the alpha field record
contains GSM default alphabet characters only, then none of these schemes shall be used in that record. Within a record,
only one coding scheme, either GSM default alphabet, or one of the three described below, shall be used.
1. If the first byte in the alpha string is '0x80', then the other bytes are 16 bit UCS2 characters. The more significant
byte (MSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the lower numbered byte of the alpha field, and the less significant byte
(LSB) of the UCS2 character is coded in the higher numbered alpha field byte. In other words, byte 2 of the alpha
field contains the more significant byte (MSB) of the first UCS2 character, and byte 3 of the alpha field contains the
less significant byte (LSB) of the first UCS2 character (as shown below). Unused bytes shall be set to 'FF', and if the
alpha field has an even number of bytes, then the last (unusable) byte shall be set to 'FF'.
Example 1
Byte 1
'80'
2.
Byte 2
Ch1MSB
Byte 3
Ch1LSB
Byte 4
Ch2MSB
Byte 5
Ch2LSB
Byte 6
Ch3MSB
Byte 7
Ch3LSB
Byte 8
'FF'
Byte 9
'FF'
If the first byte of the alpha string is set to 0x'81', then the second byte contains a value indicating the number of
characters in the string. The third byte contains an 8-bit number that defines bits 15 to 8 of a 16-bit base pointer,
where bit 16 is set to zero, and bits 7 to 1 are also set to zero. These sixteen bits represent a base pointer to a "halfpage" in the UCS2 code space, to be used with some or all of the remaining bytes in the string. The fourth and
subsequent bytes in the string contain codings as follows:
• If bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining bits of the byte contain a GSM Default Alphabet character
•
If bit 8 of the byte is set to one, then the remaining bits are an offset value added to the 16-bit base pointer
defined by byte 3, and the resulting 16-bit value is a UCS2 code point and defines a UCS2 character.
Example 2
Byte 1
'81'
Byte 2
'05'
Byte 3
'13'
Byte 4
'53'
Byte 5
'95'
Byte 6
'A6'
Byte 7
'XX'
Byte 8
'FF'
Byte 9
'FF'
In the above example:
• Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string
• Byte 3 indicates bits 15 to 8 of the base pointer, and indicates a bit pattern of 0hhh hhhh h000 0000 as the 16
bit base pointer number. Bengali characters for example start at code position 0980 (0000 1001 1000 0000),
which is indicated by the coding '13' in byte 3 (shown by the italicized digits).
• Byte 4 indicates GSM Default Alphabet character ‘53’; e.g., "S".
• Byte 5 indicates a UCS2 character offset to the base pointer of '15', expressed in binary as follows 001 0101,
which, when added to the base pointer value results in a sixteen bit value of 0000 1001 1001 0101, e.g.. '0995',
which is the Bengali letter KA.
• Byte 8 contains the value 'FF', but as the string length is 5, this a valid character in the string, where the bit
pattern 111 1111 is added to the base pointer, yielding a sixteen bit value of 0000 1001 1111 1111 for the
UCS2 character (e.g., '09FF').
• Byte 9 contains the padding value 0xFF.
3.
If the first byte of the alpha string is set to '0x82', then the second byte contains the length of the string (number of
characters). The third and fourth bytes contain a 16-bit number that defines the complete 16-bit base pointer to a
"half-page" in the UCS2 code space for use with some or all of the remaining bytes in the string. The fifth and
subsequent bytes in the string contain coding as follows:
• If bit 8 of the byte is set to zero, the remaining 7 bits of the byte contain a GSM Default Alphabet character
• If bit 8 of the byte is set to one, the remaining 7 bits are an offset value added to the base pointer defined in
bytes three and four, and the resultant 16 bit value is a UCS2 code point, and defines a UCS2 character.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
191
Appendix E – Coding of Alpha Fields in the SIM for UCS2
Example 3
Byte 1
'82'
Byte 2
'05'
Byte 3
'05'
Byte 4
'30'
Byte 5
'2D'
Byte 6
'82'
Byte 7
'D3'
Byte 8
'2D'
Byte 9
'31'
In the above example
• Byte 2 indicates there are 5 characters in the string
• Bytes 3 and 4 contain a sixteen bit base pointer number of '0530', pointing to the first character of the Armenian
character set.
• Byte 5 contains a GSM Default Alphabet character of '2D', which is a dash "-".
• Byte 6 contains a value '82', which indicates it is an offset of '02' added to the base pointer, resulting in a UCS2
character code of '0532', which represents Armenian character Capital BEN.
• Byte 7 contains a value 'D3', an offset of '53', which when added to the base pointer results in a UCS2 code
point of '0583', representing Armenian Character small PIWR.
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
192
Appendix F – Command Execution and Dependence on SIM
Appendix F – Command
Execution and Dependence on
SIM
The following table lists AT command execution syntax and the execution condition. The SIM dependency column indicates if
the command behavior will vary if another card is used. For example, it will vary for phonebook reading commands. The
Intermediate column indicates if intermediate response can occur.
General Commands
AT Commands
AT+CGMI
AT+CGMM
AT+CGMR
AT+CGSN
AT+CSCS
AT+WPCS
AT+CIMI
AT+CCID
AT+GCAP
A/
AT+CPOF
AT+CFUN
AT+CPAS
AT+CMEE
AT+CKPD
AT+CCLK
AT+CALA
AT+CRMP
AT+CRSL
AT+CMUX
Conditions
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 1
+WIND: 3
Depends on previous command
+WIND: 3 without SIM,
+WIND: 1 with SIM
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
Depends of the sequence used
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
SIM dependence
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Depends on prev. command
N
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y/N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
Call Control Commands
AT commands
ATD
ATH
ATA
AT+CEER
AT+VTD
AT+VTS
ATDL
AT%D
ATS0
AT+CICB
AT+CSNS
AT+VGR
AT+VGT
AT+CMUT
AT+SPEAKER
AT+ECHO
AT+SIDET
AT+VIP
Conditions
Depends of sequence used
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 5
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 5
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
SIM dependence
Y/N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Intermediate
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
193
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence
Network Service Commands
AT commands
AT+CSQ
AT+COPS
AT+CREG
AT+WOPN
AT+CPLS
AT+CPOL
AT+COPN
Conditions
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
PIN
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
SIM dependence
N
Y
N
N
Y
Y
N
Intermediate
N
N
Y
N
N
Y
N
Security Commands
AT commands
AT+CPIN
AT+CPIN2
AT+CPINC
AT+CLCK
AT+CPWD
Conditions
+WIND: 1
after PIN entered
+WIND: 1
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
SIM dependence
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
Phonebook Commands
AT commands
AT+CPBS
AT+CPBR
AT+CPBF
AT+CPBW
AT+CPBP
AT+CPBN
AT+CNUM
AT+WAIP
AT+WDCP
AT+CSVM
AT+WCOS
AT+WPGW
AT+WPGR
AT+WPGS
Conditions
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
SIM dependence
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
Intermediate
N
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Short Messages Commands
AT commands
AT+CSMS
AT+CNMA
AT+CPMS
AT+CMGF
AT+CSAS
AT+CRES
AT+CSDH
AT+CNMI
AT+CMGR
AT+CMGL
AT+CMGS
AT+CMGW
AT+CMSS
AT+CSMP
AT+CMGD
AT+CSCA
AT+CSCB
AT+WCBM
AT+WMSC
AT+WMGO
AT+WUSS
AT+WMCP
AT+CMMS
Conditions
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 16
+WIND: 3
SIM dependence
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
Y
Y
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
194
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence
Supplementary Services Commands
AT commands
AT+CCFC
AT+CLCK
AT+CPWD
AT+CCWA
AT+CLIR
AT+CLIP
AT+COLP
AT+CAOC
AT+CACM
AT+CAMM
AT+CPUC
AT+CHLD
AT+CLCC
AT+CSSN
AT+CUSD
AT+CCUG
Conditions
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
After PIN entered
+WIND: 5,2
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
SIM dependence
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
N
N
N
Y
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Y
SIM dependence
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SIM dependence
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
Data Commands
AT commands
AT+CBST
AT+FCLASS
AT+CR
AT+CRC
AT+ILRR
AT+CRLP
AT+DOPT
AT%C
AT+DS
AT+DR
\N
Conditions
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
After PIN entered
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
V24-V25 Commands
AT commands
AT+IPR
AT+ICF
AT+IFC
AT&C
AT&D
AT&S
ATO
ATQ
ATV
ATZ
AT&W
AT&T
ATE
AT&F
AT&V
ATI
AT+WMUX
Conditions
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+CLCC:X,0,0,1,X
(data call)
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
195
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence
Specific AT Commands
AT commands
AT+CCED
AT+WIND
AT+ADC
AT+CMER
AT+WLPR
AT+WLPW
AT+WIOR
AT+WIOW
AT+WIOM
AT+WAC
AT+WTONE
AT+WDTMF
AT+WDWL
AT+WVR
AT+WDR
AT+WSVG
AT+WSTR
AT+WSCAN
AT+WRIM
AT+W32K
AT+WCDM
AT+WCCS
AT+WLCK
AT+CPHS
AT+WMIR
AT+WCDP
AT+WMBN
AT+WALS
AT+WOPEN
AT+WRST
AT+WSST
AT+WATH
AT+WMBS
Conditions
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 1
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 1
+WIND: 1
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
None (PIN for auto CNL)
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
PIN
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 3
SIM dependence
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N (Y for auto CNL)
Y
N
N
Y
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
N
SIM Toolkit Commands
AT commands
AT+STSF
AT+STIN
AT+STGI
AT+STGR
Conditions
None
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
SIM dependence
N
Y
Y
Y
Intermediate
N
N
N
N
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
196
Appendix G – Conditions for Command Execution and SIM Dependence
GPRS Commands
AT commands
AT+CGDCONT
AT+CGQREQ
AT+CGQMIN
AT+CGATT
AT+CGACT
AT+CGDATA
AT+CGCLASS
AT+CGCLASS
AT+CGSMS
AT+CGREP
AT+CGREG
AT+CGAUTO
AT+CGANS
AT+CGADDR
AT+WGPRS
Conditions
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 4
+WIND: 3
SIM dependence
Intermediate
N
N
None
N
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
197
Index
Index
%
%C Select Data Compression ........................................ 97
%D Automatic Dialing with DTR ..................................... 23
&
&C Set DCD Signal ...................................................... 101
&D Set DTR Signal....................................................... 102
&F Restore Factory Settings ........................................ 104
&S Set DSR Signal....................................................... 102
&T Auto-Tests .............................................................. 104
&V Display Configuration ............................................. 105
&W Save Configuration ................................................ 103
+
+ADC Analog Digital Converter Measurements ........... 111
+CACM Accumulated Call Meter.................................... 85
+CALA Alarm Management............................................. 18
+CAMM Accumulated Call Meter Maximum ................... 86
+CAOC Advice of Charge .............................................. 85
+CBST Bearer Type Selection ....................................... 93
+CCED Cell Environment Description .......................... 107
+CCFC Call Forwarding .................................................. 80
+CCID Card Identification ............................................... 15
+CCLK Clock Management ............................................. 18
+CCUG Closed User Group ........................................... 91
+CCWA Call Waiting ...................................................... 82
+CEER Extended Error Report .............................. 21, 167
+CFUN Set phone functionality ....................................... 16
+CGACT PDP Context Activate or Deactivate ............. 156
+CGANS Manual Response to Network Request for PDP
Context Activation ...................................................... 165
+CGATT Attach or Detach ........................................... 155
+CGAUTO Automatic Response to Network Request for
PDP Context Activation ............................................. 164
+CGCLASS GPRS Mobile Station Class ..................... 158
+CGDATA Enter Data State ......................................... 157
+CGDCONT Define PDP Context ................................ 149
+CGEREP GPRS Event Reporting .............................. 160
+CGMI Manufacturer identification .................................. 13
+CGMM Request Model Identification ............................. 13
+CGMR Request revision identification ........................... 13
+CGPADDR Show PDP Address ................................. 166
+CGQMIN Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable
................................................................................... 154
+CGQREQ Quality of Service Profile Requested ......... 151
+CGREG GPRS Network Registration Status.............. 161
+CGSMS Select Service for MO SMS Messages ........ 159
+CHLD Call Related Supplementary Services ............... 87
+CICB Incoming Call Bearer .......................................... 24
+CIMI Request IMSI ........................................................ 15
+CKPD Keypad control ................................................... 17
+CLCC List Current Ccalls ............................................. 88
+CLCK Call Barring ........................................................ 81
+CLCK Facility Lock ....................................................... 43
+CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation ............... 83
+CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction .................. 83
+CME Error Result Code .............................................. 173
+CMEE Report Mobile Equipment errors ........................ 17
+CMER Mobile Equipment Event Reporting ................ 112
+CMGD Delete Message ............................................... 73
+CMGF Preferred Message Format ............................... 64
+CMGL List Message..................................................... 69
+CMGR Read Message ................................................. 68
+CMGS Send Message ................................................. 70
+CMGW Write Message to Memory .............................. 71
+CMMS More Messages to Send .................................. 79
+CMS ERROR Message Service Failure Result Code . 174
+CMSS Send Message from Storage ............................ 72
+CMUT Microphone Mute Control ................................. 26
+CNMA New Message Acknowledgement..................... 61
+CNMI New Message Indication .................................... 66
+CNUM Subscriber Number .......................................... 55
+COLP Connected Line Identification Presentation ....... 84
+COPN Read Operator Name ...................................... 39
+COPS Operator Selection ............................................ 31
+CPAS Phone activity status .......................................... 17
+CPBF Find Phonebook Entries .................................... 52
+CPBN Move Action in Phonebook ............................... 54
+CPBP Phonebook Phone Search ................................ 53
+CPBR Read Phonebook Entries .................................. 47
+CPBS Select Phonebook Memory Storage .................. 46
+CPBW Write Phonebook Entry .................................... 49
+CPHS CPHS Command............................................. 126
+CPIN Enter PIN ............................................................ 40
+CPIN2 Enter PIN2 ........................................................ 42
+CPINC PIN Remaining Attempt Number ...................... 42
+CPLS Selection of Preferred PLMN List....................... 36
+CPMS Preferred Message Storage .............................. 63
+CPOF Power off ............................................................ 16
+CPOL Preferred Operator List...................................... 37
+CPUC Price Per Unit and Currency Table ................... 86
+CPWD Change Password ............................................ 44
+CPWD Modify SS Password ........................................ 81
+CR Service Reporting Control .............................. 94, 167
+CRC Cellular Result Codes .................................. 95, 166
+CREG Network Registration ........................................ 33
+CRLP Radio Link Protocol Parameters ........................ 96
+CSAS Save Settings .................................................... 65
+CSCA Service Center Address .................................... 74
+CSCB Select Cell Broadcast Message Types.............. 74
+CSCS Select TE character set ...................................... 14
+CSDH Show Text Mode Parameters ........................... 65
+CSMP Set Text Mode Parameters ............................... 72
+CSMS Select Message Service ................................... 61
+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ............................... 24
+CSQ Signal Quality ...................................................... 31
+CSSN Supplementary Service Notifications................. 89
+CSVM Set Voice Mail Number ..................................... 56
+CUSD Unstructured Supplementary Service Data ....... 90
+DOPT Others Radio Link Parameters .......................... 96
+DR V42bis Data Compression Report.......................... 98
+DS V42bis Data Compression ..................................... 97
+ECHO Echo Cancellation ............................................. 27
+FCLASS Select Mode .................................................. 94
+GCAPCapabilities list .................................................... 15
+ICF DTE-DCE Character Framing ............................. 100
+IFC DTE-DCE Local FLow Control ............................ 101
+ILRR DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting ......................... 95
+IPR Fixed DTE Rate..................................................... 99
+SIDET SideTone Modification ...................................... 30
+SPEAKER Speaker & Microphone Selection ............... 26
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
198
Index
+STCR Unsolicited Result SIM ToolKit Control Response
................................................................................... 146
+STGI SIM ToolKit Get Information .............................. 143
+STGR SIM ToolKit Give Response ............................ 146
+STIN or STRIL SIM ToolKit Indication ........................ 142
+STSF SIM ToolKit Set Facilities ................................. 140
+VGR, +VGT Gain Control ............................................. 24
+VIP Initialize Voice Parameters .................................... 30
+VTD, +VTS DTMF signals ............................................ 21
+W32K 32kHz Power Down Mode ............................... 123
+WAC Abort Command ................................................ 116
+WAIP Avoid Phonebook Initialization ........................... 56
+WALS Alternate Line Service ...................................... 132
+WATH Hang-Up ......................................................... 136
+WCBM Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers.................. 75
+WCCS Custom Character Set .................................... 124
+WCDM Change Default Melody ................................. 123
+WCDP Change Default Player ................................... 130
+WCOS Contact Selector............................................... 57
+WCPI CPHS Information ............................................ 129
+WCSP Customer Service Profile ................................ 130
+WDCI Unsolicited Result Diverted Call Indicator ........ 128
+WDCP Delete Calls Phonebook ................................... 56
+WDR Data Rate ......................................................... 120
+WDTMF Play DTMF Tone .......................................... 118
+WDWL Downloading .................................................. 118
+WGPRS GPRS Parameters Customization ............... 168
+WIND General Indications .......................................... 109
+WIOM Input/Output Management .............................. 115
+WIOR Read GPIO Value ............................................ 114
+WIOW Write GPIO Value ........................................... 114
+WLCK Lock ................................................................ 125
+WLPR Read Language Preference ............................ 113
+WLPW Write Language Preference ........................... 113
+WMBN CPHS Mail Box Number ................................. 131
+WMBS Multi-Band Selection ...................................... 137
+WMCP Copy Messages ............................................... 78
+WMIR Customer Storage Mirror ................................. 130
+WMSC Message Status Modification ........................... 75
+WMUX Multiplexing Mode .......................................... 106
+WNON Network Operator Name ................................ 129
+WOLM Operator List Management .............................. 33
+WOPEN Open AT Control Command ........................ 133
+WOPN Read Operator Name ....................................... 34
+WPCS Phonebook Character Set ................................. 14
+WPGS Settings of a Phonebook Group ....................... 59
+WPGW Create and Delete a Phonebook Group .......... 57
+WPGW Read a Phonebook Group............................... 58
+WRIM Ring Indicator Mode ........................................ 122
+WRST Reset .............................................................. 135
+WSCAN Scan............................................................. 122
+WSST Set Standard Tone .......................................... 135
+WSTR Status Request ............................................... 121
+WSVG Select Voice Gain ........................................... 121
+WTONE Play Tone ..................................................... 117
+WUSS Change or Do Not Change SMS Status ........... 77
+WVMI Unsolicited Result Voice Mail Indicator............ 128
+WVR Voice Rate ........................................................ 119
3
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K ............................... 123
A
A Answer a Call .............................................................. 21
A Remote Disconnection ................................................ 21
A/ Repeat last command ................................................ 15
Abort Command +WAC ................................................ 116
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM.................................... 85
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM ................... 86
Advice of Charge +CAOC .............................................. 85
Alarm Management +CALA ........................................... 18
Alternate Line Service +WALS ..................................... 132
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC ........... 111
Answer a Call A.............................................................. 21
Automatic Answer S0 ..................................................... 23
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D ..................................... 23
Automatic Response to Network Request for PDP Context
Activation +CGAUTO................................................ 164
Auto-Tests &T .............................................................. 104
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP ........................... 56
B
Back to Online Mode O ................................................ 102
Bearer Type Selection +CBST ....................................... 93
C
Call Barring +CLCK ........................................................ 81
Call Forwarding +CCFC ................................................. 80
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD ............... 87
Call Waiting +CCWA ...................................................... 82
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP ............... 83
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR .................. 83
Capabilities list +GCAP ................................................... 15
Card Identification +CCID .............................................. 15
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM ................. 75
Cell Environment Description +CCED .......................... 107
Cellular Result Codes +CRC.................................. 95, 166
Change Default Melody +WCDM ................................. 123
Change Default Player +WCDP ................................... 130
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS ........... 77
Change Password +CPWD ............................................ 44
Clock Management +CCLK............................................ 18
Closed User Group +CCUG ........................................... 91
Command line
AT ................................................................................ 10
Command Type and Next Action Indicator .................... 190
Commands Short Messages
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA ................. 61
Commands, Call Control
Answer a Call A .......................................................... 21
Automatic Answer S0 ................................................. 23
Automatic Dialing with DTR %D ................................. 23
Dial command D ......................................................... 19
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS........................................ 21
Echo Cancellation +ECHO ......................................... 27
Extended Error Report +CEER ................................... 21
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT ......................................... 24
Hang-Up command H ................................................. 20
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB ...................................... 24
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP ................................ 30
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT .............................. 26
Redial Last Telephone Number DL ............................ 22
Remote Disconnection A ............................................ 21
SideTone Modification +SIDET .................................. 30
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS ............................ 24
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER ........... 26
Commands, Data
Bearer Type Selection +CBST ................................... 93
Cellular Result Codes +CRC ...................................... 95
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR ...................... 95
Others Radio Link Parameters +DOPT ...................... 96
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP .................... 96
Select Data Compression %C .................................... 97
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N ........................ 98
Select Mode +FCLASS............................................... 94
Service Reporting Control +CR .................................. 94
V42bis Data Compression +DS .................................. 97
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR ...................... 98
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
199
Index
Commands, General
Alarm Management +CALA ........................................ 18
Capabilities list +GCAP................................................ 15
Card Identification +CCID ............................................ 15
Clock Management +CCLK ........................................ 18
Keypad control +CKPD ............................................... 17
Manufacturer Identification +CGMI .............................. 13
Phone activity status +CPAS ...................................... 17
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS ............................. 14
Power off +CPOF ....................................................... 16
Product Serial Number +CGSN .................................. 14
Repeat last command A/ ............................................ 15
Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE.................... 17
Request IMSI +CIMI ................................................... 15
Request Model Identification +CGMM ......................... 13
Request revision identification +CGMR ....................... 13
Select TE character set +CSCS ................................. 14
Set phone functionality +CFUN .................................. 16
Commands, GPRS
Automatic Response to Network Request for PDP
Context Activation +CGAUTO ................................ 164
Cellular Result Codes +CRC .................................... 166
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT ............................ 149
Enter Data State +CGDATA ..................................... 157
Extended Error Report +CEER ................................. 167
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT............................. 155
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP ........................... 160
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS .................. 158
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG .......... 161
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS ............ 168
Manual Response to Network Request for PDP Context
Activation +CGANS ................................................ 165
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT.......... 156
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable
+CGQMIN .............................................................. 154
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ ..... 151
Request GPRS IP Service D .................................... 162
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS..... 159
Service Reporting Control +CR ................................ 167
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR ............................. 166
Commands, Network Service
Network Registration +CREG ..................................... 33
Operator List Management +WOLM ........................... 33
Operator Selection +COPS......................................... 31
Preferred Operator List +CPOL .................................. 37
Read Operator Name +COPN .................................... 39
Read Operator Name +WOPN ................................... 34
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS ................... 36
Signal Quality +CSQ ................................................... 31
Commands, Phonebook
Avoid Phonebook Initialization +WAIP ........................ 56
Contact Selector +WCOS ........................................... 57
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW....... 57
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP ............................... 56
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF ................................. 52
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN ............................ 54
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP ............................. 53
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGW ........................... 58
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR ............................... 47
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS .............. 46
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM.................................. 56
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS .................... 59
Subscriber Number +CNUM ....................................... 55
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW ................................. 49
Commands, Security
Change Password +CPWD ........................................ 44
Enter PIN +CPIN ........................................................ 40
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 .................................................... 42
Facility Lock +CLCK ................................................... 43
Pin Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC ................... 42
Commands, Short Messages
Cell Broadcast Message Identifiers +WCBM .............. 75
Change or Do Not Change SMS Status +WUSS ........ 77
Copy Messages +WMCP ........................................... 78
Delete Message +CMGD............................................ 73
List Message +CMGL ................................................. 69
Message Overwriting +WMGO .................................... 76
Message Status Modification +WMSC ....................... 75
More Messages to Send +CMMS ............................... 79
New Message Indication +CNMI ................................ 66
Preferred Message Format +CMGF ........................... 64
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS .......................... 63
Read Message +CMGR ............................................. 68
Restore Settings +CRES ............................................ 65
Save Settings +CSAS................................................. 65
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB .......... 74
Select Message Service +CSMS ................................ 61
Send Message +CMGS .............................................. 70
Send Message From Storage +CMSS ....................... 72
Service Center Address +CSCA ................................. 74
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP ........................... 72
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH ........................ 65
Write Message to Memory +CMGW ........................... 71
Commands, SIM ToolKit
SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI .......................... 143
SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR) ....................... 146
SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN or STRIL .................... 142
SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF ............................. 140
Unsolicited Result SIM ToolKit Control Response
+STCR ................................................................... 146
Commands, Specific
32kHz Power Down Mode +W32K ............................ 123
Abort Command +WAC ............................................ 116
Alternate Line Service +WALS ................................. 132
Analog Digital Converter Measurements +ADC ....... 111
Cell Environment Description +CCED ...................... 107
Change Default Melody +WCDM ............................. 123
Change Default Player +WCDP ............................... 130
CPHS Command +CPHS ......................................... 126
CPHS Information +WCPI ........................................ 129
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN ............................. 131
Custom Character Sset +WCCS ............................... 124
Customer Service Profile +WCSP ............................ 130
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR ............................. 130
Data Rate +WDR ...................................................... 120
Downloading +WDWL .............................................. 118
General Indications +WIND ...................................... 109
Hang-Up +WATH ..................................................... 136
Input/Output Management +WIOM ........................... 115
Lock +WLCK ............................................................ 125
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER............. 112
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS .................................. 137
Network Operator Name +WNON ............................ 129
Open AT Control Command +WOPEN..................... 133
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF ...................................... 118
Play Tone +WTONE ................................................. 117
Read GPIO Value +WIOR ........................................ 114
Read Language Preference +WLPR ........................ 113
Reset +WRST .......................................................... 135
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM ..................................... 122
Scan +WSCAN .......................................................... 122
Select Voice Gain +WSVG ....................................... 121
Set Standard Tone +WSST ...................................... 135
Status Request +WSTR ........................................... 121
Unsolicited Result Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI .... 128
Unsolicited Result Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI ........ 128
Voice Rate +WVR .................................................... 119
Write GPIO Value +WIOW ....................................... 114
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
200
Index
Write Language Preference +WLPW ........................ 113
Commands, Supplementary Services
Accumulated Call Meter +CACM ................................ 85
Accumulated Call Meter Maximum +CAMM ............... 86
Advice of Charge +CAOC ........................................... 85
Call Barring +CLCK .................................................... 81
Call Forwarding +CCFC.............................................. 80
Call Related Supplementary Services +CHLD............ 87
Call Waiting +CCWA .................................................. 82
Calling Line Identification Presentation +CLIP ............ 83
Calling Line Identification Restriction +CLIR ............... 83
Closed User Group +CCUG ....................................... 91
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP .... 84
List Current Calls +CLCC ............................................ 88
Modify SS Password +CPWD..................................... 81
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC ................ 86
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN ............. 89
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD ... 90
Commands, V24-V25
Auto-Tests &T ........................................................... 104
Back to Online Mode O............................................. 102
DCE Response Format V ......................................... 103
Default Configuration Z ............................................. 103
Display Configuration &V .......................................... 105
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF .......................... 100
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC .......................... 101
Echo E ...................................................................... 104
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR ................................................. 99
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX ...................................... 106
Request Identification Information I .......................... 105
Restore Factory Settings &F ..................................... 104
Result Code Suppression Q ..................................... 102
Save Configuration &W ............................................ 103
Set DCD Signal &C................................................... 101
Set DSR Signal &S ................................................... 102
Set DTR Signal &D ................................................... 102
Connected Line Identification Presentation +COLP ....... 84
Contact Selector +WCOS............................................... 57
Copy Messages +WMCP ............................................... 78
CPHS Command +CPHS ............................................. 126
CPHS Information +WCPI ............................................ 129
CPHS Information Field................................................. 184
CPHS Mail Box Number +WMBN ................................ 131
Create and Delete a Phonebook Group +WPGW .......... 57
CRES Restore Settings .................................................. 65
CSP Constants .............................................................. 185
Custom Character Set +WCCS .................................... 124
Customer Service Profile +WCSP ................................ 130
Customer Storage Mirror +WMIR ................................. 130
D
D Dial command ............................................................. 19
D Request GPRS IP Service ........................................ 162
Data Rate +WDR ......................................................... 120
DCE Response Format V ............................................. 103
Default Configuration Z ................................................ 103
Define PDP Context +CGDCONT ................................ 149
Delete Calls Phonebook +WDCP ................................... 56
Delete Message +CMGD ............................................... 73
Dial command D ............................................................. 19
Display Configuration &V ............................................. 105
DL Redial Last Telephone Number ................................ 22
Downloading +WDWL .................................................. 118
DTE-DCE Character Framing +ICF.............................. 100
DTE-DCE Local Flow Control +IFC .............................. 101
DTE-DCE Local Rate Reporting +ILRR ......................... 95
DTMF Signals +VTD, +VTS ........................................... 21
E
E Echo ......................................................................... 104
Echo E ......................................................................... 104
Echo Cancellation +ECHO ............................................. 27
Enter Data State +CGDATA......................................... 157
Enter PIN +CPIN ............................................................ 40
Enter PIN2 +CPIN2 ........................................................ 42
Extended Error Report +CEER .............................. 21, 167
F
Facility Lock +CLCK ....................................................... 43
Failure Cause ................................................................ 176
Find Phonebook Entries +CPBF .................................... 52
Fixed DTE Rate +IPR..................................................... 99
G
Gain Control +VGR, +VGT ............................................. 24
General Indications +WIND.......................................... 109
GPRS AT Command Examples .................................... 170
GPRS Attach or Detach +CGATT ................................ 155
GPRS Event Reporting +CGEREP .............................. 160
GPRS Mobile Station Class +CGCLASS ..................... 158
GPRS Network Registration Status +CGREG ............. 161
GPRS Parameters Customization +WGPRS ............... 168
GSM Call Forwarding Sequences List .......................... 182
GSM Call Waiting Sequences List ................................ 183
GSM Security Sequences List ...................................... 182
GSM Sequences List .................................................... 182
H
H Hang-Up command .................................................... 20
Hang-Up +WATH ......................................................... 136
Hang-Up command H .................................................... 20
I
I Request Identification Information .............................. 105
Incoming Call Bearer +CICB .......................................... 24
Information responses, result codes ............................... 10
Initialization ..................................................................... 11
Initialize Voice Parameters +VIP .................................... 30
Input/Output Management +WIOM .............................. 115
K
Keypad control +CKPD .................................................. 17
L
Line settings .................................................................... 10
List Current Calls +CLCC ............................................... 88
List Message +CMGL..................................................... 69
Lock +WLCK ................................................................ 125
M
Manual Response to Network Request for PDP Context
Activation +CGANS .................................................. 165
Manufacturer identification +CGMI .................................. 13
ME Mobile Equipment ...................................................... 9
ME SIM ToolKit Support ................................................ 187
Message Overwriting +WMGO ...................................... 76
Message Status Modification +WMSC ........................... 75
Microphone Mute Control +CMUT ................................. 26
Mobile Equipment ME ...................................................... 9
Mobile Equipment Event Reporting +CMER ................ 112
Mobile Originated Call MOC ............................................ 9
Mobile Station MS ............................................................ 9
Mobile Terminated Call MTC ............................................ 9
MOC Mobile Originated Call ............................................ 9
Modify SS Password +CPWD ........................................ 81
More Messages to Send +CMMS .................................. 79
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
201
Index
Move Action in Phonebook +CPBN................................ 54
MS Mobile Station ............................................................ 9
MTC Mobile Terminated Call ............................................ 9
Multi-Band Selection +WMBS ...................................... 137
Multiplexing Mode +WMUX ........................................... 106
N
N Select Data Error Correcting Mode ............................. 98
Network Operator Name +WNON ................................ 129
Network Registration +CREG......................................... 33
Network Requested PDP Context Activation ................. 163
New Message Acknowledgement +CNMA ..................... 61
New Message Indication +CNMI .................................... 66
O
O Back to Online Mode ................................................ 102
Open AT Control Command +WOPEN ........................ 133
Operator List Management +WOLM .............................. 33
Operator Selection +COPS ............................................ 31
Other Radio Link Parameters +DOPT ............................ 96
P
Parameters Storage Mode ............................................ 180
PDP Context Activate or Deactivate +CGACT .............. 156
Phone activity status +CPAS.......................................... 17
Phone number length ...................................................... 11
Phonebook Character Set +WPCS ................................ 14
Phonebook Phone Search +CPBP................................. 53
PIN Remaining Attempt Number +CPINC ...................... 42
Play DTMF Tone +WDTMF .......................................... 118
Play Tone +WTONE ..................................................... 117
Power off +CPOF ........................................................... 16
Preferred Message Format +CMGF ............................... 64
Preferred Message Storage +CPMS .............................. 63
Preferred Operator List +CPOL ...................................... 37
Price Per Unit and Currency Table +CPUC.................... 86
Product Serial Number +CGSN...................................... 14
Q
Q Result Code Suppression ......................................... 102
Quality of Service Profile Minimum Acceptable +CGQMIN
................................................................................... 154
Quality of Service Profile Requested +CGQREQ ......... 151
R
Radio Link Protocol Parameters +CRLP ........................ 96
Read a Phonebook Group +WPGW............................... 58
Read GPIO Value +WIOR ............................................ 114
Read Language Preference +WLPR ............................ 113
Read Message +CMGR ................................................. 68
Read Operator Name +COPN........................................ 39
Read Operator Name +WOPN ....................................... 34
Read Phonebook Entries +CPBR .................................. 47
Redial Last Telephone Number DL ................................ 22
Remote Disconnection A ................................................ 21
Repeat last command A/ ................................................. 15
Report Mobile Equipment errors +CMEE ....................... 17
Report Mobile Equipment errors+CMEE ......................... 17
Request GPRS IP Service D ........................................ 162
Request Identification Information I .............................. 105
Request IMSI +CIMI ........................................................ 15
Request Model Identification +CGMM ............................. 13
Request revision identification +CGMR ........................... 13
Reset +WRST .............................................................. 135
Restore Factory Settings &F ........................................ 104
Restore Settings +CRES ................................................ 65
Result Code Suppression Q ......................................... 102
Result Codes Final ........................................................ 179
Result Codes Intermediate ............................................ 179
Ring Indicator Mode +WRIM ........................................ 122
S
S0 Automatic Answer ..................................................... 23
Save Configuration &W ................................................ 103
Save Settings +CSAS .................................................... 65
Scan +WSCAN ............................................................ 122
Select Cell Broadcast Message Types +CSCB.............. 74
Select Data Compression %C ........................................ 97
Select Data Error Correcting Mode \N............................ 98
Select Message Service +CSMS ................................... 61
Select Mode +FCLASS .................................................. 94
Select Phonebook Memory Storage +CPBS .................. 46
Select Service for MO SMS Messages +CGSMS ........ 159
Select TE character set +CSCS ..................................... 14
Select Voice Gain +WSVG........................................... 121
Selection of Preferred PLMN List +CPLS....................... 36
Send Message +CMGS ................................................. 70
Send Message from Storage +CMSS ............................ 72
Service Center Address +CSCA .................................... 74
Service Reporting Control +CR .............................. 94, 167
Set DCD Signal &C ...................................................... 101
Set DSR Signal &S ...................................................... 102
Set DTR Signal &D ...................................................... 102
Set phone functionality +CFUN ...................................... 16
Set Standard Tone +WSST.......................................... 135
Set Text Mode Parameters +CSMP ............................... 72
Set Voice Mail Number +CSVM ..................................... 56
Settings of a Phonebook Group +WPGS ....................... 59
Short Messages Commands Parameters Definition........ 60
Show PDP Address +CGPADDR ................................. 166
Show Text Mode Parameters +CSDH ........................... 65
SideTone Modification +SIDET ...................................... 30
Signal Quality +CSQ ...................................................... 31
SIM Application ToolKit Overview ................................. 138
SIM Card Insertion and Removal .................................... 11
SIM Conditions
Call Control Commands List ...................................... 193
Data Commands List ................................................. 195
General Commands List ............................................ 193
GPRS Commands List .............................................. 197
Network Service Commands List............................... 194
Phonebook Commands List....................................... 194
Security Commands List ............................................ 194
Short Messages Commands List ............................... 194
SIM Toolkit Commands List ....................................... 196
Specific AT Commands List....................................... 196
Supplementary Commands List................................. 195
V24-V25 Commands List ........................................... 195
SIM Conditions for Command Execution and Dependence
.................................................................................. 193
SIM for UCS2, Coding of Alpha Fields .......................... 191
SIM Toolkit Error Codes ................................................ 140
SIM ToolKit Get Information +STGI ............................. 143
SIM ToolKit Give Response +STGR ............................ 146
SIM ToolKit Indication +STIN or STRIL ........................ 142
SIM ToolKit Set Facilities +STSF ................................. 140
Single Numbering Scheme +CSNS ............................... 24
Speaker & Microphone Selection +SPEAKER ............... 26
Specific Error Result Codes .......................................... 174
Status Request +WSTR ............................................... 121
Structure of Terminal Profile ......................................... 188
Subscriber Number +CNUM .......................................... 55
Supplementary Service Notifications +CSSN................. 89
T
TE Terminal Equipment ................................................... 9
Terminal Equipment TE ................................................... 9
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
202
Index
U
Unsolicited Result Codes .............................................. 179
Unsolicited Result Diverted Call Indicator +WDCI ........ 128
Unsolicited Result SIM ToolKit Control Response +STCR
................................................................................... 146
Unsolicited Result Voice Mail Indicator +WVMI............ 128
Unstructured Supplementary Service Data +CUSD ....... 90
Using Commands During Data Connection..................... 92
V
V DCE Response Format ............................................. 103
V42bis Data Compression +DS ..................................... 97
V42bis Data Compression Report +DR.......................... 98
Voice Rate +WVR ........................................................ 119
W
Write GPIO Value +WIOW ........................................... 114
Write Language Preference +WLPW ........................... 113
Write Message to Memory +CMGW .............................. 71
Write Phonebook Entry +CPBW .................................... 49
Z
Z Default Configuration ................................................ 103
Multi-Tech Systems, Inc. GPRS AT Commands Reference Guide (Document Number S000293K)
203
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement